2007 Ridgeline: Owner's Manual (Unlinked)

2007 Ridgeline
Owner’s Manual
(Unlinked)
This document does not contain hyperlinks and may be formatted for printing instead of web us. This is
due to changes in content and specifications of the vehicle that happen throughout the model year. This
manual will be replaced with a hyperlinked version at the end of the model year.
© 2006 Honda Motor Co., Ltd. P/N 31SJC6110
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

０６／０４／２８１４：０９：５７３１ＳＪＣ６１００００１
Owner’s Identification
OWNER This owner’s manual should be considered

a permanent part of the vehicle and should
remain with the vehicle when it is sold.
This owner’s manual covers all models of

ADDRESS the Ridgeline. You may find descriptions of
STREET equipment and features that are not on your
particular model.
The information and specifications included

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/ in this publication were in effect at the time
POSTAL CODE of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co.,
V. I. N. Ltd. reserves the right, however, to
discontinue or change specifications or
design at any time without notice and
DELIVERY DATE without incurring any obligation whatsoever.
(Date sold to original retail purchaser)
DEALER NAME DEALER NO. POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN

AVIS IMPORTANT: Si vous avez
besoin d’un Manuel du Conducteur
ADDRESS en français, veuillez demander à
STREET votre concessionnaire de
commander le numéro de pièce
33SJCC10
CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/
POSTAL CODE
OWNER’S SIGNATURE
DEALER’S SIGNATURE

０６／０４／２８１４：１０：０２３１ＳＪＣ６１００００２
Introduction
Congratulations! Your selection of a 2007 Honda Ridgeline was a wise As you read this manual, you will
investment. It will give you years of driving pleasure. find information that is preceded by
a symbol. This
One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is to information is intended to help you
read this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls and avoid damage to your vehicle, other
convenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle so property, or the environment.
you can refer to it at any time.
Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty booklet
thoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rights
and responsibilities.
Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the

instrument panel helps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves
your investment. When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that
your dealer’s staff is specially trained in servicing the many systems unique
to your vehicle. Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be
pleased to answer any questions and concerns.

０６／０４／２８１４：１０：０５３１ＳＪＣ６１００００３
Introduction
California Proposition 65 Warning
WARNING: This product contains or emits chemicals known to the state of California to cause cancer and birth
defects or other reproductive harm.
Event Date Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one or more devices commonly referred to as event data recorders. These devices record
front seat belt use, front passenger seat occupancy, airbag deployment data, and the failure of any airbag system
component. This data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required
or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data
can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may
also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential and is never linked to
the vehicle owner.
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act

The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle contain perchlorate materials - special handling
may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.
ii

０６／０４／２８１４：１０：１５３１ＳＪＣ６１００００４
A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,
is very important. And operating this including:
vehicle safely is an important
responsibility. Safety Labels − on the vehicle.
Safety Messages − preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of
To help you make informed three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
decisions about safety, we have These signal words mean:
provided operating procedures and
other information on labels and in You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
this manual. This information alerts HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
you to potential hazards that could
hurt you or others. You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY
HURT if you don’t follow instructions.
Of course, it is not practical or
possible to warn you about all the You CAN be HURT if you don’t follow
hazards associated with operating or instructions.
maintaining your vehicle. You must
use your own good judgement. Safety Headings − such as Important Safety Reminders or Important
Safety Precautions.
Safety Section − such as Driver and Passenger Safety.
Instructions − how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.
This entire book is filled with important safety information − please read it
carefully.
iii

０６／０４／２８１４：１０：２１３１ＳＪＣ６１００００５
Important Handling Information
Your vehicle has higher ground clearance than a passenger vehicle designed for use only on pavement. Higher ground
clearance has many advantages for off-highway driving. It allows you to travel over bumps, obstacles, and rough
terrain. It also provides good visibility so you can anticipate problems earlier. Your vehicle also has a shorter
wheelbase, allowing it to respond quicker to the steering wheel than other sport utility vehicles with a longer
wheelbase.
In addition to these characteristics, your vehicle’s pickup bed area allows you to carry more cargo and has the dual-
action tailgate to handle the items easily.
These advantages come at some cost. Because your vehicle is taller and rides higher off the ground, it has a high
center of gravity. This means your vehicle can tip or roll over if you make abrupt turns. Utility vehicles have a
significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly
more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt. As a reminder, make sure you and your passengers always wear
seat belts.
Overloading or improperly loading cargo could affect your handling and the vehicle’s stability, and could result in a
crash. Make sure the cargo is properly loaded and all items are secured in the pickup bed area.
For information on how to reduce the risk of rollover, read ‘‘Driving Guidelines’’ on page 194 of this manual and the
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines section on page 227 . Failure to operate your vehicle correctly might result in loss of
control or an accident.
iv

０６／０４／２８１４：１０：３１３１ＳＪＣ６１００００６
Contents
Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3
Driver and Passenger Safety (seat belts, SRS, and child protection) ............................................................. 5
Instruments and Controls (indicators, gauges, dashboard, and steering column) ........................................... 57
Features (climate, audio, steering wheel, security, cruise control, and HomeLink) ......................................... 121
Before Driving (fuel, vehicle break-in, and cargo loading) ........................................................................ 177
Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 193
Maintenance (minder, fluid checking, minor services, and vehicle storage).................................................. 233
Taking Care of the Unexpected (flat tire, dead battery, overheating, fuses) ................................................ 273
Technical Information (vehicle specifications, tires, fuels, and emissions controls) ....................................... 299
Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada only) (warranty and contact information)................... 311
Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 315
Index ................................................................................................................................................. I
INDEX
Service Information Summary (fluid capacities and tire pressures) ................................................... last page

０６／０４／２８１４：１０：４８３１ＳＪＣ６１００００７
Overview of Contents
Contents Before Driving Technical Information

A convenient reference to the What gasoline to use, how to break- ID numbers, dimensions, capacities,
sections in this manual. in your new vehicle, and how to load and technical information.
luggage and other cargo.
Your Vehicle at a Glance Warranty and Customer
A quick reference to the main Driving Relations
controls in your vehicle. The proper way to start the engine, (U.S. and Canada only)
shift the transmission, and park; plus A summary of the warranties
Driver and Passenger Safety what you need to know if you’re covering your new vehicle, and how
Important information about the planning to tow a trailer. to contact us for any reason. Refer to
proper use and care of your vehicle’s your warranty manual for detailed
seat belts, an overview of the Maintenance information.
supplemental restraint system, and The maintenance minder shows you
valuable information on how to when you need to take your vehicle Authorized Manuals
protect children with child restraints. to the dealer for maintenance service. (U.S. only)
There is also a list of things to check How to order manuals and other
Instruments and Controls and instructions on how to check technical literature.
Explains the purpose of each them.
instrument panel indicator and gauge, Index
and how to use the controls on the Taking Care of the Unexpected
dashboard and steering column. This section covers several problems Service Information Summary
motorists sometimes experience, A summary of the information you
Features and details how to handle them. need when you pull up to the fuel
How to operate the heating and air pump.
conditioning system, the audio
system, and other convenience
features.
2

０６／０４／２８１４：１０：５５３１ＳＪＣ６１００００８
Your Vehicle at a Glance
INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.59) DRIVER’S FRONT REAR VIEW MIRROR WITH PASSENGER’S FRONT
GAUGES (P.70) AIRBAG (P.9, 23) COMPASS＊ (P.168)

AIRBAG (P.9, 23)
AUDIO SYSTEM
(P.133)
PARKING BRAKE
RELEASE HANDLE AUXILIARY INPUT
(P.109) JACK＊
(P.161)
MIRROR CONTROLS
(P.111) HEATING/COOLING
POWER DOOR LOCK CONTROLS (P.122)
MASTER SWITCH CLIMATE CONTROL
(P.83) SYSTEM (P.128)
POWER WINDOW GLOVE BOX

SWITCHES (P.115)
(P.105)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.181)
FUEL FILL DOOR
RELEASE HANDLE PARKING BRAKE
(P.179) PEDAL (P.109) CENTER CONSOLE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
(P.113) (P.116)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown.
＊ : If equipped CONTINUED

０６／０４／２８１４：１１：０４３１ＳＪＣ６１００００９
MOONROOF SWITCH＊2 INSTRUMENT PANEL SHIFT LEVER (P.197)

(P.108) BRIGHTNESS (P.78)
HORN＊1 VTM-4 LOCK (P.203)
MULTI-CONTROL LEVER SELECT BUTTON
(WINDSHIELD WIPERS/ (P.70)
WASHERS/TURN SIGNALS/
HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAMS) RESET BUTTON
(P.75) (P.70)
BED LIGHT SWITCH PASSENGER AIRBAG
(P.120) OFF INDICATOR
(P.29)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL
DIAL (P.76)
HAZARD WARNING
BUTTON
VEHICLE STABILITY (P.79)
ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P.211)
CRUISE BUTTON
(P.165)
REMOTE AUDIO VOICE CONTROL CRUISE CONTROLS
CONTROLS＊2 (P.161) SWITCHES＊3 (P.165) SEAT HEATERS＊2
INTERIOR LIGHT
STEERING WHEEL CONTROL SWITCH (P.104)
Vehicle with navigation system is shown. ADJUSTMENT (P.79) (P.118)
＊ 1 : To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
＊ 2 : If equipped.
＊ 3 : Only on vehicles equipped with navigation system. Refer to the navigation system manual.
4

０６／０４／２８１４：１１：０９３１ＳＪＣ６１０００１０
Driver and Passenger Safety
This section gives you important Additional Information About Your All Children Should Sit in a
information about how to protect Seat Belts .................................. 18 Back Seat .................................. 33
yourself and your passengers. It Seat Belt System Components ... 18 The Passenger’s Front Airbag
shows you how to use seat belts. It Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 19 Can Pose Serious Risks .......... 33

explains how your airbags work. And Automatic Seat Belt If You Must Drive with Several
it tells you how to properly restrain Tensioners ................................ 19 Children .................................... 35
infants and children in your vehicle. Seat Belt Maintenance ................ 20 If a Child Requires Close
Additional Information About Attention ................................... 35
Your Airbags ............................ 21 Additional Safety Precautions .... 36
Airbag System Components ....... 21 Protecting Infants and Small
How Your Front Airbags Children .................................... 37
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 Work.......................................... 23 Protecting Infants ........................ 37
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features........ 7 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 26 Protecting Small Children .......... 38
Seat Belts ........................................ 8 How your Side Curtain Airbags Selecting a Child Seat ...................... 39
Airbags ............................................ 9 Work.......................................... 28 Installing a Child Seat ..................... 40
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11 How the SRS Indicator Works ... 28 With LATCH ................................ 41
1. Close and Lock the Doors ...... 11 How the Side Airbag Off With a Lap/Shoulder Belt .......... 44
2. Adjust the Front Seats ............ 11 Indicator Works ....................... 29 With a Tether ............................... 46
3. Adjust the Seat-Backs ............. 12 How the Passenger Airbag Off Protecting Larger Children ............ 49
4. Adjust the Head Restraints .... 13 Indicator Works ....................... 29 Checking Seat Belt Fit ................ 49
5. Fasten and Position the Airbag Service .............................. 30 Using a Booster Seat ................... 50
Seat Belts .............................. 14 Additional Safety Precautions .... 31 When Can a Larger Child Sit in
6. Maintain a Proper Sitting Protecting Children−General Front .......................................... 51
Position ................................. 15 Guidelines ................................. 32 Additional Safety Precautions .... 52
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16 All Children Must Be Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 53
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17 Restrained ................................ 32 Safety Labels .................................... 54

０６／０４／２８１４：１１：１８３１ＳＪＣ６１０００１１
Important Safety Precautions
You’ll find many safety Restrain All Children every additional drink. So don’t drink
recommendations throughout this Children age 12 and under should and drive, and don’t let your friends
section, and throughout this manual. ride properly restrained in a back drink and drive, either.
The recommendations on this page seat, not the front seat. Infants and
are the ones we consider to be the small children should be restrained Control Your Speed
most important. in a child seat. Larger children Excessive speed is a major factor in
should use a booster seat and a lap/ crash injuries and deaths. Generally,
Always Wear Your Seat Belt shoulder belt until they can use the the higher the speed, the greater the
A seat belt is your best protection in belt properly without a booster seat risk, but serious injuries can also
all types of collisions. Airbags are (see pages 32 − 52 ). occur at lower speeds. Never drive
designed to supplement seat belts, faster than is safe for current
not replace them. So even though Be Aware of Airbag Hazards conditions, regardless of the
your vehicle is equipped with airbags, While airbags can save lives, they maximum speed posted.
make sure you and your passenger can cause serious or fatal injuries to
always wear your seat belts, and occupants who sit too close to them, Keep Your Vehicle in Safe
wear them properly (see page 14 ). or are not properly restrained. Condition
Infants, young children, and short Having a tire blowout or a
adults are at the greatest risk. Be mechanical failure can be extremely
sure to follow all instructions and hazardous. To reduce the possibility
warnings in this manual. of such problems, check your tire
pressures and condition frequently,
Don’t Drink and Drive and perform all regularly scheduled
Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Even maintenance (see page 235 ).
one drink can reduce your ability to
respond to changing conditions, and
your reaction time gets worse with

０６／０４／２８１４：１１：２５３１ＳＪＣ６１０００１２
Your Vehicle’s Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many

(7) (9) (10) (3) (1) (4) (11) (10) features that work together to
protect you and your passengers
during a crash.

Some features do not require any
action on your part. These include a
strong steel framework that forms a
safety cage around the passenger
compartment, front and rear crush
zones, a collapsible steering column,
and tensioners that tighten the front
seat belts in a crash.
(6) (2)
However, you and your passengers
(5) (8) can’t take full advantage of these
features unless you remain sitting in
(1) Safety Cage a proper position and always wear
(2) Crush Zones your seat belts. In fact, some safety
(3) Seats and Seat-Backs
(4) Head Restraints features can contribute to injuries if
(5) Collapsible Steering Column they are not used properly.
(2) (6) Seat Belts
(7) Front Airbags The following pages explain how you
(8) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(9) Door Locks can take an active role in protecting
(10) Side Airbags yourself and your passengers.
(11) Side Curtain Airbags

０６／０４／２８１４：１１：３６３１ＳＪＣ６１０００１３
Seat Belts Why Wear Seat Belts

Your vehicle is equipped with seat Seat belts are the single most
belts in all seating positions. effective safety device for adults and Not wearing a seat belt properly
larger children. (Infants and smaller increases the chance of serious
The pickup bed is not equipped with children must be properly restrained injury or death in a crash, even
seats or seat belts. Do not let anyone in child seats.) though your vehicle has airbags.
ride in the pickup bed as they can
easily be thrown out and be killed or Not wearing a seat belt properly Be sure you and your
seriously injured. increases the chance of serious passengers always wear seat
injury or death in a crash, even belts and wear them properly.
Your seat belt system also includes though your vehicle has airbags.
an indicator on the instrument panel
and a beeper to remind you and your In addition, most states and all Help protect you in almost every
passengers to fasten your seat belts. Canadian provinces require you to type of crash, including frontal,
wear seat belts. side and rear impacts, and
rollovers.
When properly worn, seat belts:
Allowing passengers to ride in Help keep you from being thrown
the pickup bed or on the tailgate Keep you connected to the vehicle against the inside of the vehicle
can result in death or serious so you can take advantage of the and against other occupants.
injury in a crash. vehicle’s built-in safety features.
Keep you from being thrown out
Make sure all passengers ride of the vehicle.
in a seat and wear a seat belt
properly.

０６／０４／２８１４：１１：４４３１ＳＪＣ６１０００１４
Help keep you in a good position Airbags

should the airbags ever deploy. A
good position reduces the risk of
injury from an inflating airbag and

allows you to get the best
advantage from the airbag.
Of course, seat belts cannot

completely protect you in every
crash. But in most cases, seat belts
can reduce your risk of serious
injury.
What you should do: Always wear

your seat belt, and make sure you Your vehicle has a supplemental Your vehicle has side airbags to help
wear it properly. restraint system (SRS) with front protect the upper torso of the driver
airbags to help protect the heads and or a front seat passenger during a
chests of the driver and a front seat moderate to severe side impact (see
passenger during a moderate to page 26 for more information on how
severe frontal collision (see page your side airbags work).
23 for more information on how
your front airbags work).
CONTINUED

０６／０４／２８１４：１１：５１３１ＳＪＣ６１０００１５
The most important things you need What you should do: Always wear
to know about your airbags are: your seat belt properly, and sit
upright and as far back from the
Airbags do not replace seat belts. steering wheel as possible while
They are designed to supplement allowing full control of the vehicle. A
the seat belts. front passenger should move their
seat as far back from the dashboard
Airbags offer no protection in rear as possible.
impacts, or minor frontal or side
collisions. The rest of this section gives more
detailed information about how you
Airbags can pose serious hazards. can maximize your safety.
To do their job, airbags must
inflate with tremendous force. So Remember, however, that no safety
Your vehicle has side curtain airbags while airbags help save lives, they system can prevent all injuries or
to help protect the heads of the can cause minor injuries or more deaths that can occur in a severe
driver, front passenger, and serious or even fatal injuries if crash, even when seat belts are
passengers in the outer rear seating occupants are not properly properly worn and the airbags deploy.
positions during a moderate to restrained or sitting properly.
severe side impact or rollover (see
page 28 for more information on how
your side curtain airbags work).
10

０６／０４／２８１４：１２：０３３１ＳＪＣ６１０００１６
Protecting Adults and Teens
Introduction Your vehicle has a door and 2.Adjust the Front Seats
The following pages provide tailgate open monitor on
instructions on how to properly the instrument panel to indicate
protect the driver, adult passengers, when a specific door or the tailgate is

and teenage children who are large not tightly closed.
enough and mature enough to drive
or ride in the front. Your vehicle also has an
In-Bed Trunk open
See pages 32 − 52 for important indicator to show when the In-Bed
guidelines on how to properly Trunk lid is not tightly closed (see
protect infants, small children, and page 96 ).
larger children who ride in your
vehicle. Locking the doors also helps prevent
an outsider from unexpectedly
1.Close and Lock the Doors opening a door when you come to a Adjust the driver’s seat as far to the
After everyone has entered the stop. rear as possible while allowing you to
vehicle, be sure the doors are closed maintain full control of the vehicle.
and locked. Before driving, be sure See page 83 for how to lock the Have a front passenger adjust their
the tailgate is also closed. doors, and page 64 for how the door seat as far to the rear as possible.
and tailgate open monitor works.
Locking the doors reduces the
chance of someone being thrown out
of the vehicle during a crash, and it
helps prevent passengers from
accidentally opening a door and
falling out. CONTINUED
11

０６／０４／２８１４：１２：１１３１ＳＪＣ６１０００１７
If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

wheel or dashboard, you can be
seriously injured by an inflating front Sitting too close to a front
airbag, or by striking the steering airbag can result in serious
wheel or dashboard. injury or death if the front
airbags inflate.
The National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration and Transport Always sit as far back from the
Canada recommend that drivers front airbags as possible.
allow at least 10 inches (25 cm)
between the center of the steering
wheel and the chest. On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,
If you cannot get far enough away rock it back and forth to make sure it
from the steering wheel and still is locked into position. See page Adjust the driver’s seat-back to a
reach the controls, we recommend 98 for how to adjust the front seats. comfortable, upright position,
that you investigate whether some leaving ample space between your
type of adaptive equipment may help. chest and the airbag cover in the
center of the steering wheel.
Passengers with adjustable seat-

backs should also adjust their seat-
back to a comfortable, upright
position.
12

０６／０４／２８１４：１２：２０３１ＳＪＣ６１０００１８
4.Adjust the Head Restraints When a passenger is seated in the

rear center seating position, make
Reclining the seat-back too far sure the center head restraint is
can result in serious injury or adjusted to its highest position.

death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an

upright position, and sit well Improperly positioning head
back in the seat. restraints reduces their
effectiveness and you can be
seriously injured in a crash.
Reclining a seat-back so that the
shoulder part of the belt no longer Make sure head restraints are
rests against the occupant’s chest in place and positioned properly
reduces the protective capability of Adjust the driver’s head restraint so before driving.
the belt. It also increases the chance the back of your head rests against
of sliding under the belt in a crash the center of the restraint.
and being seriously injured. The Properly adjusted head restraints
farther a seat-back is reclined, the Have passengers adjust their head will help protect occupants from
greater the risk of injury. restraints properly as well. Taller whiplash and other crash injuries.
persons should adjust their restraint
See pages 98 and 100 for how to as high as possible. See page 102 for how to adjust the
adjust the seat-backs. head restraints.
13

０６／０４／２８１４：１２：２７３１ＳＪＣ６１０００１９
5.Fasten and Position the Seat If necessary, pull up on the belt again
Belts to remove any slack, then check that
Insert the latch plate into the buckle, the belt rests across the center of
then tug on the belt to make sure the your chest and over your shoulder.
belt is securely latched. Check that
the belt is not twisted, because a This spreads the forces of a crash
twisted belt can cause serious over the strongest bones in your
injuries in a crash. upper body.
Improperly positioning the seat

belts can cause serious injury
Position the lap part of the belt as or death in a crash.
low as possible across your hips,
then pull up on the shoulder part of Make sure all seat belts are
the belt so the lap part fits snugly. properly positioned before
This lets your strong pelvic bones driving.
take the force of a crash and reduces
the chance of internal injuries.
If the seat belt touches or crosses
your neck, or if it crosses your arm
instead of your shoulder, you need to
adjust the seat belt anchor height.
14

０６／０４／２８１４：１２：３５３１ＳＪＣ６１０００２０
Never place the shoulder portion of a 6.Maintain a Proper Sitting

RELEASE lap/shoulder belt under your arm or Position
BUTTONS behind your back. This could cause After all occupants have adjusted
very serious injuries in a crash. their seats and put on seat belts, it is

very important that they continue to
If a seat belt does not seem to work sit upright, well back in their seats,
as it should, it may not protect the with their feet on the floor, until the
occupant in a crash. vehicle is parked and the engine is
off.
No one should sit in a seat with an
inoperative seat belt. Using a seat Sitting improperly can increase the
belt that is not working properly can chance of injury during a crash. For
result in serious injury or death. example, if an occupant slouches,
The front seats have adjustable seat Have your dealer check the belt as lies down, turns sideways, sits
belt anchors. To adjust the height of soon as possible. forward, leans forward or sideways,
an anchor, squeeze the two release or puts one or both feet up, the
buttons, and slide the anchor up or See page 18 for additional chance of injury during a crash is
down as needed (it has four information about your seat belts greatly increased.
positions). and how to take care of them.
CONTINUED
15

０６／０４／２８１４：１２：４２３１ＳＪＣ６１０００２１
In addition, an occupant who is out of Advice for Pregnant Women When driving, remember to sit
position in the front seat can be upright and adjust the seat as far
seriously or fatally injured in a crash back as possible while allowing full
by striking interior parts of the control of the vehicle. When riding
vehicle or being struck by an as a front passenger, adjust the seat
inflating front airbag. as far back as possible.
This will reduce the risk of injuries

to both you and your unborn child
Sitting improperly or out of that can be caused by a crash or an
position can result in serious inflating front airbag.
injury or death in a crash.
Each time you have a checkup, ask
Always sit upright, well back in your doctor if it’s okay for you to
the seat, with your feet on the If you are pregnant, the best way to drive.
floor. protect yourself and your unborn
child when driving or riding in a
vehicle is to always wear a seat belt,
and keep the lap part of the belt as
low as possible across the hips.
16

０６／０４／２８１４：１２：５０３１ＳＪＣ６１０００２２
Additional Safety Precautions Two people should never use the Keep your hands and arms away
Never let passengers ride in the same seat belt. If they do, they from the airbag covers. If your
area in front of a folded-up rear could be very seriously injured in a hands or arms are close to an
seat. If they do, they could be very crash. airbag cover, they could be injured

seriously injured in a crash. if the airbag inflates.
Do not put any accessories on seat
Never let passengers ride in the belts. Devices intended to improve Do not attach or place objects on
pickup bed. If they do, they could occupant comfort or reposition the the front airbag covers. Objects on
be killed or very seriously injured shoulder part of a seat belt can the covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’
in a crash. reduce the protective capability of could interfere with the proper
the seat belt and increase the operation of the airbags or be
Never let passengers ride inside a chance of serious injury in a crash. propelled inside the vehicle and
truck cap (shell). They could be hurt someone if the airbags inflate.
killed or injured in a crash, or Do not place hard or sharp objects
become ill or even die from carbon between yourself and a front Do not attach solid objects on or
monoxide poisoning if engine airbag. Carrying hard or sharp near a door. If a side airbag or a
exhaust enters the cap. objects on your lap, or driving with side curtain airbag inflates, a cup
a pipe or other sharp object in holder or other solid object
Passengers should not stand up or your mouth, can result in injuries attached on or near the door could
change seats while the vehicle is if your front airbag inflates. be propelled inside the vehicle and
moving. A passenger who is not hurt someone.
wearing a seat belt during a crash
or emergency stop can be thrown
against the inside of the vehicle,
against other occupants, or out of
the vehicle.
17

０６／０４／２８１４：１２：５９３１ＳＪＣ６１０００２３
Additional Information About Your Seat Belts
Seat Belt System Components the beeper stops, the indicator will If the indicator comes on or the
Your seat belt system includes lap/ stop flashing but remain on. beeper sounds when the driver’s seat
shoulder belts in all five seating belt is latched and there is no front
positions. The front seat belts are If a front passenger does not fasten seat passenger and no items on the
also equipped with automatic seat their seat belt, the indicator will front seat, something may be
belt tensioners. come on about 6 seconds after the interfering with the monitoring
ignition switch is turned to the ON system. Look for and remove:
This system uses the same sensors (II) position.
as the front airbags to monitor Any items under the front
whether the front seat belts are If either the driver or a front passenger’s seat.
latched or unlatched, and how much passenger does not fasten their seat
weight is on the front passenger’s belt while driving, the beeper will Any objects hanging on the seat or
seat (see pages 25 and 26 ). sound and the indicator will flash in the seat-back pocket.
again at regular intervals.
The seat belt system Any object on the floor that is
includes an indicator on the When no one is sitting in the front touching the rear of the seat-back.
instrument panel and a beeper to passenger’s seat, or a child or small
remind you and your passengers to adult is riding there, the indicator If no obstructions are found, have
fasten your seat belts. should not come on and the beeper your vehicle checked by a dealer.
should not sound.
This system monitors the front seat
belts. If you turn the ignition switch
to the ON (II) position before your
seat belt is fastened, the beeper will
sound and the indicator will flash. If
your seat belt is not fastened before
18

０６／０４／２８１４：１３：０８３１ＳＪＣ６１０００２４
Lap/Shoulder Belt All seat belts have an emergency Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The lap/shoulder belt goes over locking retractor. In normal driving,
your shoulder, across your chest, the retractor lets you move freely in
and across your hips. your seat while it keeps some

tension on the belt. During a collision
To fasten the belt, insert the latch or sudden stop, the retractor
plate into the buckle, then tug on the automatically locks the belt to help
belt to make sure the buckle is restrain your body.
latched (see page 14 for how to
properly position the belt). The seat belts in all positions except
the driver’s have an additional
To unlock the belt, press the red lockable retractor that must be
PRESS button on the buckle. Guide activated to secure a child seat (see
the belt across your body so that it page 44 ).
retracts completely. After exiting the For added protection, the front seat
vehicle, be sure the belt is out of the If the shoulder part of the belt is belts are equipped with automatic
way and will not get closed in the pulled all the way out, the lockable seat belt tensioners. When activated,
door. retractor will activate. The belt will the tensioners immediately tighten
retract, but it will not allow the the belts to help hold the driver and
passenger to move freely. a front passenger in position.
To deactivate the lockable retractor,

unlatch the buckle and let the seat
belt fully retract. To refasten the
seat belt, pull it out only as far as
needed. CONTINUED
19

０６／０４／２８１４：１３：１７３１ＳＪＣ６１０００２５
The tensioners are designed to Seat Belt Maintenance If a seat belt is worn during a crash,
activate in any collision severe For safety, you should check the it must be replaced by the dealer. A
enough to cause the front airbags to condition of your seat belts regularly. belt that has been worn during a
deploy, or if a sensor detects your crash may not provide the same level
vehicle is about to roll over (see page Pull each belt out fully, and look for of protection in a subsequent crash.
28 ). frays, cuts, burns, and wear. Check
that the latches work smoothly and The dealer should also inspect the
If a side airbag or side curtain airbag the belts retract easily. If a belt does anchors for damage and replace
deploys during a side impact, the not retract easily, cleaning the belt them if needed. If the automatic seat
tensioner on that side of the vehicle may correct the problem (see page belt tensioners activate during a
will also deploy. 261 ). Any belt that is not in good crash, they must be replaced.
condition or working properly will
The tensioners can also be activated not provide good protection and
during a collision in which the front should be replaced as soon as
airbags do not deploy. In this case, the possible. Not checking or maintaining
airbags would not be needed, but the seat belts can result in serious
additional restraint could be helpful. Honda provides a limited warranty injury or death if the seat belts
on seat belts. See your Honda do not work properly when
When the tensioners are activated, Warranty Information booklet for needed.
the seat belts will remain tight until details.
they are unbuckled. Check your seat belts regularly
and have any problem
corrected as soon as possible.
20

０６／０４／２８１４：１３：２６３１ＳＪＣ６１０００２６
Additional Information About Your Airbags
Airbag System Components Your airbag system includes:
(8) (9) (2) (13) (10) Two SRS (supplemental restraint

(5) system) front airbags. The driver’s

(11) (4) airbag is stored in the center of
(12) the steering wheel; the front
passenger’s airbag is stored in the
(1) dashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRS
(14) AIRBAG’’ (see page 23 ).
(3)
(5) Two side airbags, one for the
driver and one for a front
passenger. The airbags are stored
(1) Driver’s Front Airbag (15) in the outer edges of the seat-
(2) Passenger’s Front Airbag (6) (7) backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDE
(3) Control Unit
(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners
(4) (7) (16) AIRBAG’’ (see page 26 ).
(5) Side Airbags
(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor Two side curtain airbags, one for
(7) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors (15)
(8) Front Impact Sensors (14) each side of the vehicle. The
(9) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator airbags are stored in the ceiling,
(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors above the side windows. The front
(11) Front Passenger’s Weight Sensors/OPDS Sensors Control Unit and rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDE
(12) SRS Indicator
(13) Side Curtain Airbags CURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page
(14) Side Impact Sensors (First) 26 ).
(15) Side Impact Sensors (Second)
(16) Roll Rate Sensor
CONTINUED
21

０６／０４／２８１４：１３：３６３１ＳＪＣ６１０００２７
Automatic front seat belt Weight sensors that monitor the An indicator on the instrument
tensioners (see page 19 ). weight on the front passenger’s panel that alerts you to a possible
seat. If the weight is about 65 lbs problem with your airbags,
Sensors that can detect a (29 kg) or less (the weight of an sensors, or seat belt tensioners
moderate to severe front impact, infant or small child), the (see page 28 ).
side impact, or rollover. passenger’s front airbag will be
turned off (see page 25 ). An indicator on the instrument
Sensors that can detect whether a panel that alerts you that the
child is in the passenger’s side A rollover sensor that can detect if passenger’s side airbag has been
airbag path and signal the control your vehicle is about to roll over turned off (see page 29 ).
unit to turn the airbag off (see and signal the control unit to
page 27 ). deploy both side curtain airbags An indicator on the dashboard that
and front seat belt tensioners (see alerts you that the passenger’s
Sensors that can detect whether page 28 ). front airbag has been turned off
the driver’s seat belt and a front (see page 29 ).
passenger’s seat belt is latched or A sophisticated electronic system
unlatched (see page 18 ). that continually monitors and Emergency backup power in case
records information about the your vehicle’s electrical system is
A driver’s seat position sensor that sensors, the control unit, the disconnected in a crash.
monitors the distance of the seat airbag activators, the seat belt
from the front airbag. If the seat is tensioners, and driver and front
too far forward, the airbag will passenger seat belt use when the
inflate with less force (see page ignition switch is in the ON (II)
25 ). position.
22

０６／０４／２８１４：１３：４５３１ＳＪＣ６１０００２８
How Your Front Airbags Work During a frontal crash, your seat belt
restrains your lower body and torso,
and the front airbag helps protect
your head and chest.

Although both airbags normally
inflate within a split second of each
other, it is possible for only one
airbag to deploy.
This can happen if the severity of a

collision is at the margin, or
threshold, that determines whether
or not the airbags will deploy. In
If you ever have a moderate to such cases, the seat belt will provide After inflating, the front airbags
severe frontal collision, sensors will sufficient protection, and the immediately deflate, so they won’t
detect the vehicle’s rapid supplemental protection offered by interfere with the driver’s visibility,
deceleration. the airbag would be minimal. or the ability to steer or operate
other controls.
If the rate of deceleration is high Only the driver’s airbag will deploy if
enough, the control unit will instantly there is no passenger in the front
inflate the driver’s and front seat, or if the advanced airbag
passenger’s airbags, at the time and system has turned the passenger’s
with the force needed. airbag off (see page 25 ).
CONTINUED
23

０６／０４／２８１４：１３：５３３１ＳＪＣ６１０００２９
The total time for inflation and Dual-Stage Airbags Dual-Threshold Airbags
deflation is one-tenth of a second, so Your front airbags are dual-stage Your front airbags are also dual-
fast that most occupants are not airbags. This means they have two threshold airbags. Airbags with this
aware that the airbags deployed until inflation stages that can be ignited feature have two deployment
they see them lying in their laps. sequentially or simultaneously, thresholds that depend on whether
depending on crash severity. sensors detect the occupant is
After a crash, you may see what wearing a seat belt or not.
looks like smoke. This is actually In a more severe crash, both stages
powder from the airbag’s surface. will ignite simultaneously to provide If the occupant’s belt is not latched,
Although the powder is not harmful, the quickest and greatest protection. the airbag will deploy at a slightly
people with respiratory problems lower threshold, because the
may experience some temporary In a less severe crash, one stage will occupant would need extra
discomfort. If this occurs, get out of ignite first, then the second stage protection.
the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do will ignite a split second later. This
so. provides longer airbag inflation time If the occupant’s belt is latched, the
with a little less force. airbag will deploy at a slightly higher
threshold, when the airbag would be
needed to supplement the protection
provided by the seat belt.
24

０６／０４／２８１４：１４：０３３１ＳＪＣ６１０００３０
Advanced Airbags
Your front airbags are also advanced
airbags. The main purpose of this
feature is to help prevent airbag-

caused injuries to short drivers and
children who ride in front.
For both advanced airbags to work DRIVER’S

properly: SEAT PASSENGER’S
POSITION SEAT WEIGHT
SENSOR SENSOR
Occupants must sit upright and
wear their seat belts properly.
Do not spill any liquids on or The driver’s advanced front airbag The passenger’s advanced front
under the seats, cover the sensors, system includes a seat position airbag system has weight sensors
or put any objects or metal items sensor under the seat. If the seat is under the seat. Although Honda
under the front seats. too far forward, the airbag will does not encourage carrying an
inflate with less force, regardless of infant or small child in front, if the
Back-seat passengers should not the severity of the impact. sensors detect the weight of an
put their feet under the front seats. infant or small child (up to about 65
If there is a problem with the sensor, lbs or 29 kg), the system will
Failure to follow these instructions the SRS indicator will come on, and automatically turn the passenger’s
could damage the sensors or prevent the airbag will inflate in the normal front airbag off.
them from working properly. manner regardless of the driver’s Be aware that objects placed on the
seating position. passenger’s seat can also cause the
airbag to be turned off. CONTINUED
25

０６／０４／２８１４：１４：１１３１ＳＪＣ６１０００３１
When the airbag is turned off, a A rear passenger pushing or How Your Side Airbags Work
‘‘passenger airbag off’’ indicator in pulling on the back of the front
the center of the dashboard comes passenger’s seat.
on (see page 29 ).
Moving the front seat forcibly
If the weight sensors detect there is back against cargo on the seat or
no passenger in the front seat, the floor behind it.
airbag will be off. However, the
passenger airbag off indicator will Hanging heavy items on the front
not come on. passenger seat, or placing heavy
items in the seat-back pocket.
To ensure that the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system will Also, make sure the floor mat behind
work properly, do not do anything the front passenger’s seat is hooked
that would increase or decrease the to the floor mat anchor (see page If you ever have a moderate to
weight on the front passenger’s seat. 261 ). If it is not, the mat may severe side impact, sensors will
This includes: interfere with the proper operation detect rapid acceleration and signal
of the sensors and operation of the the control unit to instantly inflate
seat. either the driver’s or the passenger’s
side airbag and activate the seat belt
tensioner.
26

０６／０４／２８１４：１４：１９３１ＳＪＣ６１０００３２
Only one airbag will deploy during a Side Airbag Cutoff System If the side airbag off indicator comes
side impact. If the impact is on the Your vehicle has a side airbag cutoff on (see page 29 ), have the
passenger’s side, the passenger’s system designed primarily to protect passenger sit upright. Once the
side airbag will deploy even if there a child riding in the front passenger’s passenger is out of the airbag’s

is no passenger. seat. deployment path, the system will
turn the airbag back on, and the
To get the best protection from the Although Honda does not encourage indicator will go out.
side airbags, front seat occupants children to ride in front, if sensors in
should wear their seat belts and sit the seat detect a child has leaned There will be some delay between
upright and well back in their seats. into the side airbag’s deployment the moment the passenger moves
path, the airbag will shut off. into or out of the airbag deployment
path and when the indicator comes
The side airbag may also shut off if a on or goes off.
short adult leans sideways, or a
larger adult slouches and leans A front seat passenger should not
sideways into the airbag’s use a cushion or other object as a
deployment path. backrest. It may prevent the cutoff
system from working properly.
Objects placed on the front
passenger seat can also cause the
side airbag to be shut off.
27

０６／０４／２８１４：１４：３１３１ＳＪＣ６１０００３３
How Your Side Curtain Airbags In a Rollover How the SRS Indicator Works
Work A rollover sensor monitors the The SRS indicator alerts
degree and rate your vehicle may roll you to a potential problem
SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG over and automatically deploy the with your airbags or seat belt
side curtain airbags and activate the tensioners.
front seat belt tensioners (see page
19 ). When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, this indicator
In a rollover toward the front comes on for several seconds then
passenger’s side of the vehicle, both goes off. This tells you the system is
side curtain airbags will inflate and working properly.
the front seat belt tensioners will
activate even if there are no If the indicator comes on at any
occupants on that side of the vehicle. other time, or does not come on at all,
In a Side Impact you should have the system checked
In a moderate to severe side impact, To get the best protection from the by your dealer. For example:
sensors will detect rapid acceleration side curtain airbags, occupants
and signal the control unit to should wear their seat belts and sit If the SRS indicator does not come
instantly inflate the side curtain upright and well back in their seats. on after you turn the ignition
airbag and activate the seat belt switch to the ON (II) position.
tensioner on the driver’s or the
passenger’s side of the vehicle. If the indicator stays on after the
If the impact is on the passenger’s engine starts.
side, the passenger’s side curtain
airbag will inflate even if there are no If the indicator comes on or
occupants on that side of the vehicle. flashes on and off while you drive.
28

０６／０４／２８１４：１４：４０３１ＳＪＣ６１０００３４
If you see any of these indications, How the Side Airbag Off How the Passenger Airbag Off
the airbags and seat belt tensioners Indicator Works Indicator Works
may not work properly when you U.S. Canada
need them. This indicator PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

alerts you that the
passenger’s side airbag has been
automatically shut off. It does not
Ignoring the SRS indicator can mean there is a problem with your
result in serious injury or death side airbags. U.S. Canada
if the airbag systems or
tensioners do not work properly. When you turn the ignition switch to
the ON (II) position, the indicator
Have your vehicle checked by a should come on for several seconds
dealer as soon as possible if and then go off (see page 62 ). If it
the SRS indicator alerts you to doesn’t come on, stays on, or comes
a possible problem. on while driving without a passenger This indicator alerts you that the
in the front seat, have the system passenger’s front airbag has been
checked. shut off because weight sensors
detect about 65 lbs (29 kg) or less
(the weight of an infant or small
child) on the front passenger’s seat.
It does not mean there is a problem
with the airbag.
CONTINUED
29

０６／０４／２８１４：１４：５０３１ＳＪＣ６１０００３５
Be aware that objects placed on the If the indicator comes on with no Airbag Service
front seat can cause the indicator to front seat passenger and no objects Your airbag systems are virtually
come on. on the seat, or with an adult riding maintenance free, and there are no
there, something may be interfering parts you can safely service.
If no weight is detected on the front with the weight sensors. Look for However, you must have your
seat, the airbag will be automatically and remove: vehicle serviced if:
shut off. However, the indicator will
not come on. Any items under the front An airbag ever inflates. Any airbag
passenger’s seat. that has deployed must be
The passenger airbag off indicator replaced along with the control
may come on and off repeatedly if Any object, hanging on the seat or unit and other related parts. Any
the total weight on the seat is near in the seat-back pocket. seat belt tensioner that activates
the airbag cutoff threshold. must also be replaced.
Any object that is touching the
If an adult or teenage passenger is rear of the seat-back. Do not try to remove or replace
riding in front, move the seat as far any airbag by yourself. This must
to the rear as possible, and have the If no obstructions are found, have be done by an authorized dealer or
passenger sit upright and wear the your vehicle checked by a dealer as a knowledgeable body shop.
seat belt properly. soon as possible.
The SRS indicator alerts you to a
problem. Take your vehicle to an
authorized dealer as soon as
possible. If you ignore this
indication, your airbags may not
operate properly.
30

０６／０４／２８１４：１４：５７３１ＳＪＣ６１０００３６
If your vehicle has a moderate to Additional Safety Precautions Do not cover or replace front seat-
severe impact. Even if your Do not attempt to deactivate your back covers without consulting
airbags do not inflate, your dealer airbags. Together, airbags and your dealer. Improperly replacing
should inspect the driver’s seat seat belts provide the best or covering front seat-back covers

position sensor, the front protection. can prevent your side airbags from
passenger’s weight sensors, the inflating during a side impact.
front seat belt tensioners, and all Do not tamper with airbag
seat belts worn during the crash to components or wiring for any Do not remove or modify a front
make sure they are operating reason. Tampering could cause seat without consulting your
properly. the airbags to deploy, possibly dealer. This could make the
causing very serious injury. driver’s seat position sensor or the
front passenger’s weight sensors
Do not expose the front passenger’s ineffective. If it is necessary to
seat-back to liquid. If water or remove or modify a front seat to
another liquid soaks into a seat- accommodate a person with
back, it can prevent the side airbag disabilities, first contact Honda
cutoff system from working Automobile Customer Service at
properly. (800) 999-1009.
31

０６／０４／２８１４：１５：０５３１ＳＪＣ６１０００３７
Protecting Children − General Guidelines
All Children Must Be Restrained

Each year, many children are injured
or killed in vehicle crashes because Children who are unrestrained
they are either unrestrained or not or improperly restrained can be
properly restrained. In fact, vehicle seriously injured or killed in a
accidents are the number one cause crash.
of the death of children ages 12 and
under. Any child too small for a seat
belt should be properly
To reduce the number of child restrained in a child seat. A
deaths and injuries, every state and larger child should be properly
Canadian province requires that restrained with a seat belt and
infants and children be properly use a booster seat if necessary.
Children depend on adults to protect restrained when they ride in a
them. However, despite their best vehicle.
intentions, many adults do not know Larger children must be restrained
how to properly protect child Infants and small children must be with a lap/shoulder belt and ride on
passengers. restrained in an approved child seat a booster seat until the seat belt fits
that is properly secured to the them properly (see pages 49 − 52 ).
If you have children, or ever need to vehicle (see pages 37 − 48 ).
drive with a child in your vehicle, be
sure to read this section. It begins
with important general guidelines,
then presents special information for
infants, small children, and larger
children.
32

０６／０４／２８１４：１５：１５３１ＳＪＣ６１０００３８
All Children Should Sit in a Back The Passenger’s Front Airbag Small Children
Seat Can Pose Serious Risks Placing a forward-facing child seat in
According to accident statistics, Front airbags have been designed to the front seat of a vehicle equipped
children of all ages and sizes are help protect adults in a moderate to with a passenger’s front airbag can

safer when they are restrained in a severe frontal collision. To do this, be hazardous. If the vehicle seat is
back seat. The National Highway the passenger’s front airbag is quite too far forward, or the child’s head is
Traffic Safety Administration and large, and it can inflate with enough thrown forward during a collision, an
Transport Canada recommend that force to cause very serious injuries. inflating front airbag can strike the
all children aged 12 and under be child with enough force to kill or
properly restrained in a back seat. Even though your vehicle has an very seriously injure a small child.
Some states have laws restricting advanced front airbag system that
where children may ride. automatically turns the passenger’s Larger Children
front airbag off (see page 29 ), Children who have outgrown child
Children who ride in the back are please follow these guidelines: seats are also at risk of being injured
less likely to be injured by striking or killed by an inflating passenger’s
interior vehicle parts during a Infants front airbag. Whenever possible,
collision or hard braking. Also, Never put a rear-facing child seat in larger children should sit in the back
children cannot be injured by an the front seat of a vehicle equipped seat, on a booster seat if needed, and
inflating front airbag when they ride with a passenger’s front airbag. If be properly restrained with a seat
in the back. the airbag inflates, it can hit the back belt (see page 49 for important
of the child seat with enough force information about protecting larger
to kill or very seriously injure an children).
infant.
CONTINUED
33

０６／０４／２８１４：１５：２８３１ＳＪＣ６１０００３９
To remind you of the passenger’s U.S. Models

front airbag hazards, and that SUN VISORS DASHBOARD
children must be properly restrained
in a back seat, your vehicle has
warning labels on the dashboard
(U.S. models) and on the front visors.
Please read and follow the
instructions on these labels.
Canadian Models
SUN VISORS
34

０６／０４／２８１４：１５：３６３１ＳＪＣ６１０００４０
If You Must Drive with Several If a Child Requires Close If a child requires close physical
Children Attention attention or frequent visual contact,
Your vehicle has a back seat where Many parents say they prefer to put we strongly recommend that another
children can be properly restrained. an infant or a small child in the front adult ride with the child in the back

If you ever have to carry a group of passenger seat so they can watch the seat. The back seat is far safer for a
children, and a child must ride in child, or because the child requires child than the front.
front: attention.
Place the largest child in the front Placing a child in the front seat
seat, provided the child is large exposes the child to hazards in a
enough to wear the lap/shoulder frontal collision, and paying close
belt properly (see page 49 ). attention to a child distracts the
driver from the important tasks of
Move the vehicle seat as far to the driving, placing both of you at risk.
rear as possible (see pages 98 and
100).
Have the child sit upright and well

back in the seat (see page 15 ).
Make sure the seat belt is properly

positioned and secured (see page
14 ).
35

０６／０４／２８１４：１５：４５３１ＳＪＣ６１０００４１
Additional Safety Precautions seat belt around their neck, they Lock all doors and the In-Bed
Never hold an infant or child on can be seriously or fatally injured. Trunk when your vehicle is not in
your lap. If you are not wearing a (See pages 44 and 45 for how to use. Children who play in vehicles
seat belt in a crash, you could be activate and deactivate the can accidentally get trapped inside.
thrown forward and crush the lockable retractor.) Teach your children not to play in
child against the dashboard or a or around vehicles. Know how to
seat-back. If you are wearing a Use the childproof door locks to operate the emergency In-Bed
seat belt, the child can be torn prevent children from opening the Trunk opener and decide if your
from your arms and be seriously rear doors. This can prevent children should be shown how to
hurt or killed. children from accidentally falling use this feature (see page 96 ).
out (see page 84 ).
Never put a seat belt over yourself Teach your children not to play on
and a child. During a crash, the Do not leave children alone in a the pickup bed. Opening or
belt could press deep into the child vehicle. Leaving children without closing the tailgate could cause
and cause serious or fatal injuries. adult supervision is illegal in most accidental injuries.
states and Canadian provinces,
Never let two children use the and can be very hazardous. Keep vehicle keys/remote
same seat belt. If they do, they transmitters out of the reach of
could be very seriously injured in a For example, infants and small children. Even very young
crash. children left in a vehicle on a hot children learn how to unlock
day can die from heatstroke. A vehicle doors, turn on the ignition
Make sure any unused seat belt child left alone with the key in the switch, and open the windows,
that a child can reach is buckled, ignition switch can accidentally set which can lead to accidental injury
the lockable retractor is activated, the vehicle in motion, possibly or death.
and the belt is fully retracted and injuring themselves or others.
locked. If a child wraps a loose
36

０６／０４／２８１４：１５：５５３１ＳＪＣ６１０００４２
Protecting Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants Two types of seats may be used: a Child Seat Placement
seat designed exclusively for infants, A rear-facing child seat can be placed
or a convertible seat used in the rear- in any seating position in the back
facing, reclining mode. seat, but not in the front. Never put a

rear-facing child seat in the front
Do not put a rear-facing child seat in seat.
a forward-facing position. If placed
facing forward, an infant could be If the passenger’s front airbag
very seriously injured during a inflates, it can hit the back of the
frontal collision. child seat with enough force to kill or
seriously injure an infant.
When properly installed, a rear-

facing child seat may prevent the
Child Seat Type driver or a front passenger from
An infant must be properly moving their seat as far back as
restrained in a rear-facing, reclining recommended, or from locking their
child seat until the child reaches the seat-back in the desired position.
seat maker’s weight or height limit
for the seat, and the child is at least It can also interfere with proper
one year old. operation of the passenger’s
advanced front airbag system.
Only a rear-facing child seat provides
proper support for a baby’s head,
neck, and back.
CONTINUED
37

０６／０４／２８１４：１６：０３３１ＳＪＣ６１０００４３
Protecting Infants and Small Children
In any of these situations, we Protecting Small Children We also recommend that a small
strongly recommend that you install child use the child seat until the child
the child seat directly behind the reaches the weight or height limit
front passenger’s seat, move the seat for the seat.
as far forward as needed, and leave it
unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get Child Seat Placement
a smaller rear-facing child seat. We strongly recommend placing a
forward-facing child seat in a back
seat, not the front.
Placing a rear-facing child seat Placing a forward-facing child seat in

in the front seat can result in the front seat of a vehicle equipped
serious injury or death during a with a passenger’s airbag can be
collision. hazardous. If the vehicle seat is too
Child Seat Type far forward, or the child’s head is
Always place a rear-facing child A child who is at least one year old, thrown forward during a collision, an
seat in the back seat, not the and who fits within the child seat inflating airbag can strike the child
front. maker’s weight and height limits, with enough force to cause very
should be restrained in a forward- serious or fatal injuries.
facing, upright child seat.
Of the different seats available, we

recommend those that have a five-
point harness system as shown.
38

０６／０４／２８１４：１６：１３３１ＳＪＣ６１０００４４
Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat
Even with advanced front airbags Selecting a Child Seat In seating positions and vehicles not
that automatically turn the When buying a child seat, you need equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-
passenger’s front airbag off (see to choose either a conventional child compatible child seat can be installed
page 29 ), a back seat is the safest seat, or one designed for use with using a seat belt.

place for a small child. the lower anchors and tethers for
children (LATCH) system. Whatever type of seat you choose, to
If it is necessary to put a forward- provide proper protection, a child
facing child seat in the front, move Conventional child seats must be seat should meet three
the vehicle seat as far to the rear as secured to a vehicle with a seat belt, requirements:
possible, and be sure the child seat is whereas LATCH-compatible seats
firmly secured to the vehicle and the are secured by attaching the seat to 1. The child seat should meet U.S. or
child is properly strapped in the seat. hardware built into each rear seating Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety
position in the back seat. Standard 213. Look for FMVSS
213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.
Since LATCH-compatible child seats
Placing a forward-facing child are easier to install and reduce the 2. The child seat should be of the
seat in the front seat can result possibility of improper installation, proper type and size to fit the child.
in serious injury or death if the we recommend selecting this style. Rear-facing for infants, forward-
front airbag inflates. facing for small children.
We also recommend selecting a
If you must place a forward- LATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,
facing child seat in front, move rather than a flexible, anchor (see
the vehicle seat as far back as page 41 ).
possible, and properly restrain
the child.
CONTINUED
39

０６／０４／２８１４：１６：２１３１ＳＪＣ６１０００４５
Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat
3. The child seat should fit the Installing a Child Seat movement can be expected and
vehicle seating position (or After selecting a proper child seat should not reduce the child seat’s
positions) where it will be used. and a good place to install the seat, effectiveness.
there are three main steps in
Before purchasing a conventional installing the seat: If the child seat is not secure, try
child seat, or using a previously installing it in a different seating
purchased one, we recommend that 1. Properly secure the child seat to position, or use a different style of
you test the seat in the specific the vehicle. All child seats must be child seat that can be firmly secured.
vehicle seating position or positions secured to the vehicle with the lap
where the seat will be used. part of a lap/shoulder belt or with 3. Secure the child in the child seat.
the LATCH (lower anchors and Make sure the child is properly
tethers for children) system. A strapped in the child seat
child whose seat is not properly according to the child seat maker’s
secured to the vehicle can be instructions. A child who is not
endangered in a crash. properly secured in a child seat
can be seriously injured in a crash.
2. Make sure the child seat is firmly
secured. After installing a child The following pages provide
seat, push and pull the seat guidelines on how to properly install
forward and from side-to-side to a child seat. A forward-facing child
verify that it is secure. seat is used in all examples, but the
instructions are the same for rear-
A child seat secured with a seat belt facing child seats.
should be installed as firmly as
possible. However, it does not need
to be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side
40

０６／０４／２８１４：１６：３１３１ＳＪＣ６１０００４６
Installing a Child Seat
Installing a Child Seat with BUTTON UPPER GUIDE

LATCH
Your vehicle is equipped with
LATCH (lower anchors and tethers

for children) at the rear seats.
The lower anchors are located

between the seat-back and seat
bottom, and are to be used only with
a child seat designed for use with
LATCH. LATCH
ANCHOR
POINTS CENTER TETHER ANCHOR
The location of each lower anchor is
indicated by a small button above the To install a LATCH-compatible child 3. On the center seating position
anchor point. seat: When using the tether strap on
the child seat, attach the tether
Whenever using the center tether 1. If needed, move the seat belt strap hook to the center tether
anchor point, make sure to push buckle or tongue away from the anchor before installing the child
down the head restraint to the lowest lower anchors. seat to the lower anchors for the
position, route the strap over the LATCH system, because the
seat-back, then around the upper 2. Make sure there are no objects center tether anchor is positioned
guide before attaching the tether near the anchors that could behind the child seat.
strap hook to the center tether prevent a secure connection
anchor (see page 46 ). between the child seat and the
anchors.
CONTINUED
41

０６／０４／２８１４：１６：３８３１ＳＪＣ６１０００４７
Make sure the head restraint is in

the lowest position. Lift the cover,
then route the tether strap around
the upper guide. Route the tether
strap downward properly, making
sure the strap is not twisted, then
attach the strap hook to the center
tether anchor.
Rigid type Flexible type
4. Place the child seat on the vehicle Other LATCH-compatible seats

seat, then attach the seat to the have a flexible-type connector as
lower anchors according to the shown above.
child seat maker’s instructions.
5. Whatever type you have, follow
Some LATCH-compatible seats the child seat maker’s instructions
have a rigid-type connector as for adjusting or tightening the fit.
shown above.
42

０６／０４／２８１４：１６：４５３１ＳＪＣ６１０００４８
UPPER GUIDE UPPER GUIDE

Outer Position TETHER ANCHOR Center Position TETHER ANCHOR
6. On the outer seating position 7. Tighten the strap according to the

Lift the head restraint (see page seat maker’s instructions.
102), then route the tether strap
over the seat-back and through 8. Push and pull the child seat
the head restraint legs. forward and from side-to-side to
Lift the cover, then route the verify that it is secure.
tether strap around the upper
guide. Route the tether strap
downward properly, making sure
the strap is not twisted, then
attach the strap hook to the tether
anchor on the outside of the seat
bottom (see page 46 ).
43

０６／０４／２８１４：１６：５３３１ＳＪＣ６１０００４９
Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/

Shoulder Belt
When not using the LATCH system,
all child seats must be secured to the
vehicle with the lap part of a lap/
shoulder belt.
In addition, the lap/shoulder belts in

all seating positions except the
driver’s have a lockable retractor
that must be activated to secure a
child seat.
If you place the child seat in the rear 1. With the child seat in the desired 2. To activate the lockable retractor,
center seating position and use the seating position, route the belt slowly pull the shoulder part of the
tether strap for additional security, through the child seat according belt all the way out until it stops,
make sure to push down the head to the seat maker’s instructions, then let the belt feed back into the
restraint to the lowest position and then insert the latch plate into the retractor.
hook the tether strap hook to the buckle.
anchor before securing the child seat 3. After the belt has retracted, tug on
with the lap/shoulder belt. Refer to it. If the belt is locked, you will not
page 46 for how to route the tether be able to pull it out. If you can pull
strap properly. the belt out, it is not locked, and
you will need to repeat these steps.
44

０６／０４／２８１４：１６：５９３１ＳＪＣ６１０００５０
To deactivate the lockable retractor

and remove a child seat, unlatch the
buckle, unroute the seat belt, and let
the belt fully retract.

4. After confirming that the belt is 5. Push and pull the child seat
locked, grab the shoulder part of forward and from side-to-side to
the belt near the buckle, and pull verify that it is secure enough to
up to remove any slack from the stay upright during normal driving
lap part of the belt. Remember, if maneuvers. If the child seat is not
the lap part of the belt is not tight, secure, unlatch the belt, allow it to
the child seat will not be secure. retract fully, then repeat these
steps.
To remove slack, it may help to
put weight on the child seat, or
push on the back of the seat while
pulling up on the belt.
45

０６／０４／２８１４：１７：０８３１ＳＪＣ６１０００５１
Installing a Child Seat with a When using a tether anchor, always Using an Outer Tether Anchor
Tether hook the tether strap through the
upper guide to route it properly. UPPER GUIDE
COVER CENTER
TETHER
ANCHOR Since a tether can provide additional
security to the lap/shoulder belt
installation, we recommend using a
tether whenever one is required or
available.
UPPER
GUIDE
OUTER
TETHER OUTER TETHER ANCHOR
ANCHOR
1. After properly securing the child
A child seat with a tether can be seat (see page 44 ), lift the head
installed in any seating position in restraint, then route the tether
the back seat. strap over the seat-back and
Each outer seating position has a through the head restraint legs.
tether anchor at the outside of the
seat bottom. The center seating 2. Lift the cover, then hook the
position has a tether anchor between tether strap through the upper
the lower anchors for the LATCH- guide as shown.
compatible child seat. Each anchor
point is shown above.
46

０６／０４／２８１４：１７：１７３１ＳＪＣ６１０００５２
3. Route the tether strap downward Using the Center Tether Anchor UPPER GUIDE
properly, making sure the strap is Make sure to attach the tether strap
not twisted. hook to the anchor before installing
the child seat, because the tether

4. Attach the tether strap hook to the anchor is positioned behind the child
outer tether anchor on the outside seat.
of the seat bottom.
1. Place the child seat on the rear
5. Tighten the strap according to the seat.
seat maker’s instructions.
2. Push down the rear center head
restraint to the lowest position. CENTER TETHER ANCHOR
3. Route the tether strap over the

seat-back, lift the cover, then hook
the tether strap through the upper
guide as shown.
4. Route the tether strap downward

properly along the seat-back,
making sure the strap is not
twisted.
CONTINUED
47

０６／０４／２８１４：１７：２３３１ＳＪＣ６１０００５３
UPPER GUIDE 6. Properly secure the child seat (see

page 44 ), then tighten the tether
strap according to the seat maker’s
instructions.
Whenever using the tether strap,

make sure to route the strap through
the upper guide before attaching the
tether strap hook to the tether
anchor. If the tether strap is not
routed properly and secured, the
CENTER TETHER ANCHOR child seat may not be secured. This
could lead to serious injury or death.
5. Attach the tether strap hook to the
center tether anchor between the
lower anchors for the LATCH-
compatible child seat.
48

０６／０４／２８１４：１７：３１３１ＳＪＣ６１０００５４
Protecting Larger Children
When a child reaches the Checking Seat Belt Fit

recommended weight or height limit
for a forward-facing child seat, the Allowing a child age 12 or under
child should sit in a back seat on a to sit in front can result in injury

booster seat and wear a lap/shoulder or death if the passenger’s front
belt. airbag inflates.
The following pages give If a child must ride in front,

instructions on how to check proper move the vehicle seat as far
seat belt fit, what kind of booster back as possible, use a booster
seat to use if one is needed, and seat if needed, have the child
important precautions for a child sit up properly and wear the
who must sit in front. seat belt properly.
To determine if a lap/shoulder belt

properly fits a child, have the child
put on the seat belt, then ask
yourself:
1. Does the child sit all the way back

against the seat?
2. Do the child’s knees bend

comfortably over the edge of the
seat?
CONTINUED
49

０６／０４／２８１４：１７：４０３１ＳＪＣ６１０００５５
3. Does the shoulder belt cross Using a Booster Seat Booster seats can be high-back or
between the child’s neck and arm? low-back. Whichever style you select,
make sure the booster seat meets
4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as federal safety standards (see page
possible, touching the child’s 39 ) and that you follow the booster
thighs? seat maker’s instructions.
5. Will the child be able to stay If a child who uses a booster seat
seated like this for the whole trip? must ride in front, move the vehicle
seat as far back as possible and be
If you answer yes to all these sure the child is wearing the seat
questions, the child is ready to wear belt properly.
the lap/shoulder belt correctly. If
you answer no to any question, the A child who has outgrown a forward- A child may continue using a booster
child needs to ride on a booster seat. facing child seat should ride in a seat until the tops of their ears are
back seat and use a booster seat even with the top of the vehicle’s or
until the lap/shoulder belt fits them booster’s seat-back. A child of this
properly without the booster. height should be tall enough to use
the lap/shoulder belt without a
Some states and Canadian provinces booster seat.
also require children to use a booster
seat until they reach a given age or
weight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Be
sure to check current laws in the
states or provinces where you intend
to drive.
50

０６／０４／２８１４：１７：５１３１ＳＪＣ６１０００５６
When Can a Larger Child Sit in Of course, children vary widely. And If you decide that a child can safely
Front while age may be one indicator of ride up front, be sure to:
The National Highway Traffic Safety when a child can safely ride in front,
Administration and Transport there are other important factors you Carefully read the owner’s manual,

Canada recommend that all children should consider. and make sure you understand all
age 12 and under be properly seat belt instructions and all safety
restrained in the back seat. Physical Size information.
Physically, a child must be large
If the passenger’s front airbag enough for the lap/shoulder belt to Move the vehicle seat to the rear-
inflates in a moderate to severe properly fit (see pages 14 and 49 ). If most position.
frontal collision, the airbag can cause the seat belt does not fit properly,
serious injuries to a child who is with or without the child sitting on a Have the child sit up straight, back
unrestrained, improperly restrained, booster seat, the child should not sit against the seat, and feet on or
sitting too close to the airbag, or out in front. near the floor.
of position.
Maturity Check that the child’s seat belt is
A side airbag also poses risks. If any To safely ride in front, a child must properly and securely positioned.
part of a larger child’s body is in the be able to follow the rules, including
path of a deploying side airbag, the sitting properly, and wearing the seat Supervise the child. Even a mature
child could receive possibly serious belt properly throughout a ride. child sometimes needs to be
injuries. reminded to fasten the seat belt or
sit properly.
51

０６／０４／２８１４：１７：５６３１ＳＪＣ６１０００５７
Additional Safety Precautions Do not put any accessories on a

Do not let a child wear a seat belt seat belt. Devices intended to
across the neck. This could result improve a child’s comfort or
in serious neck injuries during a reposition the shoulder part of a
crash. seat belt can make the belt less
effective and increase the chance
Do not let a child put the shoulder of serious injury in a crash.
part of a seat belt behind the back
or under the arm. This could
cause very serious injuries during
a crash. It also increases the
chance that the child will slide
under the belt in a crash and be
injured.
Two children should never use the

same seat belt. If they do, they
could be very seriously injured in a
crash.
52

０６／０４／２８１４：１８：０５３１ＳＪＣ６１０００５８
Carbon Monoxide Hazard
Your vehicle’s exhaust contains With a truck cap installed and the
carbon monoxide gas. Carbon back window open, engine exhaust
monoxide should not enter the Carbon monoxide gas is toxic. may enter the vehicle and cause a
vehicle in normal driving if you Breathing it can cause hazardous condition. Keep the back

maintain your vehicle properly and unconsciousness and even kill window tightly closed whenever you
follow the information on this page. you. drive with a truck cap installed.
Have the exhaust system inspected Avoid any enclosed areas or If you must sit in your parked vehicle
for leaks whenever: activities that expose you to with the engine running, even in an
carbon monoxide. unconfined area, adjust the heating
The vehicle is raised for an oil and cooling system/climate control
change. system as follows:
High levels of carbon monoxide can
You notice a change in the sound collect rapidly in enclosed areas, 1. Select the fresh air mode.
of the exhaust. such as a garage. Do not run the 2. Select the mode.
engine with the garage door closed. 3. Turn the fan on high speed.
The vehicle was in an accident Even with the door open, run the 4. Set the temperature control to a
that may have damaged the engine only long enough to move the comfortable setting.
underside. vehicle out of the garage.
53

０６／０４／２８１４：１８：２１３１ＳＪＣ６１０００５９
Safety Labels
These labels are in the locations DASHBOARD SUN VISORS

shown. They warn you of potential U.S. models only U.S. models
hazards that could cause serious
injury or death. Read these labels
carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard

to read (except for the U.S.
dashboard label which may be
removed by the owner), contact your
dealer for a replacement.
Canadian models
RADIATOR CAP
SUN VISOR
U.S. models only
54

０６／０４／２８１４：１８：４３３１ＳＪＣ６１０００６０
Safety Labels
HOOD DOORJAMBS
U.S. models U.S. models Canadian models

Canadian models
PICKUP BED
U.S. models Canadian models
55

０６／０４／２８１４：１８：４６３１ＳＪＣ６１０００６１
56

０６／０４／２８１４：１８：４９３１ＳＪＣ６１０００６２
Instruments and Controls
This section gives information about Control Locations ............................ 58 Interior Convenience Items .......... 112
the controls and displays that Instrument Panel ............................. 59 Center Console .......................... 113
contribute to the daily operation of Instrument Panel Indicators ........... 61 Console Compartments ........ 113
your vehicle. All the essential Gauges .............................................. 70 Cargo Hooks .......................... 114
controls are within easy reach. Controls Near the Steering Beverage Holders ...................... 114
Wheel ............................................ 74 Glove Box ................................... 115

Multi-Control Lever ......................... 75 Coat Hooks ................................. 115
Headlight Control Dial .................... 76 Sunglasses Holder ..................... 115
Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 78 Accessory Power Sockets......... 116
Hazard Warning Button .................. 79 Sun Visor .................................... 117
Steering Wheel Adjustment ........... 79 Vanity Mirror ............................. 117
Keys ................................................... 80 Interior Lights ................................ 118
Immobilizer System......................... 81 Bed Lights ...................................... 120
Ignition Switch ................................. 82
Door Locks ....................................... 83
Remote Transmitter ........................ 89
Dual-Action Tailgate........................ 92
In-Bed Trunk TM ................................ 95
Seats .................................................. 98
Seat Heaters ................................... 104
Power Windows ............................. 105
Moonroof ........................................ 108
Parking Brake ................................ 109
Mirrors ............................................ 110
57

０６／０４／２８１４：１８：５６３１ＳＪＣ６１０００６３
Control Locations
REAR VIEW MIRROR WITH

INSTRUMENT PANEL INDICATORS (P.59) COMPASS＊ (P.168) AUDIO SYSTEM
GAUGES (P.70) (P.133)
PARKING BRAKE AUXILIARY INPUT
RELEASE HANDLE JACK＊ (P.161)
(P.109)
HEATING/COOLING
CONTROLS (P.122)
CLIMATE CONTROL
MIRROR CONTROLS SYSTEM (P.128)
(P.111)
GLOVE BOX
POWER DOOR LOCK (P.115)
MASTER SWITCH
(P.83)
POWER WINDOW
SWITCHES
(P.105)
HOOD RELEASE
HANDLE
(P.181)
FUEL FILL DOOR PARKING BRAKE CENTER CONSOLE ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS
RELEASE HANDLE (P.179) PEDAL (P.109) (P.113) (P.116)
＊ If equipped
58

０６／０４／２８１４：１９：０５３１ＳＪＣ６１０００６４
Instrument Panel
U.S. models
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.67) VEHICLE STABILITY MAINTENANCE MINDER
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.67)
VTM-4 INDICATOR (P.66) INDICATOR
(P.67) SIDE AIRBAG OFF
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.65) INDICATOR (P.62)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE

INDICATOR (P.68) IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (P.66) INDICATOR (P.63)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.66) WASHER LEVEL
INDICATOR (P.65)
TPMS INDICATOR (P.68)
IN-BED TRUNK OPEN
INDICATOR (P.69)
SUPPLEMENTAL
RESTRAINT
CHARGING SYSTEM SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.62) INDICATOR
(P.62)
PARKING BRAKE AND
BRAKE SYSTEM SEAT BELT
INDICATOR REMINDER
(P.63) INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE (P.61)
INDICATOR (P.62) DOOR AND TAILGATE
OPEN MONITOR (P.64) LOW FUEL INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR (P.65)
LAMP (P.62) (P.68) CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
(P.65)
BED LIGHTS ON INDICATOR BACK WINDOW OPEN
(P.69) INDICATOR (P.69) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
INDICATOR (P.63)
59

０６／０４／２８１４：１９：１５３１ＳＪＣ６１０００６５
Instrument Panel
Canadian models
VSA ACTIVATION INDICATOR (P.67) VEHICLE STABILITY MAINTENANCE MINDER
ASSIST (VSA) SYSTEM INDICATOR (P.67)
VTM-4 INDICATOR (P.66) INDICATOR
(P.67) SIDE AIRBAG OFF
HIGH BEAM INDICATOR (P.65) INDICATOR (P.62)
LOW TIRE PRESSURE
INDICATOR (P.68) IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
A/T TEMPERATURE INDICATOR (P.66) INDICATOR (P.63)
DAY TIME RUNNING LIGHTS
INDICATOR (P.65) WASHER LEVEL
INDICATOR (P.65)
LIGHTS ON INDICATOR (P.66)
TPMS INDICATOR
(P.68)
IN-BED TRUNK OPEN SUPPLEMENTAL
INDICATOR (P.69) RESTRAINT
SYSTEM
INDICATOR
CHARGING SYSTEM (P.62)
INDICATOR (P.62)
SEAT BELT
PARKING BRAKE AND REMINDER
BRAKE SYSTEM INDICATOR
INDICATOR (P.61)
(P.63) DOOR AND TAILGATE
OPEN MONITOR (P.64) LOW FUEL INDICATOR
LOW OIL PRESSURE (P.65)
INDICATOR (P.62) TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR
(P.68) CRUISE CONTROL INDICATOR
MALFUNCTION INDICATOR (P.65)
LAMP (P.62) BACK WINDOW OPEN
BED LIGHTS ON INDICATOR INDICATOR (P.69) ANTI-LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM
(P.69) INDICATOR (P.63)
60

０６／０４／２８１４：１９：２０３１ＳＪＣ６１０００６６
Instrument Panel Indicators
The instrument panel has many Seat Belt Reminder If your front passenger does not
indicators to give you important Indicator fasten their seat belt, the indicator
information about your vehicle. This indicator comes on when you comes on about 6 seconds after the
turn the ignition switch to the ON ignition switch is turned to the ON
(II) position. It reminds you and your (II) position.
passengers to fasten your seat belts.

A beeper also sounds if you have not If either of you do not fasten your
fastened your seat belt. seat belt while driving, the beeper
will sound and the indicator will flash
If you turn the ignition switch to the again at regular intervals. For more
ON (II) position before fastening information, see page 18 .
your seat belts, the beeper sounds,
and the indicator flashes. If you do
not fasten your seat belts before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
flashing but remains on.
61

０６／０４／２８１４：１９：３０３１ＳＪＣ６１０００６７
Malfunction Indicator Supplemental Restraint U.S. Canada

Lamp System Indicator Side Airbag Off
See page 289 . This indicator comes on for several Indicator
seconds when you turn the ignition This indicator comes on when you
Low Oil Pressure switch to the ON (II) position. If it turn the ignition switch to the ON
Indicator comes on at any other time, it (II) position. If it comes on at any
The engine can be severely damaged indicates a potential problem with other time, it indicates that the
if this indicator flashes or stays on your front airbags. This indicator will passenger’s side airbag has
when the engine is running. For also alert you to a potential problem automatically shut off. For more
more information, see page 288 . with your side airbags, passenger’s information, see page 29 .
side airbag automatic cutoff system,
Charging System side curtain airbags, automatic seat
Indicator belt tensioners, driver’s seat position
If this indicator comes on when the sensor, and the front passenger’s
engine is running, the battery is not weight sensors. For more
being charged. For more information, information, see page 28 .
see page 288 .
62

０６／０４／２８１４：１９：３９３１ＳＪＣ６１０００６８
U.S. Canada Anti-lock Brake System Immobilizer System

Parking Brake (ABS) Indicator Indicator
and Brake This indicator normally comes on for This indicator comes on for a few
System a few seconds when you turn the seconds when you turn the ignition
Indicator ignition switch to the ON (II) switch to the ON (II) position. It will
This indicator has two functions: position, and when the ignition go off if you have inserted a

switch is turned to the START (III) properly-coded ignition key. If it is
1. It comes on when you turn the position. If it comes on at any other not a properly-coded key, the
ignition switch to the ON (II) time, there is a problem with the indicator will blink and the engine
position. It is a reminder to check ABS. If this happens, have your will not start (see page 81 ).
the parking brake. A beeper vehicle checked at a dealer. With the
sounds if you drive with the indicator on, your vehicle still has This indicator also blinks several
parking brake not fully released. normal braking ability but no anti- times when you turn the ignition
Driving with the parking brake not lock brakes. For more information, switch from the ON (II) position to
fully released can damage the see page 208 . the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
brakes and tires. position.
2. If it stays on after you have fully

released the parking brake while
the engine is running, or if it
comes on while driving, there
could be a problem with the brake
system. For more information, see
page 290 .
63

０６／０４／２８１４：１９：４８３１ＳＪＣ６１０００６９
Turn Signal and Door and Tailgate Open Monitor If the tailgate is swung open or is not
Hazard Warning closed tightly, you will hear six beeps
Indicators and see the indicator blinking when
The left or right turn signal indicator you turn the ignition switch to the
blinks when you signal a lane change ON (II) position. The beeper also
or turn. If an indicator does not blink sounds and the indicator blinks when
or blinks rapidly, it usually means you move the shift lever out of the
one of the turn signal bulbs is Park or neutral position.
burned out (see pages 256 and 257 ). This monitor includes two functions;
Replace the bulb as soon as possible, the door open indicator and the The tailgate open indicator does not
since other drivers cannot see that tailgate open indicator. This monitor monitor the tailgate when it is
you are signaling. works with the ignition switch in any dropped open.
position.
When you press the hazard warning If the driver does not fasten the seat
button, both turn signal indicators The specific door indicator comes on belt and the tailgate is swung open,
and all turn signals on the outside of in this monitor if any door is not the seat belt reminder alarm will
the vehicle flash. closed tightly. sound at first, then the tailgate open
reminder beeper will sound.
The tailgate indicator comes on For more information on the tailgate,
when the tailgate is swung open or if see page 94 .
it is not closed completely after you
swing it closed.
64

０６／０４／２８１４：１９：５９３１ＳＪＣ６１０００７０
‘‘Daytime Running High Beam Indicator Low Fuel Indicator

Lights’’ Indicator
Canadian models only This indicator comes on with the
This indicator comes on when you high beam headlights. For more
turn the ignition switch to the ON information, see page 76 .
(II) position with the headlight

switch off and the parking brake set. On Canadian models, this indicator
It should go off when you turn on the comes on with reduced brightness
headlights or release the parking when the daytime running lights
brake. If it comes on at any other (DRL) are on (see page 78 ).
time, it means there is a problem
with the DRL. There may also be a Washer Level Indicator
problem with the high beam LOW FUEL INDICATOR
headlights. This indicator comes on when the
washer fluid level is low. Add washer This indicator is located in the fuel
Cruise Control Indicator fluid when you see this indicator gauge. It comes on as a reminder
(see page 250 ). that you must refuel soon.
This indicator comes on when you
set the cruise control. See page When the indicator comes on, there
165 for information on operating the is about 3.30 U.S. gal (12.5 ) of fuel
cruise control. remaining in the tank before the
needle reaches E. There is a small
reserve of fuel remaining in the tank
when the needle does reach E.
65

０６／０４／２８１４：２０：０８３１ＳＪＣ６１０００７１
Lights On Indicator A/T Temperature VTM-4 Indicator

Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the This indicator monitors the This indicator normally comes on for
exterior lights are on. It comes on temperature of the automatic a few seconds when you turn the
when you turn the headlight control transmission fluid. It should come on ignition switch to the ON (II)
dial to either the or for a few seconds when you turn the position. If it comes on at any other
position. ignition switch to the ON (II) time, there is a problem in the 4WD
position. If it comes on while driving, system. Take the vehicle to your
If you turn the ignition switch to it means the transmission fluid dealer to have it checked.
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) temperature is too high. Pull to the
without turning off the headlight side of the road when it is safe, shift If the indicator blinks while driving,
control dial, this indicator remains on. to Park, and let the engine idle until the VTM-4 fluid temperature is too
A reminder chime will also sound the indicator goes out. high. Pull to the side of the road
when you open the driver’s door. when it is safe, shift to Park, and let
the engine idle until the indicator
goes out.
Continuing to drive with the A/T
temperature indicator on may cause
serious damage to the transmission.
Continuing to drive with the VTM-4
indicator blinking may cause serious
damage to the system.
66

０６／０４／２８１４：２０：１９３１ＳＪＣ６１０００７２
Vehicle Stability Assist VSA Activation Indicator Maintenance Minder

(VSA) System Indicator Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on for This indicator reminds you that it is
a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the time to take your vehicle in for
ignition switch to the ON (II) ignition switch to the ON (II) scheduled maintenance. The
position. position. For more information, see maintenance main items and sub

page 210 . items will be displayed in the
If it comes on and stays on at any information display. See page 235 for
other time, or if it does not come on This indicator has three functions: more information on the
when you turn the ignition switch to maintenance minder.
the ON (II) position, there is a 1. It comes on as a reminder that you
problem with the VSA system. Take have turned off the vehicle This indicator goes off when your
your vehicle to a dealer to have it stability assist (VSA) system. dealer resets it after completing the
checked. Without VSA, your vehicle required maintenance service.
still has normal driving ability, but 2. It flashes when VSA is active (see
will not have VSA traction and page 210 ).
stability enhancement. See page
210 for more information on the 3. It comes on along with the VSA
VSA system. system indicator if there is a
problem with the VSA system.
67

０６／０４／２８１４：２０：２８３１ＳＪＣ６１０００７３
Low Tire Pressure Tire Pressure Monitor Tire Pressure Monitoring

Indicator System (TPMS) Indicator
This indicator normally comes on for This monitor normally comes on for This indicator normally comes on for
a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the a few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II) ignition switch to the ON (II) ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it comes on while driving, position. While driving, the position.
it indicates that one or more of your appropriate tire indicator will come
vehicle’s tires are extremely low on on, along with the low tire pressure If this indicator comes on and stays
pressure. indicator, if a tire is extremely on at any other time, or if it does not
underinflated or has suddenly lost come on when you turn the ignition
If this happens, pull to the side of the pressure. See Low Tire Pressure switch to the ON (II) position, there
road when it is safe, check which tire Indicator for what to do if this is a problem with the TPMS. With
has lost the pressure on the tire indicator comes on. this indicator on, the low tire
pressure monitor, and determine the pressure indicator and the tire
cause. If it is because of a flat tire, pressure monitor will not come on
replace the flat tire with the compact when a tire loses pressure. Take the
spare (see page 274 ), and have the vehicle to your dealer to have the
flat tire repaired as soon as possible. system checked.
If two or more tires are underinflated,
call a professional towing service
(see page 296 ). Refer to page
204 for more information.
68

０６／０４／２８１４：２０：３７３１ＳＪＣ６１０００７４
Bed Lights On Indicator In-Bed Trunk Open Back Window Open

Indicator Indicator
This indicator reminds you that the This indicator reminds you that the This indicator reminds you that the
bed lights are on. With the shift lever In-Bed Trunk is open. If you do not back window is not completely
in the Park position, they come on close it, the indicator stays on for closed when you turn the ignition
when you push the light switch on about 3 minutes. See page 95 for switch from the ON (II) position to

the dashboard, swing open the more information. the ACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK
tailgate, or open the In-Bed Trunk. (0) position. With the ignition switch
in the ACCESSORY (I) position, it
If you turn the ignition switch to the goes off after about 30 seconds. With
ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0) the ignition switch in the LOCK (0)
position without turning off the bed position, it goes off after about 3
lights, this indicator will remain on, minutes.
and then go off after 20 minutes. See
page 120 for more information. If you remove the ignition key, turn
off the lights, and open the driver’s
door without closing the back
window, you will hear five beeps and
see the indicator blink. If you do not
close the back window before the
beeper stops, the indicator stops
blinking but remains on. It will go off
after about 3 minutes. See page
106 for more information.
69

０６／０４／２８１４：２０：４３３１ＳＪＣ６１０００７５
Gauges
To switch the information display

FUEL GAUGE between the odometer, trip meter
TACHOMETER SPEEDOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGE and outside temperature (if
equipped), and engine oil life and
ODOMETER/ SELECT maintenance service items, press the
TIGHTEN FUEL BUTTON SELECT button repeatedly.
CAP MESSAGE
Odometer
This shows the total distance your
vehicle has been driven. It measures
miles in U.S. models and kilometers
in Canadian models.
It is illegal under U.S. federal law and
Canadian provincial regulations to
disconnect, reset, or alter the
odometer with the intent to change
the number of miles or kilometers
indicated.
OUTSIDE INFORMATION
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
INDICATOR
TRIP METER RESET
BUTTON
U.S. model is shown.
70

０６／０４／２８１４：２０：５１３１ＳＪＣ６１０００７６
Gauges
Trip Meter When you turn the ignition switch to Fuel Gauge
This meter shows the number of the ON (II) position, the meter you This shows how much fuel you have.
miles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada) last selected is displayed. It may show slightly more or less
driven since you last reset it. than the actual amount. The needle
To reset a trip meter, display it, and returns to the bottom after you turn
SELECT BUTTON
then press and hold the RESET off the ignition.

button until the number resets to
‘‘0.0’’. Both trip meters will reset if
the vehicle’s battery goes dead or is
disconnected. And both continue to Avoid driving with an extremely low
track mileage, even when only one is f uel level. Running out of f uel could
displayed. cause the engine to misf ire, damaging
the catalytic converter.
RESET BUTTON
There are two trip meters: TRIP A

and TRIP B. Switch between these
displays by pressing the SELECT
button repeatedly. Each trip meter
works independently, so you can
keep track of two different distances.
71

０６／０４／２８１４：２１：００３１ＳＪＣ６１０００７７
Gauges
Temperature Gauge Outside Temperature Indicator NOTE: The temperature must be

This shows the temperature of the If equipped stabilized before doing this
engine’s coolant. During normal This indicator displays the outside procedure.
operation, the pointer should rise to temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.
about the middle of the gauge. In models) or Centigrade (Canadian To adjust the outside temperature
severe driving conditions, the pointer models). indicator, make sure the outside
may rise to the upper zone. If it temperature indicator is shown in
reaches the red (hot) mark, pull The temperature sensor is in the the display, then press and hold the
safely to the side of the road. For front bumper. Therefore, the RESET button for 10 seconds (the
instructions and precautions on temperature reading can be affected TRIP A or B is also reset). The
checking the engine’s cooling by heat reflection from the road following sequence will appear for 1
system, see page 286 . surface, engine heat, and the second each: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, −5, −4,
exhaust from surrounding traffic. −3, −2, −1, 0 (U.S.) or 0, 1, 2, 3,
This can cause an incorrect −3, −2, −1, 0 (Canada).
temperature reading when your
speed is under 19 mph (30 km/h). When it reaches the desired value,
release the RESET button. You
The sensor delays the indicator should see the new outside
update until it reaches the correct temperature displayed.
outside temperature. This may take
several minutes. In certain weather conditions,
temperature readings near freezing
If the outside temperature is (32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice is
incorrectly displayed, you can adjust forming on the road surface.
it up ±5°F in U.S. models (±3°C in
Canadian models) warmer or cooler.
72

０６／０４／２８１４：２１：０７３１ＳＪＣ６１０００７８
Gauges
Tighten Fuel Cap Message If the system still detects a leak in Maintenance Minder Display
If your fuel fill cap is loose or your vehicle's evaporative emissions The information display in the
missing, a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ system, the malfunction indicator instrument panel shows you the
message appears on the information lamp (MIL) comes on. If the fuel cap engine oil life and maintenance
display after you start the engine. was not already tightened, turn the service items when the ignition
Turn the engine off, and confirm the engine off, and check or retighten the switch is in the ON (II) position. This

fuel cap is installed. If it is, loosen it, fuel cap until it clicks at least once. information helps to keep you aware
then retighten it until it clicks at least The MIL goes off after several days of of the periodic maintenance your
once. When you restart the engine, normal driving once the cap is vehicle needs for continued trouble-
the message appears again. The tightened or replaced. If the MIL does free driving. Refer to page 235 for
message goes off after several days not go off, have your vehicle inspected more information.
of normal driving once you tighten by a dealer. For more information, see
or replace the fuel cap. To scroll to page 289.
another message, press the select
button.
73

０６／０４／２８１４：２１：１４３１ＳＪＣ６１０００７９
Controls Near the Steering Wheel
MOONROOF SWITCH＊2 INSTRUMENT PANEL SHIFT LEVER VTM-4 LOCK (P.203)

(P.108) BRIGHTNESS (P.78) (P.197)
SELECT BUTTON
MULTI-CONTROL LEVER (P.70)
(WINDSHIELD WIPERS/
WASHERS/TURN SIGNALS/ RESET BUTTON
HEADLIGHT HIGH BEAMS) (P.70)
(P.75)
PASSENGER AIRBAG
BED LIGHT SWITCH OFF INDICATOR
(P.120) (P.29)
HAZARD WARNING
HEADLIGHT CONTROL BUTTON
DIAL (P.76)
(P.79)
VEHICLE STABILITY
ASSIST (VSA)
SYSTEM OFF SWITCH
(P.211)
CRUISE BUTTON
(P.165)
HORN＊1
REMOTE AUDIO CRUISE SEAT HEATERS＊2
＊2
CONTROLS (P.161) STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS INTERIOR LIGHT (P.104)
ADJUSTMENT (P.79) (P.165) CONTROL SWITCH
(P.118)
＊1 To use the horn, press the pad around the ‘‘H’’ logo.
＊2 If equipped.
74

０６／０４／２８１４：２１：２４３１ＳＪＣ６１０００８０
Multi-Control Lever
The multi-control lever has many LO − The wipers run at low speed.
functions, including windshield
wipers and washers, turn signals, HI − The wipers run at high speed.
headlight high beams, and headlight
high beam flashing. MIST: The wipers run at high speed
until you release the lever.

To select a position, turn the rotary
switch, push the button on the end of Windshield Washer: Push the
the lever, or push the lever up, down, button on the end of the
forward, or backward. multi-control lever. The
washers spray until you
OFF: The wipers are not activated. release the button. The
wipers run at low speed, then
1.OFF INT: The length of the wiper complete one more sweep
2.INT: Intermittent interval is varied after you release the button.
3.INT TIME ring automatically according to the
4.LO: Low speed vehicle’s speed.
5.HI: High speed
6.MIST Vary the delay by turning the
7.Windshield washers INT TIME ring. If you turn it
8.Turn signal to the shortest delay, the
9.High beams wipers change to low speed
10.Flash high beams when the vehicle speed
exceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).
75

０６／０４／２８１４：２１：３１３１ＳＪＣ６１０００８１
Multi-Control Lever, Headlights
Automatic Heated Wiper Zone Turn Signal − Push down on the Headlight Control Dial
Your vehicle has heating wires at the multi-control lever to signal a left
bottom of the windshield to help turn and up to signal a right turn. To
heat the wiper blades and the signal a lane change, push lightly on
windshield. If the outside the lever and hold it. The lever will
temperature is near freezing, the return to center when you release it
heater turns on automatically when or complete a turn.
you turn the ignition switch to the
ON (II) position. The heater turns High Beams − To turn on the high
off automatically when the outside beams, push the multi-control lever
temperature is above freezing. forward until you hear a click. The
blue high beam indicator will come
This function helps to increase wiper on (see page 65 ). Pull the lever back
performance when the wiper arms to return to the low beams.
sit in the parked position in snowy or 1. OFF
icy conditions. To flash the high beams, pull the 2. Parking and indicator lights
lever back lightly, then release it. 3. Headlights
The high beams will stay on as long
as you hold the lever back.
76

０６／０４／２８１４：２１：３９３１ＳＪＣ６１０００８２
Headlights
Headlights − Turning the dial to Automatic Lighting Off Feature If you remove the key from the
the ‘‘ ’’ position turns on the The automatic lighting off feature ignition switch with the headlight
parking lights, taillights, instrument turns off the headlights, all other control dial on, but do not open the
panel lights, and license plate lights. exterior lights, and the instrument door, the lights will turn off after 10
panel lights within 15 seconds of minutes.
Turning the dial to the ‘‘ ’’ removing the key from the ignition

position turns on the headlights. If switch and closing the driver’s door. The lights will turn on again when
you leave the lights on and remove you unlock or open the driver’s door.
the key from the ignition switch, you This feature activates if you leave If you unlock the door, but do not
will hear a reminder chime when you the headlight control dial in the open it within 15 seconds, the lights
open the driver’s door. ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, remove go off. With the driver’s door open,
the key, then open and close the you will hear a lights-on reminder
When the dial is in the ‘‘ ’’ or driver’s door. chime.
‘‘ ’’ position, the lights on
indicator comes on as a reminder.
This indicator stays on if you leave
the lights on and turn the ignition
switch to the ACCESSORY (I) or
LOCK (0) position.
77

０６／０４／２８１４：２１：４８３１ＳＪＣ６１０００８３
Headlights, Instrument Panel Brightness
Daytime Running Lights Instrument Panel Brightness If you do not insert the key in the
Canadian models only ignition switch after opening the
With the headlight control dial off, driver’s door, the illumination turns
the high beam headlights and the off about 30 seconds after you close
high beam indicator come on with the door.
reduced brightness when you turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II) If you insert the key but do not turn
position and release the parking the ignition switch to the ON (II)
brake. They remain on until you turn position, the illumination turns off in
the ignition switch off, even if you about 10 seconds.
set the parking brake.
INSTRUMENT PANEL
The instrument panel brightness is
The headlights revert to normal BRIGHTNESS CONTROL DIAL dimmed when you turn the headlight
operation when you turn them on control dial to the ‘‘ ’’ or
with the headlight control dial. The dial on the instrument panel ‘‘ ’’ position to reduce glare at
controls the brightness of the night. To cancel it, turn the
instrument panel lights and the instrument panel brightness control
console compartment light. Turn the dial upward fully until you hear a
dial to adjust the brightness. click.
The instrument panel will illuminate

with reduced brightness when you
unlock and open the driver’s door.
The brightness will increase and go
to a normal level when you insert the
key in the ignition switch.
78

０６／０４／２８１４：２１：５６３１ＳＪＣ６１０００８４
Hazard Warning Button, Steering Wheel Adjustment
Hazard Warning Button Steering Wheel Adjustment

Make any steering wheel adjustment
before you start driving.

Adjusting the steering wheel
position while driving may
cause you to lose control of the
vehicle and be seriously injured
in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only

when the vehicle is stopped. 3. Push the lever up to lock the
Push the button to turn on the steering wheel in position.
hazard warning lights (four-way
flashers). This causes all four 1. Push the lever on the left side of 4. Make sure you have securely
outside turn signals and both turn the steering column all the way locked the steering wheel in place
indicators in the instrument panel to down. by trying to move it up and down.
flash. Use the hazard warning lights
if you need to park in a dangerous 2. Move the steering wheel so it
area near heavy traffic, or if your points toward your chest, not
vehicle is disabled. toward your face. Make sure you
can see the instrument panel
gauges and indicators.
79

０６／０４／２８１４：２２：０４３１ＳＪＣ６１０００８５
Keys
MASTER KEY VALET KEY

You should have received a key These keys contain electronic
KEY
NUMBER WITH REMOTE (LIGHT GRAY) number tag with your keys. You will circuits that are activated by the
TAG TRANSMITTER need this key number if you ever immobilizer system. They will not
have to get a lost key replaced. Use work to start the engine if the
only Honda-approved key blanks. circuits are damaged.
Protect the keys from direct

sunlight, high temperature, and
high humidity.
Do not drop the keys or set heavy

objects on them.
The master key fits all the locks on Keep the keys away from liquids.
your vehicle. The valet key works If they get wet, dry them
only in the ignition and the driver’s immediately with a soft cloth.
door lock. You can keep the glove
box locked when you leave your
vehicle and the valet key at a parking
facility.
You can also keep the In-Bed Trunk

locked by using the main switch in
the glove box (see page 97 ).
80

０６／０４／２８１４：２２：１１３１ＳＪＣ６１０００８６
Immobilizer System
The immobilizer system protects The system may not recognize your As required by the FCC:
your vehicle from theft. If an key’s coding if another immobilizer This device complies with Part 15 of the
improperly-coded key (or other key or other metal object (i.e. key FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
device) is used, the engine’s fuel fob) is near the ignition switch when following two conditions: (1) This device
system is disabled. you insert the key. may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) this device must accept any

When you turn the ignition switch to If the system repeatedly does not interference received, including
the ON (II) position, the immobilizer recognize the coding of your key, interference that may cause undesired
system indicator should come on for contact your dealer. operation.
a few seconds, then go off. If the
indicator starts to blink, it means the Do not attempt to alter this system Changes or modifications not expressly
system does not recognize the or add other devices to it. Electrical approved by the party responsible for
coding of the key. Turn the ignition problems could result that may make compliance could void the user’s
switch to the LOCK (0) position, your vehicle undrivable. authority to operate the equipment.
remove the key, reinsert it, and turn
the ignition switch to the ON (II) If you have lost your key and cannot This device complies with Industry
position again. start the engine, contact your dealer. Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
81

０６／０４／２８１４：２２：１９３１ＳＪＣ６１０００８７
Ignition Switch
LOCK (0) − You can insert or START (III) − Use this position
remove the key only in this position. only to start the engine. The switch
To turn the key, the shift lever must returns to the ON (II) position when
be in Park, and you must push the you let go of the key.
key in slightly.
You will hear a reminder beeper if
If the front wheels are turned, the you leave the key in the ignition
anti-theft lock may make it difficult switch in the LOCK (0) or the
to turn the key. Firmly turn the ACCESSORY (I) position and open
steering wheel to the left or right as the driver’s door. Remove the key to
you turn the key. turn off the beeper.
ACCESSORY (I) − You can The shift lever must be in Park (P)
The ignition switch has four operate the audio system and the before you can remove the key from
positions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY accessory power sockets in this the ignition switch.
(I), ON (II), and START (III). position.
ON (II) − This is the normal key

position when driving. Several of the
indicators on the instrument panel
come on as a test when you turn the
ignition switch from the
ACCESSORY (I) to the ON (II)
position.
82

０６／０４／２８１４：２２：２７３１ＳＪＣ６１０００８８
Door Locks
Power Door Locks The lock tab on each door locks and To lock any passenger’s door when
unlocks that door. Pulling up on the getting out of the vehicle, push the
LOCK TAB driver’s door lock tab only unlocks lock tab down, and close the door.
the driver’s door. To unlock the To lock the driver’s door, remove the
driver’s door and the In-Bed Trunk key from the ignition switch, and
from the outside, turn the key and push the lock tab down, or push the

release it. If you turn it again, all the front of the master switch, then
doors unlock. close the door.
You can open or close the side Lockout Prevention

windows by using the key in the With the driver’s door open and the
driver’s door (see page 107 ). key in the ignition, both master door
MASTER DOOR LOCK SWITCH lock switches are disabled. They are
not disabled if the driver’s door is
To lock all doors and the In-Bed closed. Pushing the front of the
Trunk (the tailgate does not lock), switch on the open passenger’s door
push the front of the master door lock will lock all doors and the In-Bed
switch on either front door, press the Trunk.
lock tab down on the driver's door, or
use the key on the outside lock on the This vehicle has auto door locking/
driver's door. unlocking features. See page 84 for
how to set them.
Pushing the rear of either master
door lock switch will unlock all of the
doors and the In-Bed Trunk.
83

０６／０４／２８１４：２２：３９３１ＳＪＣ６１０００８９
Door Locks
Childproof Door Locks Automatic (Auto) Door Locking/ To program the Park Lock
Unlocking mode:
Your vehicle has customizable Locks all doors when the shift lever is
settings for the doors to moved out of Park (P).
automatically lock and unlock. Make
all settings before you start driving.
With the auto door locking and

unlocking, the In-Bed Trunk also
locks and unlocks (the tailgate does
not lock).
Auto Door Locking
LOCK LEVER The auto door locking feature has
three possible settings:
The childproof door locks are
designed to prevent children seated The doors lock whenever you
in the rear from accidentally opening move the shift lever out of the
the rear doors. Each rear door has a Park (P) position. 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
lock lever near the edge. With the Park (P) position.
lever in the LOCK position, the door The doors lock when the vehicle
cannot be opened from inside speed reaches 9 mph (15 km/h). 2. Apply the parking brake, and close
regardless of the position of the lock the driver’s door.
tab. To open the door, pull the lock The auto door locking is
tab up, and use the outside door deactivated all the time. 3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON
handle. (II) position (do not start the
engine).
84

０６／０４／２８１４：２２：４９３１ＳＪＣ６１０００９０
Door Locks
4. Push and hold the front of the To program the Drive Lock mode: 4. Push and hold the brake pedal,
master door lock switch on the Locks all doors when the vehicle's speed then move the shift lever out of
driver's door. You will hear a reaches about 9 mph (15 km/h). Park (P).
clicking sound, and after about 5
seconds, you will hear another 5. Push and hold the front of the
clicking sound. master door lock switch on the

driver's door. You will hear a
5. Release the switch, and turn the clicking sound, and after about 5
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY seconds, you will hear another
(I) position within 5 seconds. clicking sound.
6. Release the switch, and turn the

ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) position within 5 seconds.
7. Move the shift lever to PARK (P).

1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position.
2. Apply the parking brake, and close

the driver’s door.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

(II) position (do not start the
engine).
CONTINUED
85

０６／０４／２８１４：２２：５９３１ＳＪＣ６１０００９１
Door Locks
To turn off the Auto Lock modes: 4. Push and hold the front of the Auto Door Unlocking
master door lock switch on the The auto door unlocking feature has
driver’s door. You will hear a three modes (Park Unlock, Ignition
clicking sound after about 5 Switch, and Deactivated), with five
seconds. possible settings:
5. Release the switch, and turn the Park Unlock mode:

ignition switch to the ACCESSORY The driver's door and then In-Bed
(I) position within 5 seconds. Trunk unlocks whenever you move
the shift lever to the PARK (P)
position.
All doors and the In-Bed trunk
unlocks whenever you move the
shift lever to the PARK (P) position.
1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
Park (P) position. Ignition Switch mode:
The driver’s door and the In-Bed
2. Apply the parking brake, and open Trunk unlocks whenever you turn the
the driver’s door. ignition switch to the LOCK (0) position.
All doors and the In-Bed Trunk unlocks
3. Turn the ignition switch to the ON whenever you turn the ignition switch to
(II) position (do not start the theLOCK (0) position.
engine).
Deactivated:
The auto door unlocking settings
are deactivated.
86

０６／０４／２８１４：２３：１１３１ＳＪＣ６１０００９２
Door Locks
To program the Park Unlock mode: 3. Push and hold the rear of the To program the Ignition Sw itch
Unlock mode: master door lock switch on the Unlock mode:
Unlocks driver’s door or all doors when driver’s door. You will hear a Unlocks driver's door or all doors when
the shift lever is moved to Park (P). clicking sound. Continue to hold the ignition switch is out of the ON (II)
down the switch: position.*

−Until you hear a second click
(after about 5 seconds) to
activate the driver’s door unlock
feature.
−Or, until you hear a third click

activate the all door unlock
feature.
4. Release the switch, and turn the

1. Make sure the shift lever is in ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
Park (P), and close the driver’s (I) position within 5 seconds. 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
door. Park (P) position.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON 2. Apply the parking brake, and close
(II) position. the driver’s door.

＊ If equipped (II) position (do not start the engine).
CONTINUED
87

０６／０４／２８１４：２３：２１３１ＳＪＣ６１０００９３
Door Locks
4. Push and hold the brake pedal, To turn off the door unlock 4. Push and hold the rear of the
then move the shift lever out of modes: master door lock switch on the
Park (P). driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound, and after about 5
5. Push and hold the rear of the seconds, you will hear another
master door lock switch on the clicking sound.
driver’s door. You will hear a
clicking sound. Continue to hold 5. Release the switch, and turn the
down the switch: ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) position within 5 seconds.
−Until you hear a second click
activate the driver’s door unlock
feature.
−Or, until you hear a third click

(after about 10 seconds) to 1. Make sure the shift lever is in the
activate the all door unlock Park (P) position.
feature.
2. Apply the parking brake, and
6. Release the switch, and turn the open the driver’s door.
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY
(I) position within 5 seconds. (II) position (do not start the
engine).
7. Move the shift lever to PARK (P).
88

０６／０４／２８１４：２３：２８３１ＳＪＣ６１０００９４
Remote Transmitter
UNLOCK − Press this button once If you do not open any door within 30
LED LOCK to unlock the driver’s door and the seconds, the doors automatically
BUTTON
In-Bed Trunk. Push it twice to relock, and the security system sets
unlock the remaining doors. (if equipped). The UNLOCK button
Some exterior and interior lights will does not work when the key is in the
flash twice each time you push the ignition switch.

button.
You can also open all side windows
When you press the UNLOCK from outside the vehicle with the
button, the front and rear individual remote transmitter (see page 107 ).
UNLOCK PANIC map lights, depending on the interior
BUTTON BUTTON light control switch position, will PANIC − Press and hold this
come on (see page 118 ). If you do button for about 1 second to attract
LOCK − Press this button once to not open any door, the lights stay on attention; the horn will sound and
lock all doors and the In-Bed Trunk. for about 30 seconds, then go out. If the exterior lights will flash for about
Some exterior and interior lights will you relock the doors and the In-Bed 30 seconds. To cancel panic mode,
flash once. Trunk with the remote transmitter press any other button on the remote
When you push LOCK twice within 5 before 30 seconds have elapsed, the transmitter, or turn the ignition
seconds, you will hear a beep to lights will go off immediately. switch to the ON (II) position. Panic
verify that the doors and In-Bed mode does not work when the key is
Trunk are locked and the security in the ignition switch.
system (if equipped) has set. This
button does not work if any door is
not fully closed or the key is in the
ignition switch.
89

０６／０４／２８１４：２３：３９３１ＳＪＣ６１０００９５
Remote Transmitter
Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Transmitter

Avoid dropping or throwing the Battery
transmitter.
Protect the transmitter from

extreme temperature.
Do not immerse the transmitter in BATTERY

any liquid.
If you lose a transmitter, the

replacement needs to be
reprogrammed by your dealer.
SCREW
If it takes several pushes on the 2. Separate the transmitter by prying

button to lock or unlock the doors, its middle seam with your
replace the battery as soon as fingernail.
possible.
Battery type: CR1616 3. Inside the transmitter, separate
the inner cover from the keypad
To replace the battery: by releasing the two tabs on the
cover.
1. Remove the screw at the base of
the transmitter with a small
Phillips-head screwdriver.
90

０６／０４／２８１４：２３：４４３１ＳＪＣ６１０００９６
Remote Transmitter
4. Remove the old battery from the As required by the FCC:

back of the inner cover, and insert This device complies with Part 15 of the
a new battery into the back of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
cover with the ＋ side facing down. following two conditions: (1) This device
may not cause harmful interference, and
5. Install the parts in reverse order. (2) this device must accept any

interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Changes or modifications not expressly

approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry

Canada Standard RSS-210.
Operation is subject to the following two
interference, and (2) this device must
accept any interference that may cause
undesired operation of the device.
91

０６／０４／２８１４：２３：５２３１ＳＪＣ６１０００９７
Dual-Action Tailgate
You can open the tailgate two Before you open the tailgate a To Drop Open the Tailgate
different ways: different way (dropped open, and
then swung open), make sure it is UPPER HANDLE
Drop it open by using the upper fully closed.
handle.
Make sure all passengers and
Swing it open by using the right objects are clear of the tailgate
lower handle. before opening and closing it, and
make sure the tailgate is closed
NOTE: securely before driving.
As a safety feature, the upper handle
is disabled if you do not fully close
the tailgate after it is swung open.
And the lower handle is disabled if
you do not fully close the tailgate To drop open the tailgate, pull up the
after it is dropped open. upper handle, then pull down the
tailgate. To close the tailgate, push
firmly up until it latches.
92

０６／０４／２８１４：２４：００３１ＳＪＣ６１０００９８
The dropped open tailgate can be To Swing Open the Tailgate

used as an extended pickup bed.
Make sure to secure the items in the Do not drive with the tailgate swung
pickup bed, and do not exceed the open. This could damage the tailgate.
maximum allowable weight on the
tailgate (see page 189 ).

HANDLE
To turn the bed lights on or off, use Swinging the tailgate open or
the bed light switch on the closed while anyone is in its
dashboard (see page 120 ). path can cause serious injury.
Make sure all passengers are

clear of the tailgate’s path
before opening or closing it.
To swing open the tailgate, first
make sure it is fully closed, then pull
up the right lower handle, and swing
the tailgate to the left.
To close, swing the tailgate back,
and push it firmly until it is latched.
Before opening or closing the

tailgate, check that passengers,
especially children, are not in the
tailgate’s path.
CONTINUED
93

０６／０４／２８１４：２４：０９３１ＳＪＣ６１０００９９
Do not allow anyone to hang on the Tailgate Open Indicator If you do not fasten the seat belt, you
swung open tailgate. This could first hear the seat belt reminder
damage the tailgate. This indicator is in the door and alarm, then the tailgate reminder
tailgate open monitor on the beeper sounds.
Do not leave the tailgate swung open. instrument panel. It comes on when
The tailgate may swing and shut the tailgate is swung open or it is not The indicator does not monitor the
accidentally. This could cause completely closed. This indicator tailgate when it is dropped open.
serious injuries. works even if the key is not in the
ignition switch. Loading Cargo
The bed lights come on when you See page 186 for information on
swing open the tailgate. You can also If the tailgate is swung open or not cargo loading and weight limits.
turn the bed lights on or off by closed tightly when the ignition
pushing the bed light switch on the switch is in the ON (II) position, you You can also store and lock items in
dashboard (see page 120 ). will hear six beeps and see the the In-Bed Trunk (see page 95 ).
indicator blinking. The indicator
stays on until you close the tailgate.
The beeper also sounds and the
indicator blinks when you move the
shift lever out of the Park or neutral
position.
94

０６／０４／２８１４：２４：１９３１ＳＪＣ６１００１００
In-Bed TrunkTM
If your vehicle’s battery is

disconnected or goes dead, the
release button on the In-Bed Trunk
lid is disabled. To open the In-Bed
Trunk, use the master key.

The bed lights come on when you
open the In-Bed Trunk. You can also
turn the bed lights on or off by
pushing the bed light switch on the
RELEASE
BUTTON dashboard (see page 120 ).
You can store items in the In-Bed

You can open the In-Bed Trunk two To close the In-Bed Trunk, lower the Trunk up to 300 lbs (136 kg). Do not
different ways: lid, then press down on the back exceed this weight limit, or you may
edge. damage the In-Bed Trunk. See page
Push the release button on the 186 for information on loading cargo
lower right side of the In-Bed When the In-Bed Trunk is closed and weight limits.
Trunk lid when the driver’s door is securely, it can be locked or
unlocked. unlocked along with the power door To store items separately in the
locks (see page 83 ). In-Bed Trunk, optional divider
Use the master key to open the guides are available from your dealer.
In-Bed Trunk when the driver’s
door is locked.
CONTINUED
95

０６／０４／２８１４：２４：２８３１ＳＪＣ６１００１０１
In-Bed TrunkTM
To avoid damaging the key and key To avoid damaging the seal on the Emergency Opener
cylinder of the In-Bed Trunk lid, do In-Bed Trunk lid, remove any debris
not close the tailgate when the key is from the lid’s mating surface before
in the lid. you close it.
To avoid damaging the In-Bed Trunk

lid, and to prevent items from being
thrown about the vehicle and
possibly hurting someone in an
accident or sudden stop, be sure the
In-Bed Trunk lid is securely closed
before driving away.
To avoid damaging the bottom of the

In-Bed Trunk, do not drive over large As a safety feature, your vehicle has
obstacles, and do not use it as a a release lever on the latch of the
jacking point to raise the vehicle. In-Bed Trunk lid so it can be opened
from the inside. To open the In-Bed
In-Bed Trunk Open Trunk, push the release lever in the
Indicator direction of the arrow.
This indicator on the instrument
panel reminds you that the In-Bed Parents should decide if their
Trunk is open (see page 69 ). children should be shown how to use
this feature. For more information
about child safety, see page 36 .
96

０６／０４／２８１４：２４：３７３１ＳＪＣ６１００１０２
In-Bed TrunkTM
In-Bed Trunk Main Switch Washing the In-Bed Trunk Cargo Hooks
MAIN SWITCH CARGO HOOKS

DRAIN PLUG
To protect items in the In-Bed Trunk, You can wash the inside of the There are two cargo hooks for
you can disable its release button by In-Bed Trunk with a water and mild plastic grocery bags at the back of
turning off the main switch in the detergent solution, and a soft brush the In-Bed Trunk. They are designed
glove box and locking the glove box or cloth. to hold light items. Heavy objects
with the master key. may damage the hooks.
To drain water from the In-Bed
Even if the main switch is in the OFF Trunk, remove the drain plug by
position, you can open the In-Bed turning it counterclockwise.
Trunk with the master key.
When you are finished washing the
In-Bed Trunk, dry it with a soft cloth,
and reinstall the drain plug.
97

０６／０４／２８１４：２４：４５３１ＳＪＣ６１００１０３
Seats
The front passenger’s seat in all Manual Seat Adjustments to make sure it is locked in position.
models adjusts manually. On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
See pages 11 − 13 for important safety
information and warnings about how to
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.
To change the seat-back angle of the

front seat, pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat bottom.
Once your seat is adjusted correctly,

rock it back and forth to make sure it
is locked in position.
To adjust the seat forward or
backward, pull up on the bar under
the seat cushion’s front edge. Move
the seat to the desired position, and
release the bar. Try to move the seat
98

０６／０４／２８１４：２４：５２３１ＳＪＣ６１００１０４
Seats
Driver’s Seat Manual Height Make sure to pull the lever upward Driver’s Manual Lumbar Support
Adjustment or downward to its full range.
Make all seat adjustments before
you start driving.

On RTS model
Vary the lumbar support by moving
the lever on the right side of the
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models seat-back. Move the lever forward or
The height of your driver’s seat is backward to adjust the lumbar
adjustable. To raise the seat, support through its full range.
repeatedly pull up the lever on the
outside of the seat cushion. To lower
the seat, push the lever down
repeatedly.
99

０６／０４／２８１４：２５：０３３１ＳＪＣ６１００１０５
Seats
Power Seat Adjustments Moves the whole seat up

On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL and forward, or down
models and backward. The front
See pages 11 − 13 for important safety of the seat also tilts up or
information and warnings about how to down at the same time.
properly position the seats and seat-
backs.
Adjusts the seat-back
The controls for the power angle forward or
adjustable driver’s seat are on the backward.
outside edge of the seat bottom. You
can adjust the seat with the ignition
switch in any position. Make all seat Increases or decreases
adjustments before you start driving. Moves the seat forward the lumbar support.
and backward. (RTL and Canadian EXL
Moving the long horizontal switch models)
adjusts the seat bottom in several
directions. The seat bottom adjusts Moves the front of the
in the direction you move the switch. seat up or down.
The short vertical switch adjusts the
seat-back angle.
Raises or lowers the seat.
100

０６／０４／２８１４：２５：０９３１ＳＪＣ６１００１０６
Seats
Armrests
FRONT REAR

To use the console lid as an armrest, The rear seat armrest is in the
slide it to the desired position. center of the rear seats. Pivot it
down to use it.
Make sure your passenger’s hands
or fingers are away from the armrest
before moving it.
101

０６／０４／２８１４：２５：１７３１ＳＪＣ６１００１０７
Seats
Head Restraints Rear Center Position

See page 13 for important safety
information and a warning about how to
properly position the head restraints.
Your vehicle is equipped with head

restraints in all seating positions to
help protect you and your
passengers from whiplash and other
injuries.
They are most effective when you RELEASE BUTTON RELEASE BUTTON
adjust them so the back of the
occupant’s head rests against the The head restraints adjust for height. When a passenger is seated in the
center of the restraint. You need both hands to adjust the rear center seating position, make
restraint. Do not attempt to adjust it sure the center head restraint is
while driving. To raise it, pull upward. properly positioned.
To lower the restraint, push the
release button sideways, and push
the restraint down.
102

０６／０４／２８１４：２５：２５３１ＳＪＣ６１００１０８
Seats
Folding the Rear Seats LEGS

The left and right rear seat cushions
can be lifted up separately to make
room for cargo.
Remove any items from the seat

before you fold up the seat cushion.
FLOOR GUIDE
To fold a rear seat cushion, pull up To return the seat cushion to its
the lever on the outside of the original position, pull the lever
cushion. The seat cushion pops up, outward, then push down the seat
and the seat legs store underneath it. cushion slowly.
Push the cushion firmly against the
seat-back to lock it in place. Make sure the seat cushion is locked
securely and the seat legs are
positioned properly in the floor guide.
CONTINUED
103

０６／０４／２８１４：２５：３４３１ＳＪＣ６１００１０９
Seats, Seat Heaters
Make sure all items in the cargo area Seat Heaters In HI, the heater turns off when the
are secured. Loose items can fly seat gets warm, and turns back on
forward and cause injury if you have SEAT HEATER SWITCHES after the seat’s temperature drops.
to brake hard (See Carrying Cargo
on page 186 ). In LO, the heater runs continuously.
It does not cycle with temperature
You can also store small items under changes.
the rear seats. Make sure to secure
the items so they will not shift while Follow these precautions when using
you are driving. the seat heaters:
Use the HI setting only to heat the

seats quickly, because it draws
large amounts of current from the
If equipped battery.
Both front seats have seat heaters.
The passenger seat is only heated in If the engine is left idling for an
the seat bottom because of the side extended period, do not use the
airbag cutoff system. The ignition seat heaters, even on the LO
switch must be in the ON (II) setting. It can weaken the battery,
position to use seat heaters. Push the causing hard starting.
top of the switch, HI, to rapidly heat
up the seat. After the seat reaches a
comfortable temperature, select LO
by pushing the bottom of the switch.
This will keep the seat warm.
104

０６／０４／２８１４：２５：４１３１ＳＪＣ６１００１１０
Power Windows
DRIVER’S WINDOW MAIN SWITCH The windows operate for up to 10 AUTO − To open or close the
SWITCH minutes after you turn off the driver’s window, push or pull the
ignition switch. Opening either front window switch firmly down or up to
door cancels this function. the second detent, and release it.
The window will automatically go up
BACK WINDOW
or down all the way. To stop the

SWITCH
window, pull or push the window
Closing a power window on switch briefly.
someone’s hands or fingers can
cause serious injury. When you push the MAIN switch in,
the passenger windows and the back
Make sure your passengers are window cannot be raised or lowered.
away from the windows before
Turn the ignition switch to the ON closing them. To cancel this feature, push on the
(II) position to raise or lower any switch again. Keep the MAIN switch
side window, or open and close the off when you have children in the
back window. To open the window, vehicle so they do not injure
push the switch down and hold it. themselves by operating the
Release the switch when you want windows unintentionally.
the window to stop. Pull back on the
switch and hold it to close the
window.
CONTINUED
105

０６／０４／２８１４：２５：５０３１ＳＪＣ６１００１１１
Power Windows
AUTO REVERSE − If the driver’s If the driver’s window fuse is Back Window
window senses any obstacle while it removed, the AUTO function may be Your vehicle has a power back
is closing automatically, it will disabled. The power window system window.
reverse direction, and then stop. To needs to be reset after reinstalling
close the window, remove the the fuse. Back Window Open
obstacle, then use the window switch Indicator
again. 1. Start the engine. Push down and This indicator comes on when you
hold the driver’s window switch turn the ignition switch from the ON
Auto reverse stops sensing when the until the window is fully open. (II) to the ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK
window is almost closed. You should (0) position without closing the back
always check that all passengers and 2. Pull and hold the driver’s window window. With the ignition switch in
objects are away from the window switch to close the window the ACCESSORY (I) position, the
before closing it. completely, then hold the switch indicator goes off after about 30
for about 2 seconds. seconds. With the ignition switch in
the LOCK (0) position, the indicator
If the power windows do not operate goes off after about 3 minutes.
properly after resetting, have your
vehicle checked by your dealer.
106

０６／０４／２８１４：２６：０２３１ＳＪＣ６１００１１２
Power Windows
If you remove the ignition key and Opening the Side Windows with
open the driver’s door without the Remote Transmitter UNLOCK BUTTON
closing the back window, you hear You can open all of the side windows
five beeps and see the indicator blink. from the outside with the remote
If you do not close the back window transmitter.
before the beeper stops, the

indicator stops blinking but remains 1. Press the UNLOCK button once
on. It will go off after about 3 to unlock the driver’s door.
minutes (see page 69 ). Close
2. Press the UNLOCK button a
The back window is not designed to second time, and hold it. The Open
carry long items through it. Do not passenger’s doors unlock, and all
use the opened back window as a four side windows start to open.
cargo area pass-through. To stop the windows, release the Opening/Closing the Side
button. Windows with the Key
You can open and close the side
3. To open the windows further, windows with the key in the driver’s
press the button again, within door lock.
about 3 seconds.
To open:
You cannot close the windows with 1. Insert the key in the driver’s door
the remote transmitter. lock.
2. Turn the key clockwise, then

release it.
CONTINUED
107

０６／０４／２８１４：２６：１２３１ＳＪＣ６１００１１３
Power Windows, Moonroof
3. Turn the key clockwise again, and 4. To close the windows further, turn Moonroof
hold it. All four side windows start and hold the key again (within
to open. To stop the windows, 10 seconds).
release the key.
NOTE: If the windows stop before
4. To open the windows further, turn the desired position, repeat steps 2
and hold the key again (within and 3.
10 seconds).
NOTE: If the windows stop before

the desired position, repeat steps 2
and 3.
MOONROOF SWITCH
To close:
1. Insert the key in the driver’s door If equipped
lock. The moonroof has two positions: it
can be tilted up in the back for
2. Turn the key counterclockwise, ventilation, or it can slide back into
then release it. the roof. Use the switch near the left
dashboard vent to operate the
3. Turn the key counterclockwise moonroof. The ignition switch must
again, and hold it. All four side be in the ON (II) position.
windows start to close. To stop the
windows, release the key.
108

０６／０４／２８１４：２６：２１３１ＳＪＣ６１００１１４
Moonroof, Parking Brake
To tilt up the back of the moonroof, You can open and close the Parking Brake
press and hold the center part of the moonroof for up to 10 minutes after
switch ( ). To close the you turn off the ignition switch. RELEASE
moonroof, press and hold the upper Opening either front door cancels HANDLE
part of the switch ( ). To open this function.
the moonroof, press and hold the

lower part of the switch ( ).
Release the switch when the
moonroof gets to the desired If you try to open the moonroof in
position. below-f reezing temperatures, or when
it is covered with snow or ice, you can
Make sure everyone’s hands are damage the moonroof panel or its
away from the moonroof before motor. PARKING BRAKE PEDAL
opening or closing it.
To apply the parking brake, push the
pedal down with your foot. To
release it, pull the release handle
Opening or closing the fully. The parking brake indicator on
moonroof on someone’s hands the instrument panel should go out
or fingers can cause serious when the parking brake is fully
injury. released, and the ignition switch is in
the ON (II) position (see page 63 ).
Make sure all hands and fingers
are clear of the moonroof
before opening or closing it.
CONTINUED
109

０６／０４／２８１４：２６：２７３１ＳＪＣ６１００１１５
Parking Brake, Mirrors
Mirrors If equipped
The rear view mirror has a compass
Driving the vehicle with the parking TAB function to indicate the vehicle’s
brake applied can damage the rear direction.
brakes and axles. A beeper will sound Refer to Compass on page 168 .
if the vehicle is driven with the parking
brake on.
Keep the inside and outside mirrors

clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Be sure to adjust the mirrors before
you start driving.
The inside mirror has day and night

positions. The night position reduces
glare from headlights behind you.
Flip the tab on the bottom edge of
the mirror to select the day or night
position.
110

０６／０４／２８１４：２６：３６３１ＳＪＣ６１００１１６
Mirrors
Adjusting the Power Mirrors 4. When you finish, move the Heated Mirrors
selector switch to the center (off)
ADJUSTMENT SWITCH position. This turns the HEATED MIRROR BUTTON
adjustment switch off to keep your
settings.

SELECTOR SWITCH
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON If equipped

(II) position. The outside mirrors are heated to
remove fog and frost. With the
2. Move the selector switch to L ignition switch in the ON (II)
(driver’s side) or R (passenger’s position, turn on the heaters by
side). pressing the button. The indicator in
the button comes on as a reminder.
3. Push the appropriate edge of the Press the button again to turn the
adjustment switch to move the heaters off.
mirror right, left, up, or down.
111

０６／０４／２８１４：２６：４０３１ＳＪＣ６１００１１７
Interior Convenience Items
VANITY MIRROR SUN VISOR CENTER CONSOLE CONSOLE COMPARTMENT
SUNGLASSES BEVERAGE HOLDER COAT HOOK

HOLDER
ACCESSORY POWER
CENTER UPPER SOCKET
POCKET＊
GLOVE BOX
ACCESSORY
POWER
SOCKETS
CENTER POCKET
CENTER LOWER POCKET BEVERAGE HOLDERS
＊ : On vehicle without navigation system
112

０６／０４／２８１４：２６：４９３１ＳＪＣ６１００１１８
Center Console Console Compartments

The center console main
compartment is under the tray and
the beverage holder. You can access
the main compartment in two ways
(front or rear).

To open the rear of the compartment,
Your vehicle has a multi-function push the button at the end of the
center console. It includes beverage tray, then slide the tray forward. To
holders, storage compartments, an close, slide the tray back in place.
armrest, a coin holder, and a storage
tray. There are two removable partitions
To open the front of the in the main compartment. The
compartment, squeeze the knob, and partitions can be used to divide the
push it forward while sliding the main compartment, or can be stored
beverage holder. To close, squeeze at the front of the compartment.
the knob and pull the compartment The console compartment light
backward until the beverage holder comes on when the instrument panel
latches. lights are on.
113

０６／０４／２８１４：２６：５８３１ＳＪＣ６１００１１９
Cargo Hooks Beverage Holders

The center console has two beverage
holders on the front. Your vehicle
also has beverage holders in the rear
seat armrest and the rear door
panels.
Be careful when you are using the

beverage holders. A spilled liquid
that is very hot can scald you or your
passengers. Liquid can also spill
COIN HOLDER from the door panel beverage
CARGO HOOKS holders when you close the doors.
You can put small items in the upper Use only resealable containers in the
console compartment. To use it, pull There are two cargo hooks for door beverage holders.
up on the lever and lift up the plastic grocery bags at the back of
armrest. the center console. They are Spilled liquids can damage the
designed to hold light items. Heavy upholstery, carpeting, and electrical
If equipped objects may damage the hooks. components in the interior.
The upper console compartment has
a removable coin holder. Pull the
coin holder straight up to remove it.
To install it, push it down along the
guides on the side of the
compartment.
114

０６／０４／２８１４：２７：０７３１ＳＪＣ６１００１２０
Glove Box Coat Hooks Sunglasses Holder

Open the glove box by pulling the
handle. Close it with a firm push. SUNGLASSES HOLDER
Lock or unlock the glove box with
the master key.

The glove box light comes on when
the parking lights are on.
An open glove box can cause

serious injury to your passenger
in a crash, even if the
passenger is wearing the seat These hooks are not designed for To open the sunglasses holder, push
belt. large or heavy items. on the rear edge. Make sure the
holder is closed while you are driving.
Always keep the glove box
closed while driving. Some larger styles of sunglasses
may not fit in the holder.
115

０６／０４／２８１４：２７：１３３１ＳＪＣ６１００１２１
Accessory Power Sockets None of the sockets will power an

automotive type cigarette lighter
FRONT REAR element. When both sockets are
being used, the combined power
rating of the accessories should be
120 watts or less (10 amps).
There are three accessory power These sockets are intended to supply
sockets in your vehicle. Two power for 12 volt DC accessories
accessory power sockets are above that are rated 120 watts or less (10
the center pocket on the dashboard, amps).
and another is on the back of the
center console. To use an accessory power socket,
the ignition switch must be in the
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position.
116

０６／０４／２８１４：２７：２２３１ＳＪＣ６１００１２２
Sun Visor Make sure you put the sun visor Vanity Mirror
back in place when you are getting
into or out of the vehicle.

SUN VISOR
To use the sun visor, pull it down. Pull up the vanity mirror cover to use
When using the sun visor for the it.
side window, remove the support rod
from the clip, and swing it out. The light comes on when you pull up
the cover.
In this position, the sun visor can be
adjusted by moving it on its slider. The light will not come on if the sun
Do not use the extended sun visor visor is slid outward.
over the inside mirror.
117

０６／０４／２８１４：２７：３０３１ＳＪＣ６１００１２３
Interior Lights
Interior Light Control Switch When the switch is in the door position: When the switch is in the OFF position:
DOOR POSITION ON The individual map lights and the None of the lights come on when a
rear console light come on when door is opened.
any door is opened, or when the
remote transmitter or the key is The map lights in the front can be
used to unlock the doors. When turned on and off by pushing each
the doors are closed, each lens. The rear map lights cannot
individual map light can be turned be used.
on and off by pushing the lens.
The lights fade out about 30

OFF seconds after all the doors are
closed.
When the interior light control switch is
in the ON position: With any door left open and the
key is removed from the ignition
All the individual map lights and switch, the lights stay on about 3
the rear console light come on and minutes, then go out.
stay on as long as the switch
remains in the ON position.
118

０６／０４／２８１４：２７：３８３１ＳＪＣ６１００１２４
Interior Lights
Individual Map Lights Individual Interior Lights Courtesy Light

Turn on a front individual map light The courtesy light in each door
by pushing the lens. Push the lens comes on when you open that door.
again to turn it off. With the interior The light around the ignition switch
light control switch in the door only comes on when you open the
position, a rear map light can be driver’s door. After you close the

turned on by pushing the lens. Push door, the ignition switch light fades
the lens again to turn it off. out in about 30 seconds.
The map lights stay on when the The courtesy light in the back of the
interior light control switch is in the center console comes on when you
door position and the map light open any door with the interior light
switch is on. control switch in the door position.
After you close the doors, the light
fades out. If equipped
The courtesy light between the front
map lights comes on when you turn
the parking lights on. To adjust its
brightness, turn the instrument
panel brightness control dial on the
dashboard (see page 78 ).
119

０６／０４／２８１４：２７：４４３１ＳＪＣ６１００１２５
Bed Lights
If you turn the ignition switch to

ACCESSORY (I) or LOCK (0)
without turning off the bed lights,
the lights and the indicator will
remain on, then go off after 20
minutes (see page 69 ).
BED LIGHT SWITCH
Your vehicle has bed lights in the To turn off the lights, push the light
pickup bed: a light on each front switch again, or close the tailgate
upper and rear bottom side. With the and the In-Bed Trunk.
shift lever in the Park position, the
bed lights come on when you push When you move the shift lever out of
the bed light switch on the the Park position, the bed lights go
dashboard, swing open the tailgate, off and cannot be used.
or open the In-Bed Trunk. The
indicator on the instrument panel
also comes on to remind you that the
bed lights are on.
120

０６／０４／２８１４：２７：４９３１ＳＪＣ６１００１２６
Features
The heating and air conditioning Vents, Heating, and A/C .............. 122
system in your vehicle provides a Using the Heater ....................... 126
comfortable driving environment in Using the A/C ............................ 126
all weather conditions. Using Automatic Climate
Control .................................... 128
The standard audio system has Rear Ventilation ......................... 129
many features. This section Dual Temperature Control ........... 130
describes those features and how to Climate Control Sensors ............... 132
Features
use them. (If you have an optional Playing the AM/FM Radio ........... 133
audio system, refer to the operating AM/FM Radio Reception ............. 140
instructions that came with it.) Playing the XM Satellite Radio .. 142
Playing a CD, CD Changer ........... 148
Your vehicle has an anti-theft audio Protecting Your CDs ..................... 159
system that requires a code number CD Player/Changer Error
to enable it. Messages .................................... 160
Remote Audio Controls................. 161
On all models except RT, RTX, and Playing an Optional Audio Unit.... 161
Canadian LX Radio Theft Protection.................. 162
The security system helps to Setting the Clock ........................... 163
discourage vandalism and theft of Security System ............................. 164
your vehicle. Cruise Control ................................ 165
Compass.......................................... 168
HomeLink Universal
Transceiver................................. 171
Tire Pressure Monitoring
System (TPMS)-Required
Federal Explanation .............. 175
121

０６／０４／２８１４：２７：５６３１ＳＪＣ６１００１２７
Vents, Heating, and A/C
RT, RTX, and FAN CONTROL DIAL MAX A/C BUTTON

Canadian LX models AIR CONDITIONING TEMPERATURE
BUTTON MODE BUTTONS CONTROL DIAL
RECIRCULATION WINDSHIELD DEFROST MODE BUTTONS

BUTTON BUTTON
RTS, RTL, and AIR CONDITIONING FAN CONTROL BUTTONS PASSENGER’S SIDE
Canadian EXL models AUTO BUTTON BUTTON TEMPERATURE
MODE CONTROL DIAL
BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL
DUAL BUTTON
OFF BUTTON WINDSHIELD DEFROST BUTTON
DRIVER’S SIDE
RECIRCULATION BUTTON TEMPERATURE PASSENGER’S SIDE
DISPLAY TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
122

０６／０４／２８１４：２８：０７３１ＳＪＣ６１００１２８
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL Temperature Control Dual Button

models, see pages 128 and 129 for On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
information on automatic climate Turning this dial clockwise increases models
control and semi-automatic operation. the temperature of the airflow. Press the DUAL button to select
dual temperature control mode (see
Fan Control On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL page 130 ).
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models models
Turn the dial clockwise to increase The driver and passenger can select You can set the temperatures for the
Features
the fan speed and airflow. Turn the independent temperature settings. driver’s side and the passenger’s side
dial counterclockwise to decrease it. separately when this button is
Push the DUAL button. When the pressed (indicator on). When the
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL indicator in the button is on, turn the indicator in the DUAL button is off,
models dials to adjust the temperature. you can adjust both sides to the
Select the fan speed by pressing the same temperature with the driver’s
fan control buttons ( or ). When the indicator in the DUAL side temperature control dial.
The fan speed is shown in vertical button is off, both sides adjust to the
bars on the display. driver’s side temperature.
CONTINUED
123

０６／０４／２８１４：２８：１９３１ＳＪＣ６１００１２９
Air Conditioning (A/C) Button Recirculation Button Mode Control

Press the A/C button to turn the air When the recirculation indicator is Use the mode control buttons to
conditioning on and off. You will see on, air from the vehicle’s interior is select the vents air flows from. Some
A/C ON or A/C OFF in the display. sent throughout the system again. air will flow from the dashboard
When the indicator is off, air is corner vents in all modes.
When you turn the A/C off, the brought in from the outside of the
system cannot regulate the inside vehicle (fresh air mode). Each time you press the MODE
temperature if you set the button (On RTS, RTL, and Canadian
temperature control below the The outside air intakes for the EXL models) or either mode button
outside temperature. heating and cooling system are at (On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX
the base of the windshield. Keep this models), the display shows the mode
area clear of leaves and other debris. selected.
The system should be left in fresh Air flows from the center,
air mode under almost all conditions. corner, and rear vents in the
Keeping the system in recirculation dashboard.
mode, particularly with the A/C off,
can cause the windows to fog up. Airflow is divided between
the vents in the dashboard, rear and
Switch to recirculation mode when the floor vents.
driving through dusty or smoky
conditions, then return to fresh air Air flows from the floor
mode. vents.
124

０６／０４／２８１４：２８：３１３１ＳＪＣ６１００１３０
Airflow is divided between MAX A/C Button Ventilation

the floor vents and the defroster On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models The flow-through ventilation system
vents at the base of the windshield. The system automatically draws in outside air, circulates it
turns on the A/C and switches to through the interior, then exhausts it
Press the button, Air flows recirculation mode. Air flows from through vents near the back window.
from the defroster vents at the base the center, side, and rear vents in the
of the windshield. dashboard. Pressing the or 1. Set the temperature to the lower
A/C button cancels MAX A/C. limit.
Features
On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models 2. Make sure the A/C is off.
When you select or , 3. Select and fresh air mode.
the system automatically switches to 4. Set the fan to the desired speed.
fresh air mode and turns on the A/C.
When you select , the system

automatically switches to fresh air
mode.
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL

models
When you select , the system
automatically switches to fresh air
mode and turns on the A/C.
125

０６／０４／２８１４：２８：４２３１ＳＪＣ６１００１３１
Using the Heater Using the A/C If the interior is very warm, you can
The heater uses engine coolant to Air conditioning places an extra load cool it down more rapidly by partially
warm the air. If the engine is cold, it on the engine. Watch the engine opening the windows, turning on the
will be several minutes before you coolant temperature gauge (see page A/C, and setting the fan to
feel warm air coming from the 72 ). If it moves near the red zone, maximum speed in fresh air mode.
system. turn off the A/C until the gauge
reading returns to normal. On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
1. Select . To cool the interior with MAX A/C:
When you select , the system 1. Turn on the A/C by pressing the 1. Set the fan to the desired speed.
automatically switches to the fresh button. The display shows A/C 2. Select MAX A/C mode.
air mode. ON on when a fan speed is The system automatically turns on
2. Set the fan to the desired speed. selected. the A/C, selects , and
3. Adjust the warmth of the air with 2. Make sure the temperature is set switches to recirculation mode.
the temperature control dial. to maximum cool. 3. Make sure the temperature is set
3. Select . to maximum cool.
4. If the outside air is humid, select
recirculation mode. If the outside
air is dry, select fresh air mode.
5. Set the fan to the desired speed.
126

０６／０４／２８１４：２８：５１３１ＳＪＣ６１００１３２
Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost Automatic Heated Wiper Zone
Air conditioning, as it cools, removes To remove fog from the inside of the Your vehicle has heating wires at the
moisture from the air. When used in windows: bottom of the windshield to help
combination with the heater, it heat the wiper blades and the
makes the interior warm and dry. 1. Set the fan to the desired speed or windshield. If the outside
high for faster defrosting. temperature is near freezing, the
1. Turn the fan on. 2. Select . When you select heater turns on automatically when
2. Press the A/C button. , the system automatically you turn the ignition switch to the
Features
3. Select and fresh air mode. switches to fresh air mode and ON (II) position. The heater turns
4. Adjust the temperature to your turns on the A/C. The A/C off automatically when the outside
preference. indicator will not be displayed if it temperature is above freezing.
was off to start with.
This setting is suitable for all driving 3. Adjust the temperature so the This function helps to increase wiper
conditions whenever the outside airflow feels warm. performance when the wiper arms
temperature is above 32°F (0°C). 4. To increase airflow to the sit in the parked position in snowy or
windshield, close the side vents. icy conditions.
When you switch to another mode

from , the A/C stays on.
Press the A/C button to turn it off.
127

０６／０４／２８１４：２９：０２３１ＳＪＣ６１００１３３
To Remove Exterior Frost or Ice Using Automatic Climate Control The system automatically selects the
From the Windows On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL proper mix of conditioned and/or
1. Select . The system models heated air that will, as quickly as
automatically switches to fresh air The automatic climate control possible, raise or lower the interior
mode and turns on the A/C. The system adjusts the fan speed and temperature to your preference.
A/C indicator does not come on if airflow levels to maintain the interior
it was off to start with. temperature you select. When you set the temperature to its
2. Select . lower limit ( ) or its upper limit
3. Set the fan and temperature Press the AUTO button. ( ), the system runs at full
controls to maximum level. Set the desired temperature by cooling or heating only. It does not
turning the temperature control regulate the interior temperature.
To clear the windows faster, you can dial. You will see AUTO in the
close the dashboard corner vents by system’s display. In cold weather, the fan will not
rotating the wheel next to come on automatically until the
(passenger’s side) or below it heater starts to develop warm air.
(driver’s side). This will send more
warm air to the windshield defroster Dual Temperature Control − When
vents. Once the windshield is clear, the indicator in the DUAL button is
select fresh air mode to avoid on, the driver’s side and passenger’s
fogging the windows. side temperature can be controlled
independently (see page 130 ).
For your safety, make sure you have
a clear view through all the windows
before driving.
128

０６／０４／２８１４：２９：１２３１ＳＪＣ６１００１３４
Semi-automatic Operation To Turn Everything Off Rear Ventilation

On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL On RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models
models Turning the fan speed control dial all DIAL
You can manually select various the way to the left shuts the system
functions of the climate control off.
system when it is in full automatic
mode. All other features remain On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL
automatically controlled. models
Features
If you press OFF, the climate control
Making any manual selection causes system shuts off.
the word AUTO in the display to go
out. −Keep the system off for short
periods only. TAB
−To keep stale air and mustiness You can adjust the direction of the
from collecting, you should have air coming from the rear vents in the
the fan running at all times. back of the center console by
moving the tab in the center of each
vent up-and-down and side-to-side.
You can also adjust the amount of

airflow by turning the dial between
the vents.
129

０６／０４／２８１４：２９：１８３１ＳＪＣ６１００１３５
Dual Temperature Control

models
Your vehicle has two temperature
control dials, one for the driver, and
one for the front passenger.
DRIVER’S SIDE DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
The driver’s side and passenger’s TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE TEMPERATURE
CONTROL DIAL DISPLAY CONTROL DIAL
side can be controlled independently
by adjusting these dials when the
green indicator in the DUAL button
is on.
Temperature Control Dials

Push AUTO or to turn on the
system. The selected temperatures
appear in the display. When the
indicator in the DUAL button is off,
you can adjust both sides to the DUAL BUTTON
same temperature by adjusting the
driver’s side temperature control dial. PASSENGER’S SIDE
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
U.S. model is shown
130

０６／０４／２８１４：２９：２３３１ＳＪＣ６１００１３６
Dual Temperature Control
To set the driver’s side temperature

differently than the passenger’s,
press the DUAL button, then turn
the driver’s control dial. To set the DRIVER’S SIDE PASSENGER’S SIDE
passenger’s side differently than the
driver’s, turn the passenger’s control
dial. You can adjust the passenger’s
side without pressing the DUAL
Features
button first.
When you set the temperature to its

lower or upper limit, it is displayed as
or .
131

０６／０４／２８１４：２９：２８３１ＳＪＣ６１００１３７
Climate Control Sensors
Sunlight and Temperature

Sensors
models
SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
The climate control system has two

sensors. A sunlight sensor is in the
top of the dashboard, and a
temperature sensor is under the
steering column. Do not cover the
sensors or spill any liquid on them.
132

０６／０４／２８１４：２９：３６３１ＳＪＣ６１００１３８
Playing the AM/FM Radio
U.S. RT and RTX models U.S. RTS model
AUTO SELECT BUTTON SOUND BUTTON

SOUND BUTTON POWER BUTTON
POWER BUTTON
VOLUME STEREO INDICATOR
VOLUME STEREO INDICATOR KNOB
Features
KNOB
AM/FM AM/FM
BUTTON BUTTON
SCAN AUTO SELECT

SCAN BUTTON BUTTON
BUTTON TUNE BAR
PRESET BARS SEEK/SKIP BAR PRESET BARS TUNE BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
CONTINUED
133

０６／０４／２８１４：２９：４２３１ＳＪＣ６１００１３９
Canadian LX model Canadian EXL model without navigation system
AUTO SELECT BUTTON SOUND BUTTON

SOUND BUTTON POWER BUTTON
POWER BUTTON
VOLUME STEREO INDICATOR KNOB
KNOB
FM
FM BUTTON BUTTON
AM BUTTON AM
BUTTON
SCAN AUTO SELECT

SCAN BUTTON BUTTON
BUTTON TUNE BAR
PRESET BARS SEEK/SKIP BAR PRESET BARS TUNE BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR
134

０６／０４／２８１４：２９：５０３１ＳＪＣ６１００１４０
U.S. RTL model without navigation system U.S. RTL model with navigation system
POWER BUTTON STEREO INDICATOR
SOUND BUTTON VOLUME KNOB
AM/FM BUTTON AUTO SELECT BUTTON
POWER BUTTON
Features
KNOB
SEEK/SKIP BAR SCAN BUTTON

SOUND BUTTON PRESET BARS TUNE BAR
AM/FM Canadian EXL model with navigation system

BUTTON POWER BUTTON
VOLUME KNOB STEREO INDICATOR
FM BUTTON AUTO SELECT
AM BUTTON BUTTON
SCAN AUTO SELECT

BUTTON BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR PRESET BARS TUNE BAR
SEEK/SKIP BAR SCAN BUTTON

SOUND BUTTON PRESET BARS TUNE BAR
135

０６／０４／２８１４：３０：０１３１ＳＪＣ６１００１４１
To Play the AM/FM Radio To Select a Station with a strong signal. When it finds
The ignition switch must be in the You can use any of five methods to one, it will stop and play that station
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position. find radio stations on the selected for about 10 seconds.
Turn the system on by pushing the band: TUNE, SEEK, SCAN, the If you do nothing, the system will
PWR button or the AM/FM button preset bars, and AUTO SELECT. scan for the next strong station and
(AM or FM button on Canadian play it for 10 seconds. When it plays
models). Adjust the volume by TUNE − Use the TUNE bar to tune a station that you want to listen to,
turning the volume knob. the radio to a desired frequency. press the SCAN button again.
Press the side of the bar to tune
On vehicles with navigation system to a higher frequency, and press the PRESET − Each side of the bars
Pushing the AUDIO button will also side to tune to a lower (1−6) can store one station on AM,
turn on the system (see page 138 ). frequency. and two stations on FM.
1. Select the desired band, AM or
The band and frequency that the SEEK − The SEEK function FM. FM1 and FM2 let you store
radio was last tuned to is displayed. searches up and down from the twelve stations.
To change bands, press the AM/FM current frequency to find a station
button (AM or FM button). On the with a strong signal. To activate it, 2. Use the tune, seek, or scan
FM band, ST will be displayed if the press the or side of the function to tune the radio to a
station is broadcasting in stereo. bar, then release it. desired station.
Stereo reproduction in AM is not
available. SCAN − The scan function samples 3. Pick a preset number (1−6), and
all stations with strong signals on the hold it until you hear a beep.
selected band. To activate it, press
the SCAN button, then release it. 4. Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store a
You will see SCAN in the display. total of six stations on AM and
The system will scan for a station twelve stations on FM.
136

０６／０４／２８１４：３０：１２３１ＳＪＣ６１００１４２
AUTO SELECT − If you are If you do not like the stations auto Each mode is shown in the display as
traveling far from home and can no select has stored, you can store it changes. Turn the VOLUME knob
longer receive your preset stations, other frequencies on the preset bars to adjust the setting to your liking.
you can use the auto select feature to as previously described. When the level reaches the center,
find stations in the local area. you will see ‘‘ ’’ in the display.
To turn off auto select, press the The system will automatically return
Press the A. SEL button. ‘‘A.SEL’’ A. SEL button. This restores the the display to the selected audio
flashes in the display, and the system presets you originally set. mode about 5 seconds after you stop
Features
goes into scan mode for several adjusting a mode.
seconds. It stores the frequencies of Adjusting the Sound
six AM, and twelve FM stations in Press the SOUND button repeatedly If equipped
the preset bars. to display the SUBWOOFER (if SUBWOOFER − Adjusts the
equipped), BASS, TREBLE, FADER, strength of sound from the
You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed after and BALANCE settings. subwoofer speaker.
pressing a preset bar if auto select
cannot find a strong station for every BASS − Adjusts the bass.
preset bar.
TREBLE − Adjusts the treble.
FADER − Adjusts the front-to-back

strength of the sound.
BALANCE − Adjusts the side-to-

side strength of the sound.
137

０６／０４／２８１４：３０：２１３１ＳＪＣ６１００１４３
Operating the Radio on the While you are listening to the radio, Adjusting the Sound
Navigation System Screen you can change to another band by
pressing the AUDIO button next to AUDIO BUTTON
the navigation system screen, and
then touching the desired band icon
(FM1, FM2, or AM).
AUTO SELECT, SCAN, and SOUND

are adjustable from the navigation
screen. For an explanation of these
functions, see pages 136 and 137 .
AUTO SELECT − Touch the

A.SEL icon to activate the auto select
function. You will see A.SEL flashing To adjust the sound, push the
On vehicles with navigation system on the display. AUDIO button, then enter the sound
In addition to the knobs, buttons, and grid by touching the SOUND icon on
bars on the radio control panel, you SCAN − Touch the SCAN icon to the display.
can operate some of the radio activate the scan function. You will
controls on the navigation system see SCAN in the display. Touch the
screen. icon again to deactivate it.
138

０６／０４／２８１４：３０：２７３１ＳＪＣ６１００１４４
Left/Right Balance and Front/ Audio System Lighting

Rear Fader − These modes adjust You can use the instrument panel
the strength of the sound coming brightness control dial to adjust the
from each speaker. Left/Right illumination of the audio system (see
balance adjusts the side-to-side page 78 ). The audio system
strength, while Front/Rear fader illuminates when the parking lights
adjusts the front-to-back strength. are on, even if the radio is off.
To adjust the left/right balance,
Features
touch the ‘‘L’’ or ‘‘R’’ icon. To adjust
the front/rear fader, touch the ‘‘FR’’
or ‘‘RR’’ icon.
To see the audio display when you

Treble/Bass − To adjust the treble are finished adjusting the sound,
and bass, touch ＋ or − on each wait 5 seconds.
side of the treble or bass adjustment
bar. The adjustment bar shows you
the current setting.
139

０６／０４／２８１４：３０：３５３１ＳＪＣ６１００１４５
AM/FM Radio Reception
Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

The radio can receive the complete How well the radio receives stations
AM and FM bands. is dependent on many factors, such
Those bands cover these frequen- as the distance from the station’s
cies: transmitter, nearby large objects,
atmospheric conditions, and even
AM band: 530 to 1,710 kHz items stored on the roof rack.
FM band: 87.7 to 107.9 MHz
A radio station’s signal gets weaker
Radio stations on the AM band are as you get farther away from its
assigned frequencies at least 10 kHz transmitter. If you are listening to an
apart (530, 540, 550). Stations on the AM station, you will notice the sound
FM band are assigned frequencies at volume becoming weaker, and the
least 0.2 MHz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3). station drifting in and out. If you are Driving very near the transmitter of
listening to an FM station, you will a station that is broadcasting on a
Stations must use these exact see the stereo indicator flickering off frequency close to the frequency of
frequencies. It is fairly common for and on as the signal weakens. the station you are listening to can
stations to round-off the frequency in Eventually, the stereo indicator will also affect your radio’s reception.
their advertising, so your radio could go off and the sound will fade You may temporarily hear both
display a frequency of 100.9 even completely as you get out of range of stations, or hear only the station you
though the announcer may identify the station’s signal. are close to.
the station as ‘‘FM101.’’
140

０６／０４／２８１４：３０：４１３１ＳＪＣ６１００１４６
AM/FM Radio Reception
As required by the FCC:

Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the party responsible for
compliance could void the user’s
Features
Radio signals, especially on the FM Radio reception can be affected by
band, are deflected by large objects atmospheric conditions such as
such as buildings and hills. Your thunderstorms, high humidity, and
radio then receives both the direct even sunspots. You may be able to
signal from the station’s transmitter, receive a distant radio station one
and the deflected signal. This causes day and not receive it the next day
the sound to distort or flutter. This is because of a change in conditions.
a main cause of poor radio reception
in city driving. Electrical interference from passing
vehicles and stationary sources can
cause temporary reception problems.
141

０６／０４／２８１４：３０：４７３１ＳＪＣ６１００１４７
Playing the XM Satellite Radio
POWER BUTTON XM RADIO BUTTON
VOLUME DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON POWER BUTTON XM RADIO BUTTON

KNOB
VOLUME DISPLAY/MODE BUTTON
KNOB
SCAN
BUTTON
PRESET BARS
SCAN BUTTON CATEGORY BAR TUNE BAR
PRESET BARS
CATEGORY BAR TUNE BAR
142

０６／０４／２８１４：３０：５８３１ＳＪＣ６１００１４８
U.S. RTL model only system, and press the ‘‘XM’’ button.
Your audio system is capable of Adjust the volume by turning the
receiving XM Satellite Radio volume knob. The last channel you
anywhere in the United States, listened to will show in the display.
except Hawaii and Alaska.
You can also change to the XM radio
XM is a registered trademark of while you are listening to an FM
XM Satellite Radio, Inc. station, AM station, CD, etc., by
Features
touching the XM1 or XM2 icon on
XM radio receives signals from two the audio display (navigation system
satellites to produce clear, high- screen).
On vehicles with navigation system
quality digital reception. It offers
many channels in several categories. MODE − To switch between
Along with a large selection of channel mode and category mode, On the audio display, you will see the
different types of music, XM radio press and hold the DISP/MODE selected CHANNEL (number),
allows you to view channel and button until the mode changes. CATEGORY, NAME (artist name),
category selections in the display. In channel mode, you can select all and TITLE (music title).
The navigation system screen also of the available channels. In category
shows all XM information when the mode, such as Jazz, Rock, Classical, You may experience periods when
AUDIO button is pressed. etc., you can select all of the XM Radio does not transmit the
channels within that category. artist’s name and song title
Operating the XM Radio Each time you press and release the information. If this happens, there is
To listen to XM radio, turn the DISP/MODE button, the display nothing wrong with your system.
ignition switch to the ACCESSORY changes in the following sequence:
(I) or ON (II) position. Push the Channel name, channel number,
PWR button to turn on the audio category, artist name, and music title. CONTINUED
143

０６／０４／２８１４：３１：０８３１ＳＪＣ６１００１４９
TUNE − Press the TUNE bar to Preset − You can store up to 12 3. Pick a preset number (icon) you
change channel selections. Press preset channels using each side of want for that channel. Press and
for higher numbered channels the preset bar or preset icons on the hold the bar (icon) until you hear a
and for lower numbered screen. Each side of the bar stores beep.
channels. In the category mode, you one channel from the XM1 band and
can only select channels within that one channel from the XM2 band. 4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store the
category. first six channels.
To store a channel:
SEEK/SKIP (CATEGORY) − 5. Press the XM button again or
Press either side of the CATEGORY 1. Press the XM button. Either XM1 touch the other XM icon (XM1 or
bar ( or ) to select another or XM2 will show in the display. XM2) on the audio display. Store
category. the next six channels using steps 2
2. Use the tune, seek, or scan and 3.
SCAN − The scan function gives function to tune to a desired
you a sampling of all channels while channel. Once a channel is stored, press and
in the channel mode. In the category release the proper side of the preset
mode, only the channels within that In category mode, only channels bar (icon) to tune to it.
category are scanned. To activate within that category can be selected.
scan, press the SCAN button or In channel mode, all channels can be
touch the SCAN icon on the screen. selected.
The system plays each channel in
numerical order for a few seconds,
then selects the next channel. When
you hear a channel you want to listen
to, press the button or touch the icon
again.
144

０６／０４／２８１４：３１：１５３１ＳＪＣ６１００１５０
XM Radio Display Messages ‘‘NO SIGNAL’’ − The signal is

currently too
‘‘LOADING’’ − XM is loading the weak. Move the
audio or program vehicle to an area
information. away from tall
buildings, and
‘‘OFF AIR’’ − The channel with an
currently selected is unobstructed view
Features
no longer of the southern
broadcasting. horizon.
‘‘UPDATING’’ − The encryption ‘‘ - - - - ’’ − The selected channel

code is being number does not exist or
updated. Wait is not part of your
until the subscription, or this
encryption code is channel has no artist or
fully updated. title information at this
Channels 0 and 1 time.
should still work
normally. ‘‘ANTENNA’’ − There is a problem
with the XM
antenna. Please
consult your dealer.
CONTINUED
145

０６／０４／２８１４：３１：１９３１ＳＪＣ６１００１５１
The XM satellites are in orbit over

Signal may be blocked by Signal weaker in the equator; therefore, objects south
mountains or large obstacles to these areas. of the vehicle may cause satellite
the south. reception interruptions. To help
compensate for this, ground-based
repeaters are placed in major
metropolitan areas.
Satellite signals are more likely to be

blocked by tall buildings and
mountains the farther north you
travel from the equator. Carrying
large items on a roof rack can also
block the signal.
SATELLITE
GROUND
REPEATER
146

０６／０４／２８１４：３１：３０３１ＳＪＣ６１００１５２
Depending on where you drive, you As required by the FCC: bar until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.
may experience reception problems. Changes or modifications not expressly Your I.D. will appear in the display.
Interference can be caused by any of approved by the party responsible for
these conditions: compliance could void the user’s After you’ve registered with XM
authority to operate the equipment. Radio, keep your audio system in the
Driving on the north side of an satellite radio mode while you wait
east/west mountain road. Receiving Satellite Radio Service for activation. This should take about
Driving on the north side of a If your XM Radio service has expired 30 minutes.
Features
large commercial truck on an or you purchased your vehicle from
east/west road. a previous owner, you can listen to a While waiting for activation, make
Driving in tunnels. sampling of the broadcasts available sure your vehicle remains in an open
Driving on a road beside a vertical on XM Satellite Radio. With the area with good reception. Once your
wall, steep cliff, or hill to the south ignition switch in the ACCESSORY audio system is activated, you’ll be
of you. (I) or ON (II) position, push the able to listen to XM radio broadcasts.
Driving on the lower level of a PWR button to turn on the audio XM Radio will continue to send an
multi-tiered road. system and press the XM RADIO activation signal to your vehicle for
Driving on a single lane road button. A variety of music types and at least 12 hours from the activation
alongside dense trees taller than styles will play. request. If the service has not been
50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you. activated after 36 hours, contact XM
Large items carried on a roof rack. If you decide to purchase XM Radio.
Satellite Radio service, contact XM
There may be other geographic Radio at www.xmradio.com, or at
situations that could affect XM radio 1-800-852-9696. You will need to give
reception. them your radio I.D. number and
your credit card number. To get your
radio I.D. number, press the TUNE
147

０６／０４／２８１４：３１：３７３１ＳＪＣ６１００１５３
Playing a CD, CD Changer
U.S. RT and RTX models U.S. RTS model
LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR

CD SLOT EJECT BUTTON
CD BUTTON CD SLOT EJECT BUTTON
CD BUTTON
AM/FM AM/FM
BUTTON BUTTON
SCAN
SCAN RANDOM BUTTON RANDOM
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
PRESET BARS SEEK/SKIP BAR PRESET BARS
SEEK/SKIP BAR
REPEAT REPEAT
BUTTON BUTTON
148

０６／０４／２８１４：３１：４４３１ＳＪＣ６１００１５４
Canadian LX model Canadian EXL model without navigation system
AM BUTTON LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR

EJECT BUTTON
FM BUTTON CD SLOT AM BUTTON CD SLOT EJECT BUTTON
CD BUTTON
FM CD BUTTON
Features
BUTTON
SCAN
SCAN RANDOM BUTTON RANDOM
BUTTON BUTTON BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR PRESET BARS PRESET BARS
SEEK/SKIP BAR
REPEAT REPEAT
BUTTON BUTTON
CONTINUED
149

０６／０４／２８１４：３１：５２３１ＳＪＣ６１００１５５
AM/FM BUTTON
LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR CD BUTTON RANDOM BUTTON
CD SLOT
CD BUTTON
EJECT BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
PRESET BARS
SEEK/SKIP BAR REPEAT BUTTON
AM/FM
Canadian EXL model with navigation system
BUTTON
FM BUTTON CD BUTTON
AM RANDOM BUTTON
BUTTON
SCAN RANDOM BUTTON

BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR PRESET BARS REPEAT BUTTON
SCAN BUTTON
SEEK/SKIP BAR PRESET BARS REPEAT BUTTON
150

０６／０４／２８１４：３２：０１３１ＳＪＣ６１００１５６
CD Player To Change Tracks SCAN − The SCAN function

RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models Push the side of the SEEK/ samples all the tracks on the
With the ignition in the SKIP bar to play the next track on selected disc in the order they are
ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II) position, the disc. Push the side once to recorded. To activate it, press and
insert a CD about halfway into the replay the track in play; press it twice release the SCAN button. You will
CD slot. The drive will pull the CD in to replay the previous track. see SCAN in the display, and you will
the rest of the way and begin to play To move rapidly within a track, press get a 10 second sampling of each
it. You operate the CD player with and hold the or the side track on the selected CD. Press the
Features
the same controls used for the radio. of the bar. SCAN button again to get out of scan
The number of the track playing is mode.
shown in the display. The system will REPEAT − Press the RPT button
continuously play a CD until you to continuously replay a track. You
change modes. will see RPT in the display. Press the
RPT button again to turn it off.
RANDOM − Press the RDM

Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. button to play the tracks in random
The label can curl up and cause the CD order. You will see RDM in the
to jam in the unit. display. Press the RDM button again
to return to normal play.
You can also play 3-inch (8-cm) discs
without using an adapter ring.
151

０６／０４／２８１４：３２：１１３１ＳＪＣ６１００１５７
To Stop Playing a CD Operating the Optional CD To select the CD changer, press the
Press the eject button ( ) to Changer AUX button. The disc and track
remove the CD. If you eject the CD, RT, RTX, and Canadian LX models numbers will be displayed. To select
but do not remove it from the slot, An optional six disc CD changer is a different disc, use the preset 5
the system will automatically reload available for your vehicle from your (DISC −) side for a previous disc or
the CD after 10 seconds and put it in dealer. the preset 6 (DISC ＋) side to select
pause mode. To begin playing, press the next disc in sequence.
the CD button. This disc changer uses the same
controls used for the in-dash CD If you select an empty slot in the
Press the AM/FM button (AM or player/changer and the radio. magazine, the changer will search
FM button) to switch to the radio for the next available CD to load and
while a CD is playing. Press the CD Load the desired CDs into the play.
button to play the CD. magazine, and load the magazine
into the changer according to the Protecting Discs
If you turn the system off while a CD instructions that came with the unit. For information on how to handle
is playing, either with the PWR and protect discs, see page 159 .
button or by turning off the ignition,
the CD stays in the drive. When you
turn the system back on, the CD
begins playing where it left off.
152

０６／０４／２８１４：３２：２１３１ＳＪＣ６１００１５８
Operating the CD Changer Be careful not to injure your fingers Loading CDs in the In-dash CD
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL when opening or closing the Changer
models navigation system screen. On vehicles with navigation system
Your audio system has an in-dash
CD changer that holds up to six CDs, OPEN BUTTON LOAD BUTTON LOAD INDICATOR
providing several hours of
continuous entertainment. You
operate this CD changer with the
Features
same controls used for the radio.
To load CDs or operate the CD
changer, the ignition switch must be
in the ACCESSORY (I) or ON (II)
position.
CD SLOT
Do not use CDs with adhesive labels. To return the screen to the upright 1. Press and hold the LOAD button
The label can curl up and cause the CD position, press the OPEN button next to the CD slot until the load
to jam in the unit. again. Do not use the folded screen indicator above the slot turns from
as a tray. If you put a cup, for amber to green.
On vehicles with navigation system example, on the screen, the liquid
The CD changer is behind the inside the cup may spill on the To load only one CD, press and
navigation system screen. To use the screen when you go over a bump. release the LOAD button.
CD changer, press the OPEN button
beside the screen. The screen folds
back, and the CD changer appears. CONTINUED
153

０６／０４／２８１４：３２：３１３１ＳＪＣ６１００１５９
2. The indicators above the disc 5. Repeat this until all six positions On vehicles without navigation system
buttons of the empty positions will are loaded. The system will then 1. Press and hold the LOAD button
blink, and the green load indicator begin playing the first CD loaded. until you hear a beep and see
above the CD slot comes on. ‘‘LOAD’’ in the display, then
If you stop loading CDs before all six release the button.
3. Insert a CD into the CD slot. positions are filled, the system will
Insert it only about halfway; the wait for 10 seconds, then stop the To load only one CD, press and
drive will pull it in the rest of the load operation and begin playing the release the LOAD button.
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the last CD loaded.
display. The CD load indicator 2. On the upper right side of the
turns amber and blinks as the CD If you press the LOAD button while display, the disc number for an
is loaded. a CD is playing, the system will stop empty position will begin blinking,
playing that CD and start the loading and the green CD load indicator
You cannot load and play 3-inch sequence. It will then play the CD will come on.
(8-cm) discs in this system. just loaded.
4. When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again in You can also load a CD into an empty
the display, insert the next CD into position while a CD is playing by
the CD slot. pressing the appropriate disc button.
Select an empty disc button (the
Do not try to insert a disc until indicator above the button is off),
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could and press the button. The system
damage the audio unit. will stop playing the current CD and
start the loading sequence. It will
then play the CD just loaded.
154

０６／０４／２８１４：３２：４０３１ＳＪＣ６１００１６０
3. Insert a CD into the CD slot. If you are not loading CDs into all six To select a different disc, press the
Insert it only about halfway; the positions, press the LOAD button appropriate side of a preset bar
drive will pull it in the rest of the again after the last CD has loaded. (1−6). On models with navigation
way. You will see ‘‘BUSY’’ in the The system will begin playing the system, touch the appropriate disc
display. The CD load indicator last CD loaded. icon. If you select an empty position
turns red and blinks as the CD is in the CD changer, the system will
loaded. If you stop loading CDs before all six go into the loading sequence.
positions are filled, the system will
Features
You cannot load and play 3-inch wait for 10 seconds, then stop the
(8-cm) discs in this system. load operation and begin playing the
last CD loaded.
4. When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears again in
the display, insert the next CD into To Play a CD
the CD slot. Select the CD changer by pressing
the CD button. You will see ‘‘CD’’ in
Do not try to insert a disc until the display. The system will begin
‘‘LOAD’’ appears. You could playing the last selected disc in the
damage the audio unit. CD changer. You will see the disc
and track numbers displayed.
5. Repeat this until all six positions
are loaded. The system will then When that CD ends, the next CD in
begin playing the last CD loaded. the CD changer is loaded and played.
After the last CD finishes, the
system returns to the first CD.
155

０６／０４／２８１４：３２：４８３１ＳＪＣ６１００１６１
To Change or Select Tracks Track Scan Disc Scan

Each time you press and release the When you press the SCAN button or On vehicles with navigation system
side of the TUNE bar, the touch the TRACK SCAN icon on the When you press the SCAN button, or
system skips forward to the screen, the first track of the current when you touch the DISC SCAN
beginning of the next track. Press disc plays for about 10 seconds. You icon on the screen, the first track of
and release the side to skip will see SCAN in the screen and in the current CD plays for about 10
backward to the beginning of the the display. To hear the rest of the seconds. You will see D-SCAN in the
current track. Press it again to skip track, press the SCAN button or display and DISC SCAN in the
to the beginning of the previous touch the TRACK SCAN icon again screen. To hear the rest of the CD,
track. within 10 seconds. If you don’t, the press the SCAN button or touch the
system advances to the next track, DISC SCAN icon again, within 10
To move rapidly within a track, press plays about 10 seconds of it, and seconds. If you don’t, the system
and hold the or side of the continues through the rest of the advances to the next disc, plays
TUNE bar. tracks the same way. When the about 10 seconds of it, and continues
system reaches the last track, throughout the rest of the CDs the
TRACK SCAN is cancelled, and the same way. When the system reaches
CD plays normally. the last disc, DISC SCAN is
cancelled, and the CD plays normally.
156

０６／０４／２８１４：３２：５６３１ＳＪＣ６１００１６２
Track Repeat Random Play within a Disc On vehicles with navigation system
When you press and release the RPT When you press the RDM button or Operation of DISC SCAN and DISC
button or touch the TRACK touch the TRACK RANDOM icon on REPEAT on the screen is possible
REPEAT icon on the screen, the the screen, the system plays the only when the screen is in the
system continuously replays the tracks of the current disc in random upright position.
current track. As a reminder, you order. You will see RDM (TRACK
will see RPT (TRACK REPEAT) in RANDOM) in the display. To turn
the display. To turn this feature off, this feature off, press the RDM
Features
press the RPT button, or touch the button (touch TRACK RANDOM)
TRACK REPEAT icon again. again.
Disc Repeat
On vehicles with navigation system
When you press and hold the RPT
button until D-RPT (DISC REPEAT)
is in the display, or when you touch
the DISC REPEAT icon on the
screen, the system continuously
replays the current disc. As a
reminder, you will see D-RPT in the
display.
157

０６／０４／２８１４：３３：０４３１ＳＪＣ６１００１６３
To Stop Playing a Disc Removing CDs from the In-dash When you press the eject button
To take the system out of CD mode, CD Changer while listening to the radio, or with
press the AM/FM button (AM or To remove the disc that is currently the audio system turned off, the disc
FM button) or XM button (U.S. playing, press the eject button. You that was last selected is ejected.
models). Each time you press the will see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the display. After that disc is ejected, pressing
AM/FM button (AM or FM button), When you remove the disc from the the eject button again will eject the
the system changes to the next slot, the system begins the load next disc in numerical order. By
mode (AM, FM1, or FM2). When sequence so you can load another doing this six times, you can remove
you return to CD mode by pressing disc in that position. If you do not all the discs from the changer.
the CD button, play will continue load another CD within 10 seconds,
where it left off. the system selects the previous You can also eject discs when the
mode [AM, FM1, FM2, or XM Radio ignition switch is on or off:
If you turn the system off while a CD (U.S. models)].
is playing, either with the PWR To eject one disc, press and release
button or the ignition switch, play If you do not remove the CD from the eject button.
will continue at the same point when the slot, the system will reload the
you turn it back on. CD after 10 seconds and put the CD To eject all discs, press and hold the
changer in pause mode. To begin eject button until the LOAD
playing the CD, press the CD button. indicator begins to blink.
To remove the disc from the

changer, first select it by pressing
the appropriate preset bar or
corresponding number on the screen.
When that disc begins playing, press
the eject button.
158

０６／０４／２８１４：３３：１３３１ＳＪＣ６１００１６４
Protecting Your CDs
General Information Protecting CDs

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs, When a CD is not being played, store
use only high quality CDs labeled it in its case to protect it from dust
for audio use. and other contamination. To prevent
warpage, keep CDs out of direct
When recording a CD-R or sunlight and extreme heat.
CD-RW, the recording must be
closed for it to be used by the To clean a CD, use a clean soft cloth.
Features
system. Wipe across the CD from the center
to the outside edge.
Play only standard round CDs.
Odd-shaped CDs may jam in the A new CD may be rough on the
drive or cause other problems. inner and outer edges. The small
plastic pieces causing this roughness Handle a CD by its edges; never
Handle your CDs properly to can flake off and fall on the re- touch either surface. Do not place
prevent damage and skipping. cording surface of the CD, causing stabilizer rings or labels on the CD.
skipping or other problems. Remove These, along with contamination
these pieces by rubbing the inner from fingerprints, liquids, and felt-tip
and outer edges with the side of a pens, can cause the CD to not play
pencil or pen. properly or possibly jam in the drive.
Never try to insert foreign objects in

the CD player or the CD changer.
159

０６／０４／２８１４：３３：１９３１ＳＪＣ６１００１６５
CD Player/Changer Error Messages
If you see an error message in the

display while playing a CD, find the Message Cause Solution
cause in the chart to the right. If you
cannot clear the error message, take Press the disc eject button, and remove the
the vehicle to your dealer. disc(s). Check for an error indication. Insert
Focus Error the disc(s) again. If the code does not disappear
or the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your
dealer.
Press the disc eject button, and remove the
disc(s). Check for an error indication. Insert
Mechanical Error the disc(s) again. If the code does not disappear
or the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult your
dealer.
High Temperature Will disappear when the temperature returns to
normal.
160

０６／０４／２８１４：３３：２８３１ＳＪＣ６１００１６６
Remote Audio Controls, Playing an Optional Audio Unit
VOL BUTTON MODE BUTTON The MODE button changes the Auxiliary Input Jack
mode. Pressing the button
repeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM, AUXILIARY
XM Radio (U.S. models), CD (if a INPUT JACK
disc is loaded) or a tape (if the
optional tape player is installed and a
tape is loaded).
Features
If you are listening to the radio, use
the CH button to change stations.
Each time you press the top (▲) of
CH BUTTON the button, the system goes to the
next preset station on the band you
On RTS, RTL, and Canadian EXL are listening to. Press the bottom
models (▼) to go back to the previous On vehicles with navigation system
Three controls for the audio system station. The auxiliary input jack is on the tray
are mounted in the steering wheel above the glove box. The system will
hub. They let you control basic If you are playing a CD, the system accept auxiliary input from standard
functions without removing your skips to the beginning of the next audio accessories.
hand from the steering wheel. track each time you press the top
(▲) of the CH button. Press the When the appropriate audio unit is
The VOL button adjusts the volume bottom (▼) to return to the connected to the auxiliary input jack,
up (▲) or down (▼). Press the top beginning of the current track. Press press the CD/AUX or AUX button to
or bottom of the button, hold it until it again to return to the previous select the unit.
the desired volume is reached, then track. You will see the disc and track
release it. numbers in the display.
161

０６／０４／２８１４：３３：３３３１ＳＪＣ６１００１６７
Radio Theft Protection
Your vehicle’s audio system will If your vehicle’s battery is

disable itself if it is disconnected disconnected or goes dead, or the
from electrical power for any reason. radio fuse is removed, the audio
To make it work again, you must system will disable itself. If this
enter a specific code with the preset happens, you will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the
bars. Because there are hundreds of frequency display the next time you
number combinations possible from turn on the system. Use the preset
the five digits, making the system bars to enter the code. The code is
work without knowing the exact located on the radio code card
code is nearly impossible. included in your owner’s manual kit.
When it is entered correctly, the
You should have received a card that radio will start playing.
lists your audio system’s code and
serial numbers. It is best to store this If you make a mistake entering the
card in a safe place at home. In code, do not start over; complete the
addition, you should write the audio sequence, then enter the correct
system’s serial number in this owner’s code. You have ten tries to enter the
manual. correct code. If you are unsuccessful
in ten attempts, you must then leave
If you lose the card, you must obtain the system on for 1 hour before
the code number from your dealer. trying again.
To do this, you will need the audio
system’s serial number.
162

０６／０４／２８１４：３３：４４３１ＳＪＣ６１００１６８
Setting the Clock
RT, RTX, and RTS, RTL, and

Canadian LX Canadian EXL
models models
CLOCK SET CLOCK SET

BUTTON BUTTON
Features
U.S. models are shown. PRESET BARS PRESET BARS
On vehicles without Navigation System Press the clock set button again to For example: 1:06 will reset to 1:00
If your vehicle’s battery is enter the set time. 1:52 will reset to 2:00
disconnected or goes dead, you will
need to set the clock. You can quickly set the time to the On models with Navigation System
nearest hour. If the displayed time is The navigation system receives
To set the time, press the clock set before the half hour, pressing the signals from the global positioning
button until you hear a beep. The clock set button until you hear a system (GPS), and the displayed
displayed time begins to blink. beep, then pressing the R (Preset 3) time is updated automatically by the
side of the bar sets the clock back to GPS. Refer to the navigation system
Press and hold the H (Preset 1) side the previous hour. manual for how to adjust the time.
of the bar until the hour advances to If the displayed time is after the half
the desired time. Press and hold the hour, the clock sets forward to the
M (Preset 2) side of the bar until the beginning of the next hour.
minutes advance to the desired time.
163

０６／０４／２８１４：３３：５１３１ＳＪＣ６１００１６９
Security System
If equipped SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR The security system will not set if
The security system helps to protect the hood, In-Bed Trunk, or any door
your vehicle and valuables from theft. is not fully closed. If the system will
The horn sounds and a combination not set, check the door and tailgate
of headlights, parking lights, license open monitor and In-Bed Trunk open
plate lights, and taillights flash if indicator on the instrument panel
someone attempts to break into your (see pages 64 and 69 ) to see if the
vehicle or remove the radio. This doors and In-Bed Trunk are fully
alarm continues for 2 minutes, then closed. Since it is not part of the
the system resets. To reset an monitor display, manually check the
alarming system before the 2 hood.
minutes have elapsed, unlock the
driver’s door with the key or the NOTE: Use the remote transmitter
remote transmitter. Once the security system is set, to quickly check that the hood,
opening any door (without using the In-Bed Trunk, and all doors are
The security system automatically key or the remote transmitter), the closed. Push the lock button twice
sets 15 seconds after you lock the hood, or the In-Bed Trunk, will cause within 5 seconds. There should be an
doors, hood, and the In-Bed Trunk. it to alarm. It also alarms if the radio audible confirmation beep.
For the system to activate, you must and navigation components are
lock the doors from the outside with removed from the dashboard or the Do not attempt to alter this system
the key, driver’s lock tab, door lock wiring is cut. or add other devices to it.
switch, or remote transmitter. The
security system indicator above the
driver’s door lock tab starts blinking
immediately to show you the system
is setting itself.
164

０６／０４／２８１４：３４：００３１ＳＪＣ６１００１７０
Cruise Control
Cruise control allows you to maintain Using the Cruise Control

a set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)
without keeping your foot on the RES/ACCEL BUTTON
accelerator pedal. It should be used
for cruising on straight, open
highways. It is not recommended for
city driving, winding roads, slippery
roads, heavy rain, or bad weather.
Features
CANCEL
BUTTON
Improper use of the cruise SET/DECEL

CRUISE
control can lead to a crash. BUTTON BUTTON
Use the cruise control only 1. Push the CRUISE button. The 3. Press and release the SET/
when traveling on open indicator in the button will come DECEL button on the steering
highways in good weather. on. wheel. The indicator on the
instrument panel comes on to
2. Accelerate to the desired cruising show the system is now activated.
speed above 25 mph (40 km/h).
CONTINUED
165

０６／０４／２８１４：３４：０９３１ＳＪＣ６１００１７１
Cruise Control
Cruise control may not hold the set Changing the Set Speed You can decrease the set cruising
speed when you are going up and You can increase the set cruising speed in any of these ways:
down hills. If your speed increases speed in any of these ways:
going down a hill, use the brakes to NOTE: If you need to decrease your
slow down. This will cancel cruise Press and hold the RES/ACCEL speed quickly, use the brakes as you
control. To resume the set speed, button. When you reach the normally would.
press the RES/ACCEL button. The desired cruising speed, release the
indicator on the instrument panel will button. Press and hold the SET/DECEL
come back on. button. Release the button when
Push on the accelerator pedal. you reach the desired speed.
When climbing a steep hill, the Accelerate to the desired cruising
automatic transmission may speed, then press the SET/ To slow down in very small
downshift to hold the set speed. DECEL button. amounts, tap the SET/DECEL
button. Each time you do this,
To increase your speed in very your vehicle will slow down about
small amounts, tap the RES/ 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
ACCEL button. Each time you do
this, the vehicle will speed up Tap the brake pedal lightly with
about 1 mph (1.6 km/h). your foot. The CRUISE
CONTROL indicator on the
instrument panel will go out.
When the vehicle slows to the
desired speed, press the SET/
DECEL button.
166

０６／０４／２８１４：３４：１７３１ＳＪＣ６１００１７２
Cruise Control
Even with cruise control turned on, Canceling Cruise Control Resuming the Set Speed
you can still use the accelerator You can cancel cruise control in any When you push the CANCEL button
pedal to speed up for passing. After of these ways: or tap on the brake pedal, the system
completing the pass, take your foot will remember the previously set
off the accelerator pedal. The vehicle Tap the brake pedal. cruising speed. To return to that
will return to the set cruising speed. speed, accelerate to above 25 mph
Push the CANCEL button on the (40 km/h) and then press and
Resting your foot on the brake pedal steering wheel. release the RES/ACCEL button. The
Features
causes cruise control to cancel. CRUISE CONTROL indicator comes
Push the CRUISE button on the on. The vehicle will accelerate to the
dashboard. same cruising speed as before.
Pressing the CRUISE button turns

the system off and erases the
previous cruising speed.
167

０６／０４／２８１４：３４：２４３１ＳＪＣ６１００１７３
Compass
Compass Function REAR VIEW MIRROR The compass can be affected by

If equipped driving near power lines or stations,
Your vehicle has a compass in the across bridges, through tunnels,
rear view mirror. The compass over railroad crossings, past large
indicates the vehicle direction with vehicles, or driving near large
illuminated letters; N (north), S COMPASS objects that cause magnetic
(south), W (west), and E (east). The BUTTON interference. It can also be affected
center blue icon in the compass is by accessories such as antennas and
always on. It serves as a reference roof racks that are mounted by
point. magnets.
CENTER ICON The compass mirror has a light

sensor behind the right side of the
The direction and center position rear view mirror. Make sure the
icons come on when you turn the extended sun visor or an accessory is
ignition switch to the ON (II) not covering the sensor.
position. The system then begins to
check the vehicle direction and
illuminates the appropriate icon(s).
To turn the compass on or off, press

the compass button on the back of
the rear view mirror.
168

０６／０４／２８１４：３４：３５３１ＳＪＣ６１００１７４
Compass
Compass Calibration 2. Drive the vehicle slowly in circles 2. Press and hold the compass
The compass may need to be at less than 5 mph (8 km/h) until button for about 3 seconds. When
manually calibrated after exposure to the center icon turns blue. This all of the direction icons begin to
a strong magnetic field. If the icon also turns blue by continuing blink, release the button.
compass seems to continually show to drive the vehicle under normal
the wrong direction, do this. driving conditions. When you see 3. The blue direction icon(s) blink
an actual heading on the compass, and show the current zone.
NOTE: Do this procedure in an open calibration is completed.
Features
area, away from buildings, power 4. If the zone is incorrect, press and
lines, and other vehicles. Compass Zone Selection release the compass button
In most areas, there is a variation repeatedly to get to the correct
1. With the blue center icon between magnetic north and true number.
displayed, press and hold the north. Zone selection is required so
compass button for about 6 the compass can compensate for this 5. The compass will return to the
seconds. When the center icon variation. To check and select the normal display about 4 seconds
turns red, release the button. zone, do this: after you stop adjusting a zone
number.
1. Find the zone for your area on the
zone map (see page 170 ). Each
zone number (1 through 15)
corresponds to a compass zone on
the table (see page 170 ).
CONTINUED
169

０６／０４／２８１４：３４：３９３１ＳＪＣ６１００１７５
Compass
Zone Map Compass Display for Each Zone
170

０６／０４／２８１４：３４：５０３１ＳＪＣ６１００１７６
HomeLink Universal Transceiver
If equipped that causes the motor to stop and Training HomeLink

The HomeLink universal reverse if an obstacle is detected Before you begin − If you just
transceiver built into your vehicle during closing, increasing the risk of received your vehicle and have not
can be programmed to operate up to injury. trained any of the buttons in
three remotely controlled devices HomeLink before, you should erase
around your home, such as garage Important Safety Precautions any previously learned codes before
doors, lighting, or home security Always refer to the opening training the first button.
systems. instructions and safety information
Features
that came with your garage door To do this, press and hold the two
General Information opener or other equipment you outside buttons on the HomeLink
If you are training HomeLink to intend to operate with HomeLink. If transceiver for about 20 seconds,
operate a garage door or gate, you you do not have this information, until the red indicator flashes.
should unplug the motor for that contact the manufacturer of the Release the buttons, then proceed to
device during training. Repeatedly equipment. step 1.
pressing the remote control button If you are training the second or
could burn out the motor. For quick and accurate training, third buttons, go directly to step 1.
make sure the remote transmitter
HomeLink stores the code in a for the device (garage door, 1. Unplug the garage door opener
permanent memory. There should automatic gate, security system, etc.) motor from the electrical outlet.
be no need to retrain HomeLink if has a fresh battery.
your vehicle’s battery goes dead or is 2. Hold the end of the garage door
disconnected. If your garage door opener remote transmitter 2 to 5
opener was manufactured before inches from HomeLink. Make
April 1982, you may not be able to sure you are not blocking your
program HomeLink to operate it. view of the red indicator in
They do not have the safety feature HomeLink. CONTINUED
171

０６／０４／２８１４：３５：０１３１ＳＪＣ６１００１７７
If the red indicator in HomeLink second.

continues to flash slowly (does If the button works,
not flash rapidly), your remote programming is complete.
transmitter may stop If the button does not work go
transmitting after a short time. to step 6.
Go to step 4.
6. Push and hold the HomeLink
4. Press and hold the remote button for a few seconds, then
transmitter button and one of the watch the red indicator on
HomeLink buttons at the same HomeLink.
time. While continuing to hold the If the indicator stays on or
HomeLink button, press and flashes slowly, repeat steps 2
release the remote transmitter thru 5.
3. Press and hold the remote button every 2 seconds. If the indicator flashes rapidly
transmitter button and one of the If the red indicator in HomeLink for 2 seconds then stays on, you
HomeLink buttons at the same begins to flash slowly at first, have a rolling code transmitter:
time. then rapidly, release both go to ‘‘Training with a Rolling
If the red indicator in HomeLink buttons, and go to step 5. Code System’’ (see page 173 ).
begins to flash slowly at first, If the red indicator in HomeLink
then rapidly, release both continues to flash slowly (does 7. Repeat these steps to train the
buttons, and go to step 5. not begin to flash rapidly), other two HomeLink buttons to
repeat steps 2 thru 4. operate any other compatible
remotely controlled devices
5. Plug in the garage door opener around your home (lighting,
motor, then test the HomeLink automatic gate, security system,
button by pushing it for about 1 etc.).
172

０６／０４／２８１４：３５：１０３１ＳＪＣ６１００１７８
Training With a Rolling Code TRAINING BUTTON 4. Press and hold the button on
System HomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.
For security purposes, newer garage
door opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’ 5. Press and hold the HomeLink
or variable code. Information from button again for 3 to 4 seconds.
the remote control and the garage This should turn off the training
door opener are needed before indicator on the garage door
HomeLink can operate the garage opener unit. (Some systems may
Features
door opener. require you to press the button up
to three times.)
The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’
procedure trains HomeLink to the 6. Press the HomeLink button again
proper garage door opener code. for about 1 second. It should
The following procedure 3. Press the training button on the operate the garage door.
synchronizes HomeLink to the garage door opener unit until the
garage door opener so it sends and indicator next to the button comes
receives the correct codes. on. The indicator may blink, or
come on and stay on. You then
1. Make sure you have properly have approximately 30 seconds to
completed the ‘‘Training complete the following steps.
HomeLink’’ procedure.
2. Find the ‘‘training’’ button on your

garage door opener unit. The
location will vary, depending on
the manufacturer.
173

０６／０４／２８１４：３５：２１３１ＳＪＣ６１００１７９
Erasing Codes If a standard transmitter was As required by the FCC:

To erase the codes stored in all three programmed, the indicator will This device complies with Part 15 of the
buttons, press and hold the two stay on for about 25 seconds. FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
outside buttons until the red following two conditions: (1) This device
indicator begins to flash, then 2. Once the HomeLink indicator may not cause harmful interference, and
release the buttons. begins to flash slowly, continue to (2) this device must accept any
hold the HomeLink button, and interference received, including
You should erase all three codes follow steps 3 thru 6 under interference that may cause undesired
before selling the vehicle. ‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page operation.
171 ).
Retraining a Button Changes or modifications not expressly
If you want to retrain a programmed Customer Assistance approved by the party responsible for
button for a new device, you do not If you have problems with training compliance could void the user’s
have to erase all button memory. the HomeLink Universal Transceiver, authority to operate the equipment.
You can replace the existing memory or would like information on home
code using this procedure: products that can be operated by This device complies with Industry
HomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. On Canada Standard RSS-210.
1. Press and hold the HomeLink the Internet, go to Operation is subject to the following two
button to be trained until the www.homelink.com. conditions: (1) this device may not cause
HomeLink indicator begins to interference, and (2) this device must
flash slowly. HomeLink is a registered accept any interference that may cause
If a rolling code transmitter was trademark of Johnson Controls, Inc. undesired operation of the device.
previously programmed, the
indicator will flash rapidly for 2
seconds, and then stay on for
about 23 seconds.
174

０６／０４／２８１４：３５：２９３１ＳＪＣ６１００１８０
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if As an added safety feature, your Driving on a significantly under-
provided), should be checked vehicle has been equipped with a tire inflated tire causes the tire to
monthly when cold and inflated to pressure monitoring system (TPMS) overheat and can lead to tire failure.
the inflation pressure recommended that illuminates a low tire pressure Under-inflation also reduces fuel
by the vehicle manufacturer on the telltale efficiency and tire tread life, and may
vehicle placard or tire inflation affect the vehicle’s handling and
pressure label. and stopping ability.
Features
(If your vehicle has tires of a when one or more of your tires is Please note that the TPMS is not a
different size than the size indicated significantly under-inflated. substitute for proper tire
on the vehicle placard or tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s
inflation pressure label, you should Accordingly, when the low tire responsibility to maintain correct tire
determine the proper tire inflation pressure telltale illuminates, you pressure, even if under-inflation has
pressure for those tires.) should stop and check your tires as not reached the level to trigger
soon as possible, and inflate them to illumination of the TPMS low tire
the proper pressure. pressure telltale.
CONTINUED
175

０６／０４／２８１４：３５：３５３１ＳＪＣ６１００１８１
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) − Required Federal Explanation
Your vehicle has also been equipped Always check the TPMS malfunction
with a TPMS malfunction indicator telltale after replacing one or more
to indicate when the system is not tires or wheels on your vehicle to
operating properly. The TPMS ensure that the replacement or
malfunction indicator is provided by alternate tires and wheels allow the
a separate telltale, which displays the TPMS to continue to function
symbol ‘‘TPMS’’ when illuminated. properly.
When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated,
the system may not be able to detect

or signal low tire pressure as
intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a

variety of reasons, including the
installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the
vehicle that prevent the TPMS from
functioning properly.
176

０６／０４／２８１４：３５：３８３１ＳＪＣ６１００１８２
Before Driving
Before you begin driving your Break-in Period .............................. 178

vehicle, you should know what Fuel Recommendation .................. 178
gasoline to use and how to check the Service Station Procedures .......... 179
levels of important fluids. You also Refueling..................................... 179
need to know how to properly store Opening and Closing the
luggage or packages. The Hood ........................................ 181
information in this section will help Oil Check .................................... 182
you. If you plan to add any Engine Coolant Check .............. 182
accessories to your vehicle, please Fuel Economy ................................ 183
read the information in this section Accessories and Modifications .... 184
Before Driving
first. Carrying Cargo .............................. 186
177

０６／０４／２８１４：３５：５０３１ＳＪＣ６１００１８３
Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation
Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation your authorized dealer for service.

Help assure your vehicle’s future Your vehicle is designed to operate
reliability and performance by paying on unleaded gasoline with a pump Some gasoline today is blended with
extra attention to how you drive octane number of 87 or higher. Use oxygenates such as ethanol or
during the first 600 miles (1,000 km). of a lower octane gasoline can cause MTBE. Your vehicle is designed to
During this period: a persistent, heavy metallic rapping operate on oxygenated gasoline
noise that can lead to engine damage. containing up to 10 % ethanol by
Avoid full-throttle starts and rapid volume and up to 15 % MTBE by
acceleration. We recommended using a quality volume. Do not use gasoline
gasoline containing detergent containing methanol.
Avoid hard braking for the first additives that help prevent fuel
200 miles (300 km). system and engine deposits. If you notice any undesirable
operating symptoms, try another
Do not change the oil until the In addition, in order to maintain good service station or switch to another
scheduled maintenance time. performance, fuel economy, and brand of gasoline.
emissions control, we strongly
Do not tow a trailer. recommend, in areas where it is Premium fuel is recommended when
available, the use of gasoline that towing in certain conditions (see
You should also follow these does NOT contain manganese-based page 224 ).
recommendations with an fuel additives such as MMT.
overhauled or exchanged engine, or For further important fuel-related
when the brakes are replaced. Use of gasoline with these additives information, please refer to your
may adversely affect performance, Quick Start Guide.
and cause the malfunction indicator
lamp on your instrument panel to
come on. If this happens, contact
178

０６／０４／２８１４：３５：５９３１ＳＪＣ６１００１８４
Service Station Procedures
Refueling 3. Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.

You may hear a hissing sound as
Gasoline is highly flammable pressure inside the tank escapes.
Pull and explosive. You can be The fuel fill cap is attached to the
burned or seriously injured fuel filler with a tether. Insert the
when handling fuel. attachment on the fuel fill cap into
the slit on the fuel fill door.
Stop the engine, and keep
heat, sparks, and flame away. 4. Stop filling the tank after the fuel
Handle fuel only outdoors. nozzle automatically clicks off. Do
Before Driving
Wipe up spills immediately. not try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leave
some room for the fuel to expand
with temperature changes.
1. Park with the driver’s side closest If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off
to the service station pump. even though the tank is not full,
there may be a problem with your
2. Open the fuel fill door by pulling vehicle’s fuel vapor recovery
on the handle to the left of the system. The system helps keep
driver’s seat. fuel vapors from going into the
atmosphere. Try filling at another
pump. If this does not fix the
TETHER
problem, consult your dealer.
ATTACHMENT FUEL FILL CAP
CONTINUED
179

０６／０４／２８１４：３６：０７３１ＳＪＣ６１００１８５
5. Screw the fuel fill cap back on Filling a Portable Fuel Container
until it clicks at least once. If you Whenever filling a fuel container,
do not properly tighten the cap, use an approved fuel container, and Do not fill a portable fuel
the malfunction indicator lamp place it on the ground. Do not fill the container in the pickup bed.
may come on (see page 289 ). You fuel container in the vehicle,
will also see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL including the pickup bed and the Static electricity can ignite gas
CAP’’ message on the information In-Bed Trunk. Make sure to put the vapors and you can be burned.
display. fuel pump nozzle in the fuel filler of
the container securely and to handle
6. Push the fuel fill door closed until it properly.
it latches.
Gasoline or fuel vapors are
extremely flammable and explosive.
Improperly handling fuel can cause
an explosion in which you can be
seriously injured.
Before placing the fuel container in

the vehicle, wipe up any spill
completely.
Your vehicle has a warning label for

filling a portable fuel container on
the left rear side of the pickup bed.
180

０６／０４／２８１４：３６：１５３１ＳＪＣ６１００１８６
Opening and Closing the Hood

HOOD RELEASE HANDLE SUPPORT ROD
Before Driving
LATCH
1. Park the vehicle, and set the 2. Put your fingers under the front 3. Pull the support rod out of its clip,
parking brake. Pull the hood edge of the hood. The hood latch and insert the end into either of
release handle under the lower left handle is above the ‘‘H’’ logo. Pull the designated holes pointed to by
corner of the dashboard. The this handle until it releases the an arrow.
hood will pop up slightly. hood, then lift the hood.
To close the hood, lift it up slightly to
If the hood latch handle moves remove the support rod from the
stiffly, or you can open the hood hole. Put the support rod back into
without lifting the handle, the its holding clip. Lower the hood to
mechanism should be cleaned and about a foot (30 cm) above the
lubricated. fender, then let it drop. Make sure it
is securely latched.
181

０６／０４／２８１４：３６：２６３１ＳＪＣ６１００１８７
Oil Check Engine Coolant Check

DIPSTICK RESERVE TANK
MAX
UPPER MARK
MIN
LOWER MARK
Wait a few minutes after turning the 4. Remove the dipstick again, and Look at the coolant level in the
engine off before you check the oil. check the level. It should be radiator reserve tank. Make sure it is
between the upper and lower between the MAX and MIN lines. If
1. Remove the dipstick (orange loop). marks. it is below the MIN line, see Adding
Engine Coolant on page 249 for
2. Wipe off the dipstick with a clean If it is near or below the lower mark, information on adding the proper
cloth or paper towel. see Adding Engine Oil on page 246 . coolant.
3. Insert the dipstick all the way back Refer to Owner’s Maintenance
into its hole. Checks on page 241 for information
about checking other items on your
vehicle.
182

０６／０４／２８１４：３６：３４３１ＳＪＣ６１００１８８
Fuel Economy
Improving Fuel Economy Try to maintain a constant speed.

Always maintain your vehicle Every time you slow down and
according to the maintenance speed up, your vehicle uses extra
messages displayed on the fuel. Use cruise control when
information display. See Owner’s appropriate.
Maintenance Checks on page
241 . Combine several short trips into
one.
For example, an underinflated tire
causes more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’ The air conditioning puts an extra
Before Driving
which uses more fuel. load on the engine which makes it
use more fuel. Use the fresh-air
The build-up of snow or mud on ventilation when possible.
your vehicle’s underside or on the
truck bed adds weight and rolling
resistance. Frequent cleaning
helps your fuel mileage and
reduces the chance of corrosion.
Drive moderately. Rapid

acceleration, abrupt cornering,
and hard braking use more fuel.
Always drive in the highest gear

possible.
183

０６／０４／２８１４：３６：４２３１ＳＪＣ６１００１８９
Accessories and Modifications
Modifying your vehicle, or installing When properly installed, cellular

some non-Honda accessories, can phones, alarms, two-way radios, and
make it unsafe. Before you make any Improper accessories or low-powered audio systems should
modifications or add any accessories, modifications can affect your not interfere with your vehicle’s
be sure to read the following vehicle’s handling, stability, and computer controlled systems, such
information. performance, and cause a as your airbags and anti-lock brakes.
crash in which you can be hurt
Accessories or killed. Before installing any accessory:
Your dealer has Honda accessories
that allow you to personalize your Follow all instructions in this Make sure the accessory does not
vehicle. These accessories have owner’s manual regarding obscure any lights, or interfere
been designed and approved for your accessories and modifications. with proper vehicle operation or
vehicle, and are covered by warranty. performance.
Although non-Honda accessories Your vehicle should not be used to Be sure electronic accessories do
may fit on your vehicle, they may not carry a slide-in camper. not overload electrical circuits
meet factory specifications, and If you install a truck cap, be sure it is (see page 291 ) or interfere with
could adversely affect your vehicle’s properly installed and does not the proper operation of your
handling and stability. exceed your vehicle’s load limits (see vehicle.
page 187 ).
184

０６／０４／２８１４：３６：５１３１ＳＪＣ６１００１９０
Accessories and Modifications
Before installing any electronic Modifying Your Vehicle Larger or smaller wheels and tires
accessory, have the installer Removing parts from your vehicle, can interfere with the operation of
contact your dealer for assistance. or replacing components with your vehicle’s anti-lock brakes and
If possible, have your dealer non-Honda components could other systems.
inspect the final installation. seriously affect your vehicle’s
handling, stability, and reliability. Modifying your steering wheel or
Do not install accessories on the any other part of your vehicle’s
side pillars or across the rear Some examples are: safety systems could make the
windows. In these areas, Lowering the vehicle with a non- systems ineffective.
accessories may interfere with Honda suspension kit that
Before Driving
proper operation of the side significantly reduces ground If you plan to modify your vehicle,
curtain airbags. clearance can allow the consult your dealer.
undercarriage to hit speed bumps
or other raised objects, which
could cause the airbags to deploy.
Raising your vehicle with a

non-Honda suspension kit can
affect the handling and stability.
Non-Honda wheels, because they

are a universal design, can cause
excessive stress on suspension
components and will not be
compatible with the tire pressure
monitoring system.
185

０６／０４／２８１４：３７：００３１ＳＪＣ６１００１９１
Carrying Cargo
The pickup bed on your vehicle

GLOVE BOX allows you to carry heavy and large
DOOR POCKET cargo. You can also store items in
IN-BED TRUNK the In-Bed Trunk and on a roof-rack
DASHBOARD
POCKETS (if equipped).
Your vehicle also has these

convenient storage areas inside:
Glove box
Front door and seat-back pockets
Fold-up rear seat with under-seat
storage
Console compartment
Pockets on the dashboard
However, carrying too much cargo,

or improperly storing it, can affect
CONSOLE your vehicle’s handling, stability,
COMPARTMENTS stopping distance, and tires, and
SEAT-BACK POCKETS make it unsafe. Before carrying any
type of cargo, be sure to read the
FOLD-UP REAR SEAT WITH UNDER-SEAT STORAGE
following pages.
PICKUP BED
186

０６／０４／２８１４：３７：１０３１ＳＪＣ６１００１９２
Carrying Cargo
Load Limits (Payload) To determine the correct cargo and 5. Determine the combined weight
The maximum load for your vehicle luggage load limit: of luggage and cargo being loaded
is: 1. Locate the statement, ‘‘the in the vehicle. That weight may
On vehicles without moonroof combined weight of occupants and not safely exceed the available
1,530 lbs (690 kg) cargo should never exceed 1,530 cargo and luggage load capacity in
On vehicles with moonroof (1,480) lbs’’ on your vehicle’s step 4.
1,480 lbs (670 kg) placard. [The placard is on the
driver’s doorjamb.] 6. If your vehicle will be towing a
These figures include the total trailer, load from your trailer will
weight of all occupants, cargo, and 2. Determine the combined weight be transferred to your vehicle.
Before Driving
accessories, and the tongue load if of the driver and passengers that Consult this manual to determine
you are towing a trailer. will be riding in your vehicle. how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of
3. Subtract the combined weight of your vehicle (see page 212 ).
the driver and passengers from
Overloading or improper 1,530 (1,480) pounds. In addition, the total weight of the
loading can affect handling and vehicle, all occupants, accessories,
stability and cause a crash in 4. The resulting figure equals the cargo, and trailer tongue load
which you can be hurt or killed. available amount of cargo and must not exceed the gross vehicle
luggage load capacity. For weight rating (GVWR) or the
Follow all load limits and other example, if the maximum load is gross axle weight rating (GAWR).
loading guidelines in this 1,530 lbs and there will be five 150 Both are on a label on the driver’s
manual. lb. passengers in your vehicle, the doorjamb.
amount of available cargo and
luggage load capacity is 780 lbs.
[1,530 − 750 (5 × 150) = 780 lbs.]
187

０６／０４／２８１４：３７：１９３１ＳＪＣ６１００１９３
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Items in the Passenger If you fold the rear seats up, tie Carrying Cargo in the In-Bed
Compartment down items that could be thrown Trunk or on a Roof Rack
Store or secure all items that could about the vehicle during a crash or Distribute cargo evenly on the
be thrown around and hurt sudden stop. Also, keep all cargo floor in the In-Bed Trunk, placing
someone during a crash. below the bottom of the windows. the heaviest items on the bottom
If it is higher, it could interfere and as far forward as possible. Tie
Be sure items placed on the floor with the proper operation of the down items that could be thrown
behind the front seats cannot roll side curtain airbags. during a crash or sudden stop.
under the seats and interfere with
the driver’s ability to operate the Distribute cargo evenly on the Make sure the In-Bed Trunk lid is
pedals, the proper operation of the floor of the cargo area with the closed securely before driving.
seats, or proper operation of the rear seats folded up, placing the
sensors under the seats. heaviest items on the bottom and Be sure the total weight of the
as far forward as possible. Tie items in the In-Bed Trunk does not
Keep the glove box closed while down items that could be thrown exceed 300 lbs (136 kg).
driving. If it is open, a passenger about the vehicle during a crash
could injure their knees during a or sudden stop. If you carry any items on a roof
crash or sudden stop. rack, be sure the total weight of
the rack and the items does not
exceed 110 lb (50 kg).
If you use an accessory roof rack,

the roof rack weight limit may be
lower. Refer to the information that
came with your roof rack.
188

０６／０４／２８１４：３７：２９３１ＳＪＣ６１００１９４
Carrying Cargo
Carrying Cargo in the Pickup Bed When loading and unloading cargo, If you stack items higher than the
Your vehicle can carry a large make sure all passengers or any bed sides, tailgate, or back window,
amount of cargo in the pickup bed. objects are clear of the tailgate secure them with a net or cover.
before opening or closing it. The This will reduce the risk of items
However, the pickup bed is not tailgate should be closed securely being thrown out of the pickup
intended for carrying passengers. before driving when it is not used bed during a crash or sudden stop.
People who ride in the pickup bed as the extended pickup bed.
can be very seriously injured or When the tailgate is dropped open,
killed in a crash (see page 8 ). The maximum allowable loading it can be used as an extended
weight on the pickup bed is 1,100 pickup bed. The maximum
Before Driving
Make sure your cargo is properly lbs (500 kg). Do not exceed the allowable weight on the tailgate
loaded and all items are secured so load limit (see page 187 ). while driving is 300 lbs (136 kg).
they will not shift or fall out while Exceeding this limit could damage
driving. Distribute cargo evenly on the the tailgate.
pickup bed. Place the heaviest
items on the bottom and as far Carrying heavy cargo in the
forward as possible of the rear pickup bed will raise your vehicle’s
Allowing passengers to ride in axle. Tie down and secure all center of gravity. This can affect
the pickup bed or on the tailgate items that could be thrown out of handling and performance. Drive
can result in death or serious the vehicle during a crash or more slowly and cautiously, and
injury in a crash. sudden stop. allow extra time and distance for
braking.
Make sure all passengers ride
in a seat and wear a seat belt
properly.
CONTINUED
189

０６／０４／２８１４：３７：３６３１ＳＪＣ６１００１９５
Carrying Cargo
Tie Down Cleats You can also support motorcycles on

the pickup bed floor with the cleats.
Never let passengers ride on TIE DOWN CLEAT The floor panel of the pickup bed is
the pickup bed or in the In-Bed designed to hold motorcycle tires. Be
Trunk space. This could cause sure to tighten motorcycles securely,
very serious injuries or death in with an approved tie-down or
a collision. No one should ride motorcycle strap, according to the
in any position on your vehicle motorcycle maker’s instructions.
that is not equipped with seats
and seat belts. When carrying motorcycles or any
other cargo, do not spill any oil or
Exceeding load limits or fluid on the pickup bed. A spilled
improperly loading cargo on the liquid may damage the pickup bed.
vehicle can cause a crash in
which you can be seriously Your vehicle has six tie down cleats
injured or killed. on the pickup bed.
Load the cargo carefully before They are used to secure cargo on the
starting to drive. pickup bed and to install a cargo net
for securing items. Do not use any
other parts of the pickup bed to
secure cargo or nets.
190

０６／０４／２８１４：３７：４２３１ＳＪＣ６１００１９６
Carrying Cargo
Optional Cargo Net Optional Cargo Cover

The cargo net can be used to hold The cargo cover can be used to
lightweight items in the pickup bed. cover the cargo area on the pickup
Secure all items properly. The net bed.
may not prevent heavy items from
being thrown outward in a crash or a Pickup Bed Repair
sudden stop. Your vehicle’s pickup bed has a rust
resistant surface. To repair small
chips and scratches in the bed, a
repair kit is available from your
Before Driving
dealer. More extensive damage
should be repaired by your dealer.
To avoid problems with the bed

surface and the In-Bed Trunk lid, do
not use spray-in bed liner products.
191

０６／０４／２８１４：３７：４５３１ＳＪＣ６１００１９７
192

０６／０４／２８１４：３７：４９３１ＳＪＣ６１００１９８
Driving
This section gives you tips on Driving Guidelines ......................... 194

starting the engine under various Preparing to Drive ......................... 195
conditions, and how to operate the Starting the Engine........................ 196
automatic transmission. It also Automatic Transmission............... 197
includes important information on Variable Torque Management
parking your vehicle, the braking 4WD (VTM-4) System .............. 203
system, the VTM-4 system, the VSA Tire Pressure Monitoring System
system, the tire pressure monitoring (TPMS) ....................................... 204
system, and facts you need if you are Parking ............................................ 206
planning to tow a trailer. Braking System.............................. 207
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) ................ 208
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
Driving
System......................................... 210
Towing Weight Limits .................. 212
Towing Weight Guidelines ........... 214
Towing a Trailer ............................ 215
Off-Highway Driving
Guidelines ................................... 227
193

０６／０４／２８１４：３７：５８３１ＳＪＣ６１００１９９
Driving Guidelines
Your vehicle has higher ground To prevent rollovers or loss of With heavy cargo on the pickup bed,
clearance that allows you to travel control: your vehicle has a higher center of
over bumps, obstacles, and rough gravity. Drive slowly and cautiously,
terrain. It also provides good Take corners at slower speeds and allow more time and distance for
visibility so you can anticipate than you would with a passenger braking. Loading heavy cargo could
problems earlier. vehicle. affect your vehicle’s handling and
performance.
Your vehicle allows you to carry Avoid sharp turns and abrupt
more cargo than a typical passenger maneuvers whenever possible. See page 227 for off-highway driving
vehicle. guidelines.
Make sure the cargo is properly
Because your vehicle rides higher loaded and all items are secured so
off the ground, it has a high center they will not shift while driving.
of gravity that can cause it to roll
over if you make abrupt turns. Utility Do not modify your vehicle in any
vehicles have a significantly higher way that would raise the center of
roll over rate than other types of gravity.
vehicles.
Do not carry heavy cargo on the
roof.
194

０６／０４／２８１４：３８：０９３１ＳＪＣ６１００２００
Preparing to Drive
You should do the following checks 7. Check the adjustment of the

and adjustments before you drive inside and outside mirrors (see
your vehicle. page 110 ).
1. Make sure all windows, mirrors, 8. Check the steering wheel

and outside lights are clean and adjustment (see page 79 ).
unobstructed. Remove frost, snow,
or ice. 9. Make sure the doors and In-Bed
Trunk are securely closed and
2. Check that the hood is fully closed. locked.
3. Check that the tailgate is fully 10.Fasten your seat belt. Check that
Driving
closed when it is not used as an your passengers have fastened
extended pickup bed. their seat belts (see page 14 ).
4. Visually check the tires. If a tire 11.When you start the engine, check
looks low, use a gauge to check its the gauges and indicators in the
pressure. instrument panel (see page 59 ).
5. Check that any items you may be

carrying are stored properly or
fastened down securely.
6. Check the seat adjustment (see

pages 98 and 100 ).
195

０６／０４／２８１４：３８：１６３１ＳＪＣ６１００２０１
Starting the Engine
1. Apply the parking brake. 4. Without touching the accelerator 5. If the engine does not start within
pedal, turn the ignition key to the 15 seconds, or starts but stalls
2. In cold weather, turn off all START (III) position. Do not hold right away, repeat step 4 with the
electrical accessories to reduce the key in the START (III) accelerator pedal pressed halfway
the drain on the battery. position for more than 15 seconds down. If the engine starts, release
at a time. If the engine does not pressure on the accelerator pedal
3. Make sure the shift lever is in start right away, pause for at least so the engine does not race.
Park. Press on the brake pedal. 10 seconds before trying again.
6. If the engine fails to start, press
the accelerator pedal all the way
down, and hold it there while
The immobilizer system protects your starting to clear flooding. If the
vehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly- engine still does not start, return
coded key (or other device) is used, the to step 5.
engine’s f uel system is disabled. For
more inf ormation, see page 81 .
The engine is harder to start in cold

weather. Also, the thinner air f ound at
altitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400
meters) adds to this problem.
196

０６／０４／２８１４：３８：２４３１ＳＪＣ６１００２０２
Automatic Transmission
Shift Lever Position Indicators The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for a Shifting
few seconds when you turn the
ignition switch to the ON (II)
position. If it flashes while driving (in
any shift position), it indicates a
possible problem in the transmission.
If the malfunction indicator lamp

comes on along with the ‘‘D’’
indicator, there is a problem with the
automatic transmission control
system. Avoid rapid acceleration, and
Driving
have the transmission checked by SHIFT LEVER
your dealer as soon as possible.
These indicators on the instrument To shift from Park to any position,
panel show which position the shift press firmly on the brake pedal, and
lever is in. pull the shift lever toward you. You
cannot shift out of Park when the
ignition switch is in the LOCK (0) or
ACCESSORY (I) position.
CONTINUED
197

０６／０４／２８１４：３８：３１３１ＳＪＣ６１００２０３
Park (P) − This position mechani- Reverse (R) − Press the brake
cally locks the transmission. Use pedal and pull the shift lever towards
Park whenever you are turning off or you to shift from Park to reverse. To
starting the engine. To shift out of shift from reverse to neutral, come
Park, you must press on the brake to a complete stop, and then shift.
pedal and have your foot off the Pull the shift lever towards you
accelerator pedal. Pull the shift lever before shifting into reverse from
towards you, then move it out of neutral.
Park.
If you have done all of the above and

still cannot move the lever out of
Park, see Shift Lock Release on
To shift from: Do this: page 202 .
Press the brake pedal, and
P to R pull the shift lever towards You must also pull the shift lever
you. towards you to shift into Park. To
R to P avoid transmission damage, come to
N to R Pull the shift lever towards a complete stop before shifting into
D to 2 you. Park. The shift lever must be in Park
2 to 1 for you to remove the key from the
1 to 2 ignition switch.
2 to D
D to N Move the shift lever.
N to D
R to N
198

０６／０４／２８１４：３８：３８３１ＳＪＣ６１００２０４
Neutral (N) − Use neutral if you Drive (D) − Use this position for D3
need to restart a stalled engine, or if your normal driving. The
it is necessary to stop briefly with transmission automatically selects a
the engine idling. Shift to the Park suitable gear (1 through 5) for your
position if you need to leave your speed and acceleration. You may
vehicle for any reason. Press on the notice the transmission shifting up at
brake pedal when you are moving higher engine speeds when the
the shift lever from neutral to engine is cold. This helps the engine
another gear. warm up faster.
After you stop in D, 2, 1, N, or R

position with the ignition switch in
Driving
the ACCESSORY (I) position for an D3 SWITCH
extended period, you may not be
able to move the shift lever from Press the D3 switch on the end of
neutral to reverse or Park. In this the shift lever to turn this mode on
case, press the brake pedal, and turn or off; the D3 indicator comes on
the ignition switch to the ON (II) whenever D3 is selected.
position, then shift out of neutral.
The D3 switch can be operated only
when the ignition switch is in the ON
(II) position and the shift lever is in
the D position.
CONTINUED
199

０６／０４／２８１４：３８：４８３１ＳＪＣ６１００２０５
When towing a trailer on level roads Second (2) − To shift to second,

under normal driving conditions, do pull the shift lever towards you, then
not use D3. This will increase the shift to the lower gear. This position
automatic transmission fluid locks the transmission in second
temperature and may cause gear. It does not downshift to first
overheating. gear when you come to a stop.
Shifting out of the D position will Use second gear:

cancel D3, and cause the D3 For more power when climbing.
indicator to go out. Selecting the D
position again will resume D3, and To increase engine braking when
the indicator will come on. going down steep hills.
D3 INDICATOR
Turning the ignition switch to the For starting out on a slippery
When D3 is on, the transmission LOCK (0) position turns D3 off. To surface or in deep snow.
selects only the first three gears. use D3 when you restart the engine,
Use D3 for engine braking when select the D position, and press the To help reduce wheel spin.
going down a steep hill. D3 switch again.
When driving downhill with a
The D3 indicator also comes on for a trailer.
few seconds when you turn the
position.
200

０６／０４／２８１４：３８：５３３１ＳＪＣ６１００２０６
First (1) − To shift from second to Engine Speed Limiter

first, pull the shift lever towards you, If you exceed the maximum speed
then shift to the lower gear. This for the gear you are in, the engine
position locks the transmission in speed will enter into the tachometer’s
first gear. By upshifting and red zone. If this occurs, you may feel
downshifting through 1, 2, and D, the engine cut in and out. This is
you can operate the transmission caused by a limiter in the engine’s
much like a manual transmission computer controls. The engine will
without a clutch pedal. run normally when you reduce the
rpm below the red zone.
If you shift into first position when
the vehicle speed is above 28 mph
Driving
(45 km/h), the transmission shifts
into second gear first to avoid
sudden engine braking.
201

０６／０４／２８１４：３９：０２３１ＳＪＣ６１００２０７
Shift Lock Release COVER

This allows you to move the shift
lever out of Park if the normal
method of pushing on the brake
pedal and pulling the shift lever does
not work.
1. Set the parking brake.
2. Make sure the ignition switch is in

the LOCK (0) position.
SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT
3. Put a cloth on the notch of the
shift lock release slot cover. Using 4. Insert a key into the shift lock 6. Remove the key from the shift
a small flat-tipped screwdriver or a release slot. lock release slot, then reinstall the
metal fingernail file, carefully pry cover. Make sure the notch on the
on the notch of the cover to 5. Push down on the key while you cover is on the instrument panel
remove it. pull the shift lever towards you side. Press the brake pedal, and
and move it out of Park to neutral. restart the engine.
If you need to use the shift lock

release, it means your vehicle is
developing a problem. Have it
checked by your dealer.
202

０６／０４／２８１４：３９：１１３１ＳＪＣ６１００２０８
VTM-4 System
VTM-4 LOCK BUTTON

If you become stuck, you can 3. Press the VTM-4 LOCK button.
activate the VTM-4 by pressing the The indicator in the button comes
VTM-4 LOCK button while in first on.
(1), second (2), or reverse (R) gear
below 18 mph (30 km/h). This mode To get unstuck, apply light pressure
overrides the auto system to send to the accelerator pedal. Do not spin
maximum torque to the rear axle. the front tires for more than a few
This mode is only intended for seconds. Because of the amount of
intermittent use at low speed to free torque applied to the rear tires, they
your vehicle if it becomes stuck or should not spin. This is normal. If
when you encounter a steep grade you are not able to move the vehicle,
with one wheel on a slippery surface. stop and reverse direction.
Driving
Generally, you should first allow the
Your vehicle is equipped with a auto mode to operate to adjust for
variable torque management the available traction conditions.
4-wheel-drive system (VTM-4) that Do not use the VTM-4 LOCK button on
distributes engine torque to the To Engage the VTM-4 Lock: dry, paved roads. Driving on dry,
appropriate drive axle depending on 1. The vehicle speed must be below paved roads with VTM-4 Lock ON may
the available traction conditions. The 18 mph (30 km/h). damage the rear dif f erential when
system is completely automatic, making a turn. Strange noise and
always active, and does not require 2. Move the shift lever to first (1), vibration can also result.
any driver interaction. second (2), or reverse (R) gear.
CONTINUED
203

０６／０４／２８１４：３９：２２３１ＳＪＣ６１００２０９
VTM-4 System, Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The VTM-4 Lock will temporarily Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Tire Pressure
disengage when the vehicle speed (TPMS) Indicator
exceeds 18 mph (30 km/h). The Your vehicle is equipped with a tire When this indicator is on, one or
indicator in the button will remain on. pressure monitoring system (TPMS) more of your tires is significantly
that turns on every time you start the under inflated. You should stop and
To Disengage the VTM-4 Lock, do engine and monitors the pressure in check your tires as soon as possible.
any of the following: your tires while driving.
Press the VTM-4 LOCK button. If you think you can safely drive a
Each tire has its own pressure short distance to a service station,
Move the shift lever to D. sensor. If the air pressure of a tire proceed slowly, and inflate the tire to
becomes significantly low, the the recommended pressure shown
Turn the ignition switch to the sensor in that tire immediately sends on the driver’s doorjamb.
LOCK (0) position. a signal that causes the low tire
pressure indicator and the If the tire is flat, or if the tire
appropriate tire on the tire pressure pressure is too low to continue
monitor to come on. driving, replace the tire with the
Do not continuously spin the f ront tires compact spare tire.
of your vehicle. Continuously spinning
the f ront tires can cause transmission
or rear dif f erential damage.
204

０６／０４／２８１４：３９：３４３１ＳＪＣ６１００２１０
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Driving on a significantly under- Tire Pressure Monitor Each wheel is equipped with a tire
inflated tire causes the tire to pressure sensor mounted inside the
overheat and can lead to tire failure. The appropriate tire indicator and tire behind the valve stem. You must
Under-inflation also reduces fuel low tire pressure indicator comes on use TPMS specific wheels. It is
efficiency and tire tread life, and may if a tire becomes significantly recommended that you always have
affect the vehicle’s handling and underinflated. See Low Tire your tires serviced by your dealer or
stopping ability. Pressure Indicator on page 204 . qualified technician.
Although your tire pressure is Tire Pressure Monitoring After you replace the flat tire with
monitored, each tire should be System (TPMS) Indicator the compact spare tire, the low tire
checked monthly, including the This indicator comes on and stays on pressure indicator stays on. This is
spare. if there is a problem with the tire normal; the system is not monitoring
Driving
pressure monitoring system. the spare tire pressure. Manually
Check the pressure with the tires check the spare tire pressure to be
cold, after the vehicle has been If this happens, the system will shut sure it is correct.
parked for at least 3 hours. off and no longer monitor tire
pressures. Have the system checked Never use a puncture-repairing agent
Set to the recommended inflation by your dealer as soon as possible. in a flat tire. If used, you will have to
pressure as specified on the vehicle replace the tire pressure sensor.
placard and in this owner’s manual Changing a Tire with TPMS Have the flat tire repaired by your
(see page 266 ). If you have a flat tire, the low tire dealer as soon as possible.
pressure and tire monitor indicators
will come on. Replace the indicated
flat tire with the compact spare tire
(see page 275 ).
CONTINUED
205

０６／０４／２８１４：３９：４４３１ＳＪＣ６１００２１１
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Parking
As required by the FCC: Parking Parking Tips

This device complies with Part 15 of the Always use the parking brake when Make sure the moonroof (if
FCC rules. Operation is subject to the you park your vehicle. Make sure equipped) and the windows are
following two conditions: (1) This device the parking brake is set firmly, or closed.
may not cause harmful interference, and your vehicle may roll if it is parked
(2) this device must accept any on an incline. Turn off the lights.
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired Set the parking brake before you put Place any packages, valuables, etc.
operation. the transmission in Park. This keeps in the cargo area in your vehicle or
the vehicle from moving and putting the In-Bed Trunk, or take them
Changes or modifications not expressly pressure on the parking mechanism with you.
approved by the party responsible for in the transmission.
compliance could void the user’s Lock the doors.
On vehicles with security system
This device complies with Industry Check the indicator on the driver’s
Canada Standard RSS-210. door to verify that the security
Operation is subject to the following two system is set.
interference, and (2) this device must Never park over dry leaves, tall
accept any interference that may cause grass, or other flammable
undesired operation of the device. materials. The hot three way
catalytic converter could cause
these materials to catch on fire.
206

０６／０４／２８１４：３９：５３３１ＳＪＣ６１００２１２
Parking, Braking System
If the vehicle is facing uphill, turn Braking System Check the brakes after driving
the front wheels away from the Your vehicle is equipped with disc through deep water. Apply the
curb, and set the parking brake. brakes at all four wheels. A power brakes moderately to see if they feel
assist helps reduce the effort needed normal. If not, apply them gently and
If the vehicle is facing downhill, on the brake pedal. The anti-lock frequently until they do. Be extra
turn the front wheels toward the brake system (ABS) helps you retain cautious and alert in your driving.
curb, and set the parking brake. steering control when braking very
hard. Braking System Design
Make sure the parking brake is The hydraulic system that operates
fully released before driving away. Resting your foot on the pedal keeps the brakes has two separate circuits.
Driving with the parking brake the brakes applied lightly, builds up Each circuit works diagonally across
partially set can overheat or heat, and reduces their effectiveness. the vehicle (the left-front brake is
Driving
damage the rear brakes. It also keeps your brake lights on all connected with the right-rear brake,
the time, confusing drivers behind etc.). If one circuit should develop a
you. problem, you will still have braking
at two wheels.
Constant application of the brakes
when going down a long hill builds Brake Pad Wear Indicators
up heat and reduces their effective- If the brake pads need replacing, you
ness. Use the engine to assist the will hear a distinctive, metallic
brakes by taking your foot off the screeching sound when you apply
accelerator and downshifting to a the brake pedal. If you do not have
lower gear. the brake pads replaced, they will
screech all the time. It is normal for
the brakes to occasionally squeal or
squeak when you apply them.
207

０６／０４／２８１４：４０：００３１ＳＪＣ６１００２１３
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
The anti-lock brake system (ABS) You will feel a pulsation in the brake ABS Indicator
helps prevent the brakes from pedal when the ABS activates, and
locking up, and helps you retain you may hear some noise. This is If this indicator comes on, the anti-
steering control by pumping the normal: it is the ABS rapidly lock function of the braking system
brakes rapidly, much faster than a pumping the brakes. On dry has shut down. The brakes still work
person can do it. pavement, you will need to press on like a conventional system, but
the brake pedal very hard before the without anti-lock. You should have
The ABS also balances the front-to- ABS activates. However, you may your dealer inspect your vehicle as
rear braking distribution according feel the ABS activate immediately if soon as possible.
to vehicle loading. you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
If the indicator comes on while
You should never pump the brake pedal. driving, test the brakes as instructed
Let the ABS work for you by always on page 290 .
keeping firm, steady pressure on the
brake pedal. This is sometimes
referred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’
208

０６／０４／２８１４：４０：０７３１ＳＪＣ６１００２１４
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)
If the ABS indicator and the brake Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require a
system indicator come on together ABS does not reduce the time or longer distance to stop on loose or
and the parking break is fully distance it takes to stop the uneven surfaces, such as gravel or
released, the front-to-rear braking vehicle. It only helps with the snow, than a vehicle without anti-
distribution system may also shut steering control during braking. lock. Slow down, and allow a greater
down. distance between vehicles under
ABS will not prevent a skid that those conditions.
Test your brakes as instructed on results from changing direction
page 290 . If the brakes feel normal, abruptly, such as trying to take a
drive slowly and have your vehicle corner too fast or making a sudden
repaired by your dealer as soon as lane change. Always drive at a safe
possible. Avoid sudden hard braking speed for the road and weather
Driving
which could cause the rear wheels to conditions.
lock up and possibly lead to a loss of
control. ABS cannot prevent a loss of
stability. Always steer moderately
The VSA indicator will come on when you are braking hard. Severe
along with the ABS indicator. or sharp steering wheel movement
can still cause your vehicle to veer
into oncoming traffic or off the road.
209

０６／０４／２８１４：４０：１６３１ＳＪＣ６１００２１５
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
The vehicle stability assist (VSA) VSA Activation Indicator If the indicator does not come on
system helps to stabilize the vehicle when the ignition switch is turned to
during cornering if the vehicle turns When VSA activates, you will see the the ON (II) position, there may be a
more or less than desired. It also VSA activation indicator blink (see problem with the VSA system. Have
assists you in maintaining traction page 67 ). your dealer inspect your vehicle as
while accelerating on loose or soon as possible.
slippery road surfaces. It does this Vehicle Stability Assist
by regulating the engine’s output and (VSA) System Indicator If the low tire pressure indicator
by selectively applying the brakes. If this indicator comes on while comes on (see page 204 ), the VSA
driving, pull to the side of the road system automatically turns on even if
When VSA activates, you may notice when it is safe, and turn off the you turn it off with the VSA OFF
that the engine does not respond to engine. Reset the system by button.
the accelerator in the same way it restarting the engine. If the VSA
does at other times. There may also system indicator stays on, or comes Without VSA, your vehicle will have
be some unusual noise from the back on while driving, have the VSA normal braking and cornering ability,
modulator. You will also see the VSA system inspected by your dealer. but it will not have VSA traction and
activation indicator blink. stability enhancement.
The VSA system cannot enhance the

vehicle’s driving stability in all
situations and does not control your
vehicle’s entire braking system. It is
still your responsibility to drive and
corner at reasonable speeds and to
leave a sufficient margin of safety.
210

０６／０４／２８１４：４０：２４３１ＳＪＣ６１００２１６
Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System
VSA Off Switch VSA and Tire Sizes

In certain unusual conditions when Driving with varying tire or wheel
your vehicle gets stuck in shallow sizes may cause the VSA to
mud or fresh snow, it may be easier malfunction. When replacing tires,
to free it with the VSA temporarily make sure they are of the same size
switched off. When the VSA system and type as your original tires (see
is off, the traction control system is page 269 ).
also off. You should only attempt to
free your vehicle with the VSA off if If you install winter tires, make sure
you are not able to free it when the they are the same size as those that
VSA is on. were originally supplied with your
vehicle. Exercise the same caution
Driving
Immediately after freeing your during winter driving as you would if
vehicle, be sure to switch the VSA on This switch is above the parking your vehicle was not equipped with
again. We do not recommend driving brake release handle. Press it to turn VSA.
your vehicle with the VSA and the VSA system on and off.
traction control systems switched off.
When VSA is off, the VSA activation
indicator comes on as a reminder.
VSA is turned on every time you

start the engine, even if you turned it
off the last time you drove the
vehicle.
211

０６／０４／２８１４：４０：３３３１ＳＪＣ６１００２１７
Towing Weight Limits
Your vehicle has been designed to Load Limits

tow a trailer, as well as carrying
passengers and their cargo. To
safety tow a trailer, you should
carefully observe the load limits (see
page 187 ), use the proper equipment,
and follow the guidelines in this
section.
Be sure to read the Off-Highway

Driving Guidelines section on page
227 if you plan to tow off paved
surfaces.
Total Trailer Weight Tongue Load

The maximum weight of the trailer The weight that the tongue of a fully-
Exceeding any load limit or and everything in or on it depends on loaded trailer puts on the hitch
improperly loading your vehicle the number of occupants in your should follow the recommended load
and trailer can cause a crash in vehicle and the type of trailer being guidelines (see page 214 ). Too
which you can be seriously hurt towed (see page 214 ). much tongue load reduces front-tire
or killed. traction and steering control. Too
Towing a load that is too heavy can little tongue load can make the
Check the loading of your seriously affect your vehicle’s trailer unstable and cause it to sway.
vehicle and trailer carefully handling and performance.
before starting to drive.
212

０６／０４／２８１４：４０：４１３１ＳＪＣ６１００２１８
Towing Weight Limits
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Estimating Loads

(GVWR) − The maximum The best way to confirm that all
allowable weight of the vehicle, all loads are within limits is to check
occupants, all accessories, all cargo, them at a public scale (see page
and the tongue load is 6,050 lbs 212 ).
(2,745 kg).
To help ensure a safe drive to a scale,
Gross Axle Weight Rating or if you cannot get to a public scale,
(GAWR) − The maximum we recommend that you estimate
allowable weight on the vehicle axles your total trailer weight and tongue
is 3,105 lbs (1,410 kg) on the front load as described.
axle, and 3,245 lbs (1,475 kg) on the
Driving
rear axle. To Estimate the Total Trailer Weight
Add the weight of your trailer (as
Gross Combined Weight Rating quoted by the manufacturer) with
(GCWR) − The maximum everything in or on the trailer. Then
allowable weight of the fully loaded check the tables on page 214 to
vehicle and trailer is 10,088 lbs make sure you do not exceed the
(4,575 kg) with the proper hitch. limit for your conditions.
The GCWR must be reduced 2

percent for every 1,000 feet (305
meters) of elevation.
213

０６／０４／２８１４：４０：４７３１ＳＪＣ６１００２１９
Towing Weight Guidelines
Total Trailer Weight and Tongue Load Guidelines:
Number of Max. Trailer Weight Max. Tongue Load＊＊

Occupants＊
2 5000 lbs (2268 kg) 600 lbs (272 kg)
3 4750 lbs (2155 kg) 600 lbs (272 kg)
4 4750 lbs (2155 kg) 570 lbs (258 kg)
5 4500 lbs (2041 kg) 516 lbs (234 kg)
＊
The corresponding weight limits assume occupants fill seats from the front of the vehicle to the back, each occupant weighs 150 lbs (70 kg),
and each has 15 lbs (7 kg) of cargo in the cab, pickup bed, or In-Bed Trunk. Any additional weight, including cargo or accessories, reduces
the maximum trailer weight and maximum tongue load. Never exceed the gross axle weight ratings (see page 213 ).
＊＊
Recommended tongue load should be 5−15% of the total trailer weight for boat trailers, and 10−15% of the total trailer weight for all other
trailers.
214

０６／０４／２８１４：４０：５８３１ＳＪＣ６１００２２０
Towing a Trailer
Checking Loads
To accurately check your loads at
the public scale, the vehicle and
trailer should be fully loaded, and all
occupants should stay in the vehicle
while the attendant watches the
scale.
2. Check the gross vehicle weight. 5. Check the gross combined weight.
Limit: 6,050 lbs (2,745 kg) Limit: 10,088 lbs (4,575 kg)
Remember, maximum gross
Driving
3. Check the rear gross axle weight. combined weight should be
Limit: 3,252 lbs (1,475 kg) decreased 2 % for every 1,000 feet
(305 meters) of elevation.
4. If you cannot weigh the rear axle
1. Check the front gross axle weight. directly, you can calculate the rear
Limit: 3,105 lbs (1,410 kg) gross axle weight by subtracting
the weight in step 1 from the
weight in step 2.
Limit: 2,945 lbs (1,335 kg)
6. Check the weight of the hitched

trailer. Write this number down.
215

０６／０４／２８１４：４１：０７３１ＳＪＣ６１００２２１
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment and Hitch

Accessories All models except RTX
Towing generally requires a variety We strongly recommend that you
of supplemental equipment. To have your dealer install a class 3
ensure the best quality, we hitch. Using non-Honda equipment
recommend that you purchase may result in serious damage to your
Honda equipment whenever possible. vehicle.
Your dealer offers an optional trailer Read the trailer manufacturer’s

7. Check the weight of the unhitched package for models other than RTX. instructions, and select the
trailer. Limit: See page 212 . The package includes a hitch, a ball appropriate draw bar for the height
mount, and a wiring harness. of the trailer you will be towing.
8. Calculate the tongue load.
Subtract the weight in step 6 from Discuss any additional needs with Weight Distributing Hitch
the weight in step 7. your trailer sales or rental agency, A weight distributing hitch is not
Limit: See page 214 . and make sure all equipment is recommended for use with your
Recommended: See page 214 . properly installed, maintained, and vehicle, as an improperly adjusted
also meets state, federal, province, weight distributing hitch may reduce
and local regulations. handling, stability, and braking
performance.
216

０６／０４／２８１４：４１：１６３１ＳＪＣ６１００２２２
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Brakes A factory installed, 4-pin gray Use this illustration to identify each
Honda requires that any trailer with connector is located under the terminal in the trailer brake
a total trailer weight of 1,000 lbs (455 instrument panel near the top of the controller connector.
kg) or more have its own brakes. parking brake pedal. This connector
has all of the circuits required to ELECTRIC BRAKE BRAKE
There are two common types of install most electric trailer brake (BROWN/WHITE) (20A)
trailer brakes: surge and electric. controllers. A jumper harness to (BLUE)
Surge brakes are common for boat adapt your electric trailer brake
trailers, since the brakes will get wet. controller to the vehicle is included
with the optional Genuine Honda
If you choose electric brakes, be trailer hitch kit. To obtain a trailer
sure they are electronically actuated. hitch kit, see your dealer.
Driving
Do not attempt to tap into your
vehicle’s hydraulic system. No Have a qualified mechanic install GROUND STOP
matter how successful it may seem, your trailer brake controller (BLACK) (WHITE/BLACK)
any attempt to attach trailer brakes following the trailer brake controller
to your vehicle’s hydraulic system manufacturer’s instructions. Failure
will lower braking effectiveness and to properly install the trailer brake
create a potential hazard. controller may increase the distance
it takes for you to stop your vehicle
See your trailer manufacturer for when towing a trailer.
more information on installing
electric brakes.
CONTINUED
217

０６／０４／２８１４：４１：２４３１ＳＪＣ６１００２２３
Towing a Trailer
Safety Chains Spare Tires

Always use safety chains when you When towing a trailer, we
tow a trailer. Make sure the chains recommend that you carry a full-size
are secured to the trailer and hitch, spare wheel and tire for your vehicle
and that they cross under the tongue and trailer. See page 269 for proper
and can catch the trailer if it tire size, page 280 for how to store a
becomes unhitched. Leave enough full size wheel and tire, and page
slack to allow the trailer to turn 275 for information on changing a
corners easily, but do not let the flat tire.
chains drag on the ground.
Remember to unhitch the trailer
Sway Control before changing a flat. Ask your
This device is recommended if your trailer sales or rental agency where
trailer tends to sway. Your trailer and how to store the trailer’s spare
maker can tell you what kind of sway tire.
control you need and how to install it.
Trailer Mirrors
Many states and provinces require
special exterior mirrors when towing
a trailer. Even if they don’t, you
should install special mirrors if you
cannot clearly see behind you, or if
the trailer creates a blind spot.
218

０６／０４／２８１４：４１：３２３１ＳＪＣ６１００２２４
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Lights Since lighting and wiring vary with

trailer type and brand, you should
LEFT TURN SIGNAL RIGHT TURN SIGNAL also have a qualified mechanic install
AND BRAKE LIGHTS AND BRAKE LIGHTS a suitable connector between the
(GREEN/WHITE) (GREEN/RED)
vehicle and the trailer.
BACK-UP LIGHTS
TAILLIGHTS (BLUE)
(GREEN/BLACK)
GROUND GROUND
(BLACK) (BLACK)
ELECTRIC BRAKE ＋B CHARGE

(BROWN/WHITE) (GREEN)
Driving
Trailer lights and equipment must Refer to the above illustration for
comply with federal, state, province, wiring information.
and local regulations. Check trailer
light requirements for the areas We recommend that you have your
where you plan to tow, and use only dealer install a Honda wiring harness
equipment designed for your vehicle. and converter. This harness has
been designed for your vehicle.
Your vehicle is equipped with a
connector to install an optional trailer
lighting connector that mates with
your vehicle.
219

０６／０４／２８１４：４１：４２３１ＳＪＣ６１００２２５
Towing a Trailer
Towing Equipment Installing the Cover Installing the Ball Mount

On U.S. RTX model only
TRAILER HITCH
7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
4-PIN TRAILER
CONNECTOR
HITCH PIN
CLIP
TRAILER HITCH COVER HITCH PIN BALL MOUNT

TRAILER HITCH
We recommend that you always use Install the ball mount before you tow
Your vehicle has a class 3 trailer the cover when you are not using the a trailer. Check for and remove
hitch as standard equipment. ball mount to keep dirt, mud, and foreign material inside of the trailer
snow from clogging the hitch. hitch before installing the ball mount.
The cover, the ball mount, the hitch
pin, the hitch pin clip, and the jumper To install the cover, slide it into the To install the ball mount, slide it into
harness are stored in the In-Bed opening at the end of the trailer the trailer hitch. Line up the holes in
Trunk. hitch. To remove the cover, pull it the trailer hitch with the holes in the
out and store it in a safe place. ball mount, then insert the hitch pin
Also see page 218 for trailer-related into the hole. Secure the hitch pin
information. with the hitch pin clip.
220

０６／０４／２８１４：４１：５３３１ＳＪＣ６１００２２６
Towing a Trailer
Connecting the Trailer Connectors 3. Insert the connector securely into

the socket.
COVER
LID RETAINING
TAB 4. Hook the retaining tab on the
inner side of the lid against the
RETAINING retaining tab of the connector to
TAB
prevent disconnection during 4-PIN TRAILER
operation. SOCKET CONNECTOR
SOCKET
7-PIN TRAILER
CONNECTOR
Driving
7-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR 4-PIN TRAILER CONNECTOR
The 7-pin trailer connector is needed The 4-pin trailer connector is also
for the trailer lights. To connect the needed for the trailer lights. To
connector, do this: connect the connector, do this:
1. Make sure the connector and the 1. Remove the socket cover, and
socket are free of dirt, moisture, attach it securely over the socket.
or other foreign material.
2. Insert the connector into the
2. Open the socket lid by pulling it up. socket securely to prevent
disconnection during operation.
CONTINUED
221

０６／０４／２８１４：４１：５８３１ＳＪＣ６１００２２７
Towing a Trailer
To disconnect the connectors, Important Precautions Electric current flows through the
reverse the connection steps, then Before you submerge the trailer electrical supply circuit only when
make sure the socket lid and hitch in water (such as at a boat the ignition switch is in the ON
socket cover are securely in place. ramp), make sure the connectors (II) position.
Avoid using excessive force when are removed and the socket lid Using the electrical supply circuit
disconnecting the connectors. and socket cover are securely in when the engine is at a stop or
place. Failure to do this will result idling can discharge the battery.
in electrical system problems.
After the connectors are

submerged in water, open the
socket lid and the socket cover to
drain them.
222

０６／０４／２８１４：４２：０６３１ＳＪＣ６１００２２８
Towing a Trailer
Trailer Connector Sockets Trailer Jumper Harness

＋B GROUND ELECTRIC BRAKE
SMALL CHARGE GROUND (BROWN/WHITE)
LIGHT (WHITE) (BLACK)
(BLACK)
(GREEN) BRAKE LIGHTS
RIGHT SMALL LIGHTS (WHITE/BLACK)
LEFT TURN/ (BROWN)
TURN/ STOP
STOP (BROWN) LEFT TURN/
(RED) STOP
(YELLOW) BRAKE
(20A)
GROUND BACK LIGHT RIGHT TURN/ (WHITE)
(WHITE) (YELLOW) ELECTRIC STOP
BRAKE
Driving
(GREEN)
7-PIN TRAILER SOCKET (BLUE) 4-PIN TRAILER SOCKET
Refer to the above illustrations for The trailer jumper harness is used to
wiring information. install the controller for the electric
trailer brakes. For more information,
see Trailer Brakes on page 217 .
223

０６／０４／２８１４：４２：１７３１ＳＪＣ６１００２２９
Towing a Trailer
Pre-Tow Checklist Your vehicle tires and spare are in Driving Safely With a Trailer
When preparing to tow, and before good condition and properly The added weight, length, and
driving away, be sure to check the inflated. height of a trailer will affect your
following: vehicle’s handling and performance,
The trailer tires and spare are in so driving with a trailer requires
The vehicle has been properly good condition and inflated as some special driving skills and
serviced, and the tires, brakes, recommended by the trailer techniques.
suspension, cooling system, and maker.
lights are in good operating For your safety and the safety of
condition. Towing performance can be others, take time to practice driving
affected by high altitude, high maneuvers before heading for the
The trailer has been properly temperature, or when climbing open road, and follow the guidelines
serviced and is in good condition. steep grades. Therefore, premium below.
fuel (premium unleaded gasoline
All weights and loads are within with pump octane number of 91 or Break-In Period
limits. higher) is recommended when Avoid towing a trailer during your
towing more than 3,500 lbs (1,590 vehicle’s first 600 miles (1,000 km).
The hitch, safety chains, and any kg).
other attachments are secure.
All items on and in the trailer are

properly secured and cannot shift
while you drive.
224

０６／０４／２８１４：４２：２７３１ＳＪＣ６１００２３０
Towing a Trailer
Towing Speeds and Gears Making Turns and Braking If you must stop when facing uphill,
Drive slower than normal in all Make turns more slowly and wider use the foot brake or parking brake.
driving situations, and obey posted than normal. The trailer tracks a Do not try to hold the vehicle in
speed limits for vehicles with trailers. smaller arc than your vehicle, and it place by pressing on the accelerator,
When towing a fixed-sided trailer can hit or run over something the as this can cause the automatic
(e.g., camper), do not exceed 55 mph vehicle misses. transmission to overheat.
(88 km/h). At higher speeds, the
trailer may sway or affect vehicle Allow more time and distance for When driving down hills, reduce
handling. braking. Do not brake or turn your speed, and use D3. Do not
suddenly as this could cause the ‘‘ride’’ the brakes. Remember, it
When towing a trailer on level roads trailer to jackknife or turn over. takes longer to slow down and
under normal driving conditions, do stop when towing a trailer.
Driving
not use D3. This will increase the Driving on Hills
automatic transmission fluid When climbing hills, closely watch Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting
temperature and may cause your temperature gauge. If it nears Crosswinds and air turbulence
overheating. the red (Hot) mark, turn the air caused by passing trucks can disrupt
conditioning off, reduce speed and, if your steering and cause trailer to
With heavy cargo on the pickup bed, necessary, pull to the side of the sway. When being passed by a large
your vehicle has a higher center of road to let the engine cool. vehicle, keep a constant speed, and
gravity. Drive more slowly and steer straight ahead. Do not try to
cautiously. Loading heavy cargo make quick steering or braking
could affect your vehicle’s handling corrections.
and performance.
CONTINUED
225

０６／０４／２８１４：４２：３６３１ＳＪＣ６１００２３１
Towing a Trailer
Backing Up 1. Turn the front wheels toward the Retrieving a Boat

Always drive slowly and have curb on a downhill, and away from If the vehicle’s tires slip when
someone guide you when backing up. the curb on an uphill. retrieving a boat from the water,
Grip the bottom of the steering wheel, shift to first gear, and turn on VTM-4
then turn the wheel to the left to get 2. With the foot brake fully pressed, lock (see page 203 ). Disengage
the trailer to move to the left. Turn have someone place wheel chocks VTM-4 lock as soon as the boat is
the wheel to the right to move the on the downhill side of the vehicle out of the water to prevent damage
trailer to the right. and trailer wheels. to the VTM-4 system.
Parking 3. Firmly apply the parking brake

When parking on level ground, before you put the transmission in
follow all normal precautions (see Park. This keeps the vehicle from
page 206 ) including putting the putting pressure on the parking
transmission in Park, and firmly mechanism in the transmission. It
setting the parking brake. also makes it easier to move the
shift lever out of Park when you
Do not park on an incline unless it is want to drive away.
unavoidable. If you must park on an
incline, follow the steps below to
help prevent the vehicle and trailer
from rolling and possibly injuring
someone.
226

０６／０４／２８１４：４２：４２３１ＳＪＣ６１００２３２
Off-Highway Driving Guidelines
General Information If you decide to drive on unpaved

Your vehicle has been designed roads, you will find that it requires
primarily for use on pavement. But somewhat different driving skills. Improperly operating this
its higher ground clearance and four- Your vehicle will also handle vehicle on or off-pavement can
wheel drive VTM-4 system allow you somewhat differently than it does on cause an accident or rollover in
to occasionally travel on unpaved pavement. Be sure to pay extra which you and your passengers
roads and surfaces. Your vehicle is attention to the precautions and tips could be seriously injured or
not designed for trailblazing, in this section, and get acquainted killed.
mountain climbing, or other with your vehicle before leaving the
challenging off-road activities. pavement. Follow all instructions and
guidelines in this owner’s
manual.
Driving
Keep your speed low, and
don’t drive faster than
conditions permit.
227

０６／０４／２８１４：４２：５１３１ＳＪＣ６１００２３３
Important Safety Precautions Remember Check Out Your Vehicle

To avoid loss of control or rollover, The route presents limits (too steep Before you leave the pavement, be
be sure to follow all precautions and or bumpy roads). You have limits sure to do all scheduled maintenance
recommendations. (driving skill and comfort). And your and service, and inspect your vehicle
vehicle has limits (traction, stability, for any problems. Pay special
Be sure to store cargo properly and power). attention to the condition of the tires,
and do not exceed your cargo load and check the tire pressures.
limits (see page 187 and 212 ). Driving off-highway can be
hazardous if you fail to recognize After you return to the pavement,
Be aware that a heavy load can limits and take the proper carefully inspect your vehicle to
reduce ground clearance and your precautions. make sure there is no damage that
ability to clear obstacles. could make driving it unsafe.
Recheck the condition of the tires
Whenever you drive, make sure and the tire pressures.
you and your passengers always
wear seat belts.
Keep your speed low, and never

go faster than the conditions allow.
It’s up to you to continually assess

the situation and drive within the
limits.
228

０６／０４／２８１４：４２：５９３１ＳＪＣ６１００２３４
Accelerating and Braking Avoiding Obstacles Driving on Slopes

For better traction on all surfaces, Your vehicle is not equipped with If you can’t clearly see all conditions
accelerate slowly and gradually build undercarriage guards to protect key or obstacles on a slope, walk the
up speed. If you try to start too fast components, so take care to avoid slope before you drive on it. If you
on wet soil, mud, snow, or ice, you rocks, tree stumps, and other have any doubt whether or not you
might not have enough traction to obstacles in your path. can safely drive on the slope, don’t
get underway, and you may dig do it. Find another route.
yourself a hole. Starting with the Because your vehicle has a higher
shift lever in second (2) gear will center of gravity than a conventional If you are driving up a hill and find
help you have a smoother start on passenger vehicle, driving a wheel that you cannot continue, do not try to
snow or ice. over a tall object, or allowing a wheel turn around. Your vehicle could roll
to drop into a deep hole, can cause over. Slowly back down the hill,
Driving
Keep in mind that you will usually your vehicle to tip or roll over. following the same route you took up
need more time and distance to the hill.
brake to a stop on unpaved surfaces.
Avoid hard braking. Do not ‘‘pump’’
the brakes; let the anti-lock braking
system pump them for you.
229

０６／０４／２８１４：４３：０９３１ＳＪＣ６１００２３５
Crossing a Stream The banks and surface under the If You Get Stuck
Before driving through water, stop, water provide good traction. The If you get stuck, and cannot get
get out if necessary, and make sure water may hide hazards such as unstuck with the VTM-4 system,
that: rocks, holes, or mud. engage the VTM-4 Lock (see page
203 ), and carefully try to go in the
The water is not deep enough to If you decide it is safe to drive direction (forward or reverse) that
cover your wheel hubs, axles, or through water, choose a suitable you think will get you unstuck. Do
exhaust pipe. You could stall and speed, and proceed without shifting, not spin the tires at high speeds. It
not be able to restart your engine. changing speeds, stopping, or will not help you get out and may
The water can also damage shutting off the engine. cause damage to the transmission or
important vehicle components. VTM-4 system.
Do not try to cross water at high
The banks are sloped so you can speeds, as this may cause severe If you are still unable to free yourself,
drive out. damage to the cooling system or your vehicle is equipped with front
result in loss of control. and rear tow hooks designed for this
The water is not flowing too fast. purpose (see page 297 ).
Deep rushing water can sweep you After driving through water, test
downstream. Even very shallow your brakes. If they got wet, gently
rushing water can wash the ‘‘pump’’ them while driving slowly
ground from under your tires and until they operate normally.
cause you to lose traction and
possibly roll over. If the water is deeper than the wheel
hubs, some additional service may
be required. This service is not
covered by your warranties.
230

０６／０４／２８１４：４３：１６３１ＳＪＣ６１００２３６
Use a nylon strap to attach your Towing a Trailer Off-Road

vehicle to the recovery vehicle, and You may safely tow a trailer off-road
carefully take out the slack in the if you follow these guidelines:
strap. Once the strap is tight, the
recovery vehicle should apply force. Do not exceed the trailer weight
Remember that the recovery vehicle or tongue limits (see page 214 ).
needs good traction to avoid
becoming stuck, too. Stay on smooth, level dirt roads,
and avoid driving in hilly terrain.
You should never use a jack to try to
get unstuck. Your vehicle could Allow extra room for starting,
easily slip off the jack and hurt you stopping, and turning.
Driving
or someone else.
Slow down if you encounter bumps
or other obstacles.
231

０６／０４／２８１４：４３：１８３１ＳＪＣ６１００２３７
232

０６／０４／２８１４：４３：２４３１ＳＪＣ６１００２３８
Maintenance
This section explains why it is Maintenance Safety ....................... 234

important to keep your vehicle well Maintenance Minder ..................... 235
maintained and how to follow basic Maintenance Record ..................... 243
maintenance safety precautions. Fluid Locations............................... 245
Adding Engine Oil ......................... 246
This section also includes Changing the Engine Oil and
instructions on how to read the Filter ............................................ 247
maintenance minder messages on Engine Coolant ............................... 249
the information display, a Windshield Washers ..................... 250
maintenance record, and instructions Automatic Transmission Fluid..... 251
for simple maintenance tasks you Rear Differential Fluid .................. 252
may want to take care of yourself. Transfer Assembly Fluid .............. 253
Brake Fluid ..................................... 253
If you have the skills and tools to Power Steering Fluid ..................... 254
Maintenance
perform more complex maintenance Timing Belt ..................................... 254
tasks on your vehicle, you may want Lights .............................................. 255
to purchase the service manual. See Cleaning the Seat Belts ................. 261
page 315 for information on how to Floor Mats ...................................... 261
obtain a copy, or see your dealer. Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 262
Wiper Blades .................................. 262
Wheels ............................................ 264
Tires ................................................ 265
Checking the Battery .................... 270
Vehicle Storage .............................. 272
233

０６／０４／２８１４：４３：３４３１ＳＪＣ６１００２３９
Maintenance Safety
All service items not detailed in this Injury from moving parts. Do
section should be performed by a not run the engine unless
certified technician or other qualified Improperly maintaining this instructed to do so.
mechanic. vehicle, or failing to correct a
problem before driving can
Important Safety Precautions cause a crash in which you can
To eliminate potential hazards, read be seriously hurt or killed. Failure to properly follow
the instructions before you begin, maintenance instructions and
and make sure you have the tools Always follow the inspection precautions can cause you to
and skills required. and maintenance be seriously hurt or killed.
Make sure your vehicle is parked recommendations and
on level ground, the parking brake schedules in this owner’s Always follow the procedures
is set, and the engine is off. manual. and precautions in this owner’s
manual.
To clean parts, use a commercially
available degreaser or parts Potential Vehicle Hazards
cleaner, not gasoline. Carbon Monoxide poison from Some of the most important safety
engine exhaust. Be sure there is precautions are given here. However,
To reduce the possibility of fire or adequate ventilation whenever you we cannot warn you of every
explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, operate the engine. conceivable hazard that can arise in
and flames away from the battery performing maintenance. Only you
and all fuel-related parts. Burns from hot parts. Let the can decide whether or not you
engine and exhaust system cool should perform a given task.
Wear eye protection and down before touching any parts.
protective clothing when working
with the battery or compressed air.
234

０６／０４／２８１４：４３：４１３１ＳＪＣ６１００２４０
Maintenance Minder
Your vehicle displays engine oil life Engine Oil Life Display The remaining engine oil life is
and maintenance service items on displayed on the engine oil life
the information display to show you display according to the table shown
when you should have your dealer do below.
engine oil replacement and indicated
maintenance service. Calculated Engine Displayed
Oil Life (%) Engine Oil Life (%)
Based on the engine operating 100 %−91 % 100 %
conditions and accumulated engine 90 %−81 % 90 %
revolutions, the onboard computer in 80 %−71 % 80 %
your vehicle calculates the remaining ENGINE OIL LIFE 70 %−61 % 70 %
engine oil life and displays it as a DISPLAY
MAINTENANCE MINDER
60 %−51 % 60 %
percentage. INDICATOR 50 %−41 % 50 %
40 %−31 % 40 %
Maintenance
To see the current engine oil life, 30 %−21 % 30 %
turn the ignition switch to the ON 20 %−16 % 20 %
(II) position, and press the SELECT 15 %−11 % 15 %
button repeatedly until the engine oil 10 %−6 % 10 %
life display appears (see page 70 ). 5 %−1 % 5%
0% 0%
CONTINUED
235

０６／０４／２８１４：４３：５０３１ＳＪＣ６１００２４１
Maintenance Minder
The message changes between

SERVICE and dUE SOON
repeatedly.
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM

MESSAGE MESSAGE
MAINTENANCE ITEM CODES MAINTENANCE ITEM CODES

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS
If the engine oil life is 15 percent or When the remaining engine oil life is
less, you will see ‘‘SERVICE dUE less than 5 percent, you will see a
SOON’’ message in the information The maintenance item code(s) ‘‘SERVICE dUE NOW’’ message
display every time you turn the indicate the main and sub items along with the same maintenance
ignition switch to the ON (II) required at the time of the oil change item code(s), every time you turn the
position. The maintenance minder (see page 242 ). ignition switch to the ON (II)
indicator will also come on, and the position.
maintenance item code(s) for other
scheduled maintenance items The message changes between
needing service will be displayed SERVICE and dUE NOW repeatedly.
below the message.
236

０６／０４／２８１４：４３：５７３１ＳＪＣ６１００２４２
Maintenance Minder
When you see this message, have

the indicated maintenance
performed by your dealer as soon as U.S.
possible.
NEGATIVE MILEAGE
Canada
NEGATIVE MILEAGE
If you still do not perform the
Maintenance
When the remaining engine oil life is indicated maintenance, you will see a
0 percent, you will see ‘‘SERVICE negative mileage, for example ‘‘34
PAST dUE’’ message every time you MI (54 KM)’’ with the message
turn the ignition switch to the ON ‘‘PAST dUE.’’ This negative mileage
(II) position. means that you should have
performed the indicated
The message changes between maintenance 34 miles (54
SERVICE and PAST dUE repeatedly. kilometers) ago. Immediately have
the indicated maintenance
performed, and make sure to reset
the display as described on page 238 .
CONTINUED
237

０６／０４／２８１４：４４：０５３１ＳＪＣ６１００２４３
Maintenance Minder
You can change the display to the Maintenance Main Items and Sub Resetting the Engine Oil Life
engine oil life display, or the Items Display
odometer and trip meter by pushing Your dealer will reset the display
the SELECT button on the after completing the required
instrument panel. maintenance service. You will see
MAINTENANCE MAIN ITEM
‘‘OIL LIFE 100 %’’ on the information
display the next time you turn the
position.
If maintenance service is done by

MAINTENANCE SUB ITEMS
someone other than your dealer,
reset the maintenance minder as
follows:
All maintenance items displayed in 1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON

the trip meter are in code. For an (II) position.
explanation of these maintenance
codes, see page 242 . 2. Press the SELECT button
repeatedly until the engine oil life
display or the service message is
displayed.
238

０６／０４／２８１４：４４：１１３１ＳＪＣ６１００２４４
Maintenance Minder
NO is shown. YES is shown.
3. Press the RESET button for about 4. Select the appropriate answer, 5. Select the ‘‘MAINT RESET ＞Y’’
Maintenance
10 seconds. You will see a ‘‘MAINT RESET ＞N’’ (NO) or (YES), and press and hold the
‘‘MAINT RESET’’ message. ‘‘MAINT RESET ＞Y’’ (YES) by RESET button again to reset the
pressing the SELECT button. engine oil life to ‘‘100.’’
‘‘＞N’’ or ‘‘＞Y’’ is displayed on the
outside temperature display.
239

０６／０４／２８１４：４４：１８３１ＳＪＣ６１００２４５
Maintenance Minder
Important Maintenance However, service at a dealer is not U.S. Vehicles:

Precautions mandatory to keep your warranties Maintenance, replacement, or
If you have the required service in effect. Maintenance may be done repair of emissions control
done but do not reset the display, or by any qualified service facility or devices and systems may be done
reset the display without doing the person who is skilled in this type of by any automotive repair
service, the system will not show the automotive service. Make sure to establishment or individual using
proper maintenance intervals. This have the service facility or person parts that are ‘‘certified’’ to EPA
can lead to serious mechanical reset the display as previously standards.
problems because you will no longer described. Keep all receipts as proof
have an accurate record of when of completion, and have the person According to state and federal
maintenance is needed. who does the work fill out the regulations, failure to perform
maintenance record. Check your maintenance on the items marked
Your authorized Honda dealer warranty booklet for more with ＃ will not void your emissions
knows your vehicle best and can information. warranties. However, all
provide competent, efficient service. maintenance services should be
We recommend the use of Honda performed in accordance with the
parts and fluids whenever you have intervals indicated by the
maintenance done. These are information display.
manufactured to the same high-
quality standards as the original
components, so you can be confident
of their performance and durability.
240

０６／０４／２８１４：４４：２６３１ＳＪＣ６１００２４６
Maintenance Minder
Owner’s Maintenance Checks Lights − Check the operation of

You should check the following the headlights, parking lights,
items at the specified intervals. If taillights, high-mount brake light,
you are unsure of how to perform and license plate lights monthly.
any check, turn to the appropriate See page 255 .
page listed.
Engine oil level − Check every

time you fill the fuel tank. See
page 182 .
Engine coolant level − Check the

radiator reserve tank every time
you fill the fuel tank. See page 182 .
Maintenance
Automatic transmission − Check
the fluid level monthly. See page
251 .
Brakes − Check the fluid level

monthly. See page 253 .
Tires − Check the tire pressure

monthly. Examine the tread for
wear and foreign objects. See page
265 . CONTINUED
241

０６／０４／２８１４：４４：３５３１ＳＪＣ６１００２４７
Maintenance Minder
Symbol Maintenance Main Items Symbol Maintenance Sub Items

A Replace engine oil＊1 2 Replace dust and pollen filter
B Replace engine oil＊1 and oil filter If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high
Inspect front and rear brakes concentrations of soot in the air from industry and from diesel-
Check parking brake adjustment powered vehicles, replace every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
Inspect these items: Inspect drive belt
Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and boots 3 Replace transmission and transfer fluid
Suspension components Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or
Driveshaft boots trailer towing results in higher transmission and transfer
Brake hoses and lines (including ABS) temperatures or frequently fully loaded. This requires
Maintenance Minder
All fluid levels and condition of fluids transmission and transfer fluid changes more frequently
Exhaust system＃ than recommended by the Maintenance Minder.
Fuel lines and connections＃ If you regulary drive your vehicle under these conditions, have
the transmission and transfer fluid changed every 30,000 miles
＊1 : If the message ‘ SERVICE DUENOW’’ does not appear more than 12 months (48,000 km).
after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year. 4 Replace spark plugs
Replace timing belt and inspect water pump
＃ : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty on page 240 . If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over 110°F,
43°C), in very low temperatures (under-20°F, -29°C), or towing a
NOTE: Independent of the maintenance messages in the information display, trailer, replace every 60,000 mile (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada)
replace the brake fluid every 3 years. Inspect valve clearance
Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km). 5 Replace engine coolant
Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy. 6 Replace VTM-4 rear differential fluid
Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds or
Symbol Maintenance Sub Items trailer towing results in higher level of mechanical (shear) stress
1 Rotate tires to fluid or frequently fully loaded. This requires differential fluid
2 Replace air cleaner element changes more frequently than recommended by the
If you drive in dusty conditions, replace Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under
every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). these conditions, have the differential fluid changed at
7,500 miles (12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).
242

０６／０４／２８１４：４４：４２３１ＳＪＣ６１００２４８
Maintenance Record
You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)
completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on your
vehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your Honda service history booklet.
Mileage Maintenance Signature Mileage Maintenance Signature

Performed Performed
Date Date
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
Maintenance
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
CONTINUED
243

０６／０４／２８１４：４４：４８３１ＳＪＣ６１００２４９
Maintenance Record
Mileage Maintenance Signature Mileage Maintenance Signature

Performed Performed
Date Date
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6 mi A B 1 2 3 4 5 6
km km
244

０６／０４／２８１４：４４：５２３１ＳＪＣ６１００２５０
Fluid Locations
ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK BRAKE FLUID

(Orange loop) (Gray cap)
WASHER FLUID
(Blue cap)
ENGINE
Maintenance
COOLANT
RESERVOIR
POWER STEERING AUTOMATIC

FLUID (Red cap)＊ TRANSMISSION
FLUID DIPSTICK
(Yellow loop)
＊: Under the gray cover RADIATOR CAP ENGINE OIL FILL CAP
245

０６／０４／２８１４：４５：００３１ＳＪＣ６１００２５１
Adding Engine Oil
ENGINE OIL FILL CAP Recommended Engine Oil Honda Motor Oil is the preferred
Oil is a major contributor to your 5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It is
engine’s performance and longevity. highly recommended that you use
Always use a premium-grade 5W-20 Honda Motor Oil in your vehicle for
detergent oil displaying the API optimum engine protection. Make
Certification Seal. This seal indicates sure the API Certification Seal says
the oil is energy conserving, and that ‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’
it meets the American Petroleum
Institute’s latest requirements. The oil viscosity or weight is
provided on the container’s label.
5W-20 oil is formulated for year-
round protection of your vehicle to
improve cold weather starting and
Unscrew and remove the engine oil fuel economy.
fill cap on the valve cover. Pour in
the oil slowly and carefully so you do
not spill any. Clean up any spills
immediately. Spilled oil could
damage components in the engine
compartment. Reinstall the engine
oil fill cap, and tighten it securely. API CERTIFICATION SEAL
Wait a few minutes, and recheck the
oil level on the engine oil dipstick.
Do not fill above the upper mark; you
could damage the engine.
Ambient Temperature
246

０６／０４／２８１４：４５：０９３１ＳＪＣ６１００２５２
Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
Synthetic Oil Changing the Engine Oil and

You may use a synthetic motor oil if Filter
it meets the same requirements Always change the oil and filter
given for a conventional motor oil: it according to the maintenance
displays the API Certification Seal, messages shown on the odometer
and it is the proper weight. You must and trip meter display. The oil and
follow the oil and filter change filter collect contaminants that can
intervals shown on the information damage your engine if they are not
display. removed regularly.
Engine Oil Additives Changing the oil and filter requires

Your vehicle does not require any oil special tools and access from WASHER DRAIN BOLT
additives. Additives may adversely underneath the vehicle. The vehicle
affect the engine or transmission should be raised on a service station- 2. Open the hood, and remove the
Maintenance
performance and durability. type hydraulic lift for this service. engine oil fill cap. Remove the oil
Unless you have the knowledge and drain bolt and washer from the
proper equipment, you should have bottom of the engine. Drain the oil
this maintenance done by a skilled into an appropriate container.
mechanic.
1. Run the engine until it reaches

normal operating temperature,
then shut it off.
CONTINUED
247

０６／０４／２８１４：４５：１８３１ＳＪＣ６１００２５３
Changing the Engine Oil and Filter
OIL FILTER 5. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, 9. Turn off the engine and let it sit
then reinstall the drain bolt. for several minutes, then check
Tighten the drain bolt to: the oil level on the dipstick. If
29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m) necessary, add more oil.
6. Refill the engine with the recom-

mended oil.
Improper disposal of engine oil can be
Engine oil change capacity harmf ul to the environment. If you
(including filter): change your own oil, please dispose of
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) the used oil properly. Put it in a sealed
container, and take it to a recycling
7. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. center. Do not discard it in a trash bin
3. Remove the oil filter, and let the Start the engine. The oil pressure or dump it on the ground.
remaining oil drain. A special indicator should go out within 5
wrench (available from your seconds. If it does not, turn off the
dealer) is required. engine, and check your work.
Make sure the oil filter gasket is 8. Let the engine run for several
not stuck to the engine block. If it minutes, then check the drain bolt
is, remove it before installing a and oil filter for leaks.
new oil filter.
4. Install a new oil filter according to

the instructions that come with it.
248

０６／０４／２８１４：４５：２５３１ＳＪＣ６１００２５４
Engine Coolant
Adding Engine Coolant Always use Honda Long-life Anti- If the reserve tank is completely
freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolant empty, you should also check the
is pre-mixed with 50 percent coolant level in the radiator.
antifreeze and 50 percent water.
Never add straight antifreeze or
plain water.
Removing the radiator cap
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not while the engine is hot can
available, you may use another cause the coolant to spray out,
major-brand non-silicate coolant as a seriously scalding you.
temporary replacement. Make sure it
is a high-quality coolant Always let the engine and
RESERVE TANK recommended for aluminum engines. radiator cool down before
Continued use of any non-Honda removing the radiator cap.
Maintenance
If the coolant level in the reserve coolant can result in corrosion,
tank is at or below the MIN line, add causing the cooling system to
coolant to bring it up to the MAX line. malfunction or fail. Have the cooling
Inspect the cooling system for leaks. system flushed and refilled with
Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as
possible.
CONTINUED
249

０６／０４／２８１４：４５：３６３１ＳＪＣ６１００２５５
Engine Coolant, Windshield Washers
3. The coolant level should be up to Windshield Washers

the base of the filler neck. Add Check the fluid level in the
coolant if it is low. windshield washer reservoir at least
monthly during normal use.
Pour the coolant slowly and
carefully so you do not spill any. The washer level indicator will come
Clean up any spill immediately; it on when the level is low (see page
could damage components in the 65 ).
engine compartment.
Fill the reservoir with a good-quality
4. Put the radiator cap back on, and windshield washer fluid. This
tighten it fully. increases the cleaning capability and
prevents freezing in cold weather.
5. Pour coolant into the reserve tank.
1. Make sure the engine and radiator Fill it to halfway between the MAX When you refill the reservoir, clean
are cool. and MIN marks. Put the cap back the edges of the windshield wiper
on the reserve tank. blades with windshield washer fluid
When the radiator and engine are on a clean cloth. This will help to
cool, relieve any pressure in the Do not add any rust inhibitors or condition them.
cooling system by turning the other additives to your vehicle’s
radiator cap counterclockwise, cooling system. They may not be
without pressing down. compatible with the coolant or
engine components.
2. Remove the radiator cap by
pushing down and turning
counterclockwise.
250

０６／０４／２８１４：４５：４４３１ＳＪＣ６１００２５６
Windshield Washers, Automatic Transmission Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid
Do not use engine antif reeze or a DIPSTICK

vinegar/water solution in the
windshield washer reservoir. Antif reeze
can damage your vehicle’s paint, while
a vinegar/water solution can damage
the windshield washer pump. Use only
commercially-available windshield
washer f luid. UPPER MARK
LOWER MARK
DIPSTICK
Maintenance
Check the fluid level with the engine 2. Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)
at normal operating temperature. from the transmission, and wipe it
with a clean cloth.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
Start the engine and let it run until 3. Insert the dipstick all the way into
the radiator fan comes on, then the transmission securely as
shut off the engine. For accurate shown in the illustration.
results, wait about 60 seconds
before going to step 2, but do not 4. Remove the dipstick and check
wait longer than 90 seconds. the fluid level. It should be
between the upper and lower
marks. CONTINUED
251

０６／０４／２８１４：４５：５２３１ＳＪＣ６１００２５７
Automatic transmission Fluid, Rear Differential Fluid
5. If the level is below the lower 6. Insert the dipstick all the way back Rear Differential Fluid
mark, remove the fill plug, then in the transmission. The rear differential should be
add the fluid into the hole to bring drained and refilled with new fluid
it to the level between the upper If you are not sure how to add fluid, when this service is indicated by a
and lower marks. contact your dealer. maintenance message on the
information display. This service
Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so may be needed more often under
you do not spill any. Clean up any certain driving conditions (see page
spill immediately; it could damage 242 ).
components in the engine
compartment. Always use Honda VTM-4
Differential Fluid, and have your
Always use Honda ATF-Z1 dealer replace the rear differential
(automatic transmission fluid). If it’s fluid.
not available, you may use a
DEXRON III automatic
transmission fluid as a temporary
replacement. However, continued
use can affect the shift quality. Have
the transmission flushed and refilled
with Honda ATF-Z1 by your dealer
as soon as it is convenient.
252

０６／０４／２８１４：４６：００３１ＳＪＣ６１００２５８
Transfer Assembly Fluid, Brake Fluid
Transfer Assembly Fluid Brake Fluid

MAX
The transfer assembly should be Check the brake fluid level in the
drained and refilled with new fluid reservoir monthly.
when this service is indicated by a Replace the brake fluid according to
maintenance message on the the time recommendation in the
information display. maintenance minder schedule.
Always use Hypoid gear oil GL4 or Always use Honda Heavy Duty
GL5 with a viscosity of SAE 90 or Brake Fluid DOT 3. If it is not
80W-90, and have your dealer available, you should use only DOT 3
replace the transfer assembly fluid. or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealed
container, as a temporary MIN
replacement.
The fluid level should be between
Maintenance
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can the MIN and MAX marks on the side
cause corrosion and decrease the life of the reservoir. If the level is at or
of the system. Have the brake below the MIN mark, your brake
system flushed and refilled with system needs attention. Have the
Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid brake system inspected for leaks or
DOT 3 as soon as possible. worn brake pads.
Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not

compatible with your vehicle’s
braking system and can cause
extensive damage.
253

０６／０４／２８１４：４６：０９３１ＳＪＣ６１００２５９
Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt
Power Steering Fluid Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so Timing Belt
you do not spill any. Clean up any The timing belt should be replaced
COVER UPPER LEVEL spill immediately; it could damage at the intervals shown in the
components in the engine maintenance minder schedule.
compartment.
Replace the belt at 60,000 miles (U.S.)
Always use Honda Power Steering or 100,000 km (Canada) if you
Fluid. You may use another power regularly drive your vehicle in one or
steering fluid as an emergency more of these conditions:
replacement, but have the power
steering system flushed and refilled In very high temperatures
with Honda PSF as soon as possible. (over 110°F, 43°C).
LOWER LEVEL In very low temperatures
A low power steering fluid level can (under −20°F, −29°C).
Remove the cover, then check the indicate a leak in the system. Check Towing a trailer.
level on the side of the reservoir the fluid level frequently, and have
when the engine is cold. the system inspected as soon as
The fluid should be between the possible.
UPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.
If not, add power steering fluid to the
UPPER LEVEL mark, and put the
cover back in place. Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef t
or right lock and holding it there can
damage the power steering pump.
254

０６／０４／２８１４：４６：１８３１ＳＪＣ６１００２６０
Lights
Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight Bulb CONNECTOR HOLD-DOWN WIRE

The headlights were properly aimed Your vehicle has halogen headlight
when your vehicle was new. If you bulbs. When replacing a bulb, handle
regularly carry heavy items on the it by its base, and protect the glass
pickup bed or pull a trailer, from contact with your skin or hard
readjustment may be required. objects. If you touch the glass, clean
Adjustments should be done by your it with denatured alcohol and a clean
dealer or other qualified mechanic. cloth.
Halogen headlight bulbs get very hot WEATHER SEAL BULB

when lit. Oil, perspiration, or a scratch
on the glass can cause the bulb to 1. Remove the electrical connector
Maintenance
overheat and shatter. from the bulb by pulling the
connector straight back.
2. Remove the rubber weather seal

by pulling on the tab.
3. Unclip the end of the hold-down

wire from its slot. Pivot it out of
the way, and remove the bulb.
CONTINUED
255

０６／０４／２８１４：４６：２６３１ＳＪＣ６１００２６１
Lights
4. Install the new bulb into the hole, Replacing a Front Turn Signal/
making sure the tabs are in their Hazard/Parking Light Bulb
slots. Pivot the hold-down wire
back in place, and clip the end into 1. To change the passenger’s side
the slot. bulb, start the engine, turn the
steering wheel all the way to the
5. Install the rubber weather seal left, and turn off the engine. To
over the back of the headlight change the driver’s side bulb, turn
assembly. Make sure it is right the steering wheel to the right.
side up.
HOLDING CLIPS
6. Push the electrical connector onto
the new bulb. Make sure it is
connected securely. Turn on the 3. Remove the socket from the
headlights to test the new bulb. headlight assembly by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
4. Pull the bulb straight out of its

socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
2. Use a flat-tipped screwdriver to

remove the two holding clips from
the inner fender, and pull the inner
fender cover back.
256

０６／０４／２８１４：４６：３６３１ＳＪＣ６１００２６２
Lights
5. Insert the socket back into the Replacing Rear Bulbs

headlight assembly. Turn it
clockwise to lock it in place.
6. Turn on the lights to make sure

the new bulb is working.
7. Put the inner fender cover in place.

Install and lock each holding clip
by pushing on the center.
Maintenance
1. Drop open the tailgate. 4. Remove the socket by turning it
one-quarter turn counterclockwise.
2. Remove the two bolts, and remove
the rear light assembly from the 5. Remove the burned-out bulb by
rear pillar. pulling it straight out of the socket.
3. Determine which of the three

bulbs is burned out: brake/
taillight, turn signal/hazard light,
or back-up light.
CONTINUED
257

０６／０４／２８１４：４６：４６３１ＳＪＣ６１００２６３
Lights
6. Install the new bulb into the Replacing a High-mount Brake

socket. Light Bulb
7. Push the socket into the light

assembly, and turn it clockwise
until it locks.

9. Install the rear light assembly in

the rear pillar. Tighten the two
bolts securely.
LENS SEGMENT
1. Place a cloth on the edge of the 4. Remove the three mounting

lens segment. Remove each lens screws from the light assembly.
segment by carefully prying on its
edge with a small flat-tipped 5. Remove the lens from the light
screwdriver. assembly.
2. Remove the screw under each lens. 6. Pull the bulb straight out of its
socket. Push the new bulb straight
3. Pull the high-mount brake light into the socket until it bottoms.
assembly out of the vehicle.
258

０６／０４／２８１４：４６：５５３１ＳＪＣ６１００２６４
Lights
7. Put the lens back on the light Replacing a Rear License Plate
assembly, and tighten the Bulb
mounting bolts securely.

9. Put the light assembly back into

the vehicle. Install the screws and
tighten them securely.
Reinstall the lens segments.
Maintenance
1. Remove the license plate light 3. Pull the bulb straight out of its
assembly by pulling it towards you, socket. Push the new bulb straight
and then pulling the front edge into the socket until it bottoms.
upward.
2. Remove the socket from the light assembly, and turn it clockwise
assembly by turning it one-quarter until it locks.
turn counterclockwise.
CONTINUED
259

０６／０４／２８１４：４７：０４３１ＳＪＣ６１００２６５
Lights
5. Turn on the lights to make sure Replacing a Bed Light Bulb

6. Reinstall the light assembly in the

bumper.
1. Remove the mounting screw from 4. Pull the bulb straight out of its
the bed light assembly. socket. Push the new bulb straight
into the socket until it bottoms.
2. Pull out the light assembly.
3. Remove the socket from the light assembly, and turn it clockwise
assembly by turning it one-quarter until it locks.
turn counterclockwise.
260

０６／０４／２８１４：４７：１３３１ＳＪＣ６１００２６６
Lights, Cleaning the Seat Belts, Floor Mats
6. Reinstall the light assembly. Cleaning the Seat Belts Floor Mats
7. Turn on the lights to make sure LOOP

8. Reinstall the mounting screw, and

tighten it securely.
If your seat belts get dirty, use a soft The floor mats that came with your
Maintenance
brush with a mixture of mild soap vehicle hook over floor mat anchors.
and warm water to clean them. Do This keeps the floor mats from
not use bleach, dye, or cleaning sliding forward or backward and
solvents. Let the belts air-dry before possibly interfering with the pedals
you use the vehicle. or making the front passenger’s
weight sensors ineffective.
Dirt build-up in the loops of the seat
belt anchors can cause the belts to If you remove a floor mat, make sure
retract slowly. Wipe the insides of to re-anchor it when you put it back
the loops with a clean cloth in your vehicle.
dampened in mild soap and warm
water or isopropyl alcohol. CONTINUED
261

０６／０４／２８１４：４７：２０３１ＳＪＣ６１００２６７
Floor Mats, Dust and Pollen Filter, Wiper Blades
A non-Honda floor mat may not fit Dust and Pollen Filter Wiper Blades
your vehicle properly. This could This filter removes the dust and Check the condition of the wiper
prevent the proper operation of the pollen that is brought in from the blades at least every six months.
folding rear seats and the passenger’s outside through the heating and Replace them if you find signs of
seat weight sensors. We recommend cooling system/climate control cracking in the rubber, areas that are
using genuine Honda floor mats. Do system. getting hard, or if they leave streaks
not put additional floor mats on top and unwiped areas when used.
of the anchored mats. Have your dealer replace this filter
when this service is indicated by a To replace a wiper blade:
maintenance message on the
information display. It should be 1. To raise the wiper arm, turn the
replaced every 15,000 miles (24,000 ignition switch to the ON (II)
km) if you drive primarily in urban position and activate the wipers
areas that have high concentrations (see page 75 ). When the wipers
of soot in the air, or if the air flow are in the upright position, turn
from the heating and cooling the ignition switch off to stop the
system/climate control system wipers in that position.
becomes less than usual.
262

０６／０４／２８１４：４７：２７３１ＳＪＣ６１００２６８
Wiper Blades
WIPER ARMS BLADE
LOCK TAB
2. Raise the wiper arm off the 3. Disconnect the blade assembly 4. Remove the blade from its holder
Maintenance
windshield. from the wiper arm by pushing in by grabbing the tabbed end of the
the lock tab. Hold the lock tab in blade. Pull up firmly until the tabs
while you push the blade assembly come out of the holder.
toward the base of the arm.
Do not open the hood when the wiper
arms are raised, or you will damage the
hood and the wiper arms.
CONTINUED
263

０６／０４／２８１４：４７：３６３１ＳＪＣ６１００２６９
Wiper Blades, Wheels
BLADE 6. Slide the new wiper blade into the Wheels

holder until the tabs lock. Clean the wheels as you would the
rest of the exterior. Wash them with
7. Slide the wiper blade assembly the same solution, and rinse them
onto the wiper arm. Make sure it thoroughly.
locks in place.
If equipped
8. Lower the wiper arm against the Aluminum alloy wheels have a
window. protective clear-coat that keeps
the aluminum from corroding and
9. Turn the ignition switch to the ON tarnishing. Cleaning the wheels
REINFORCEMENT (II) position, and turn the wiper with harsh chemicals (including
switch off to return the wiper arms some commercial wheel cleaners)
5. Examine the new wiper blades. If to the parked position. or a stiff brush can damage the
they have no plastic or metal clear-coat. To clean the wheels,
reinforcement along the back use a mild detergent and a soft
edge, remove the metal brush or sponge.
reinforcement strips from the old
wiper blade, and install them in
the slots along the edge of the new
blade.
264

０６／０４／２８１４：４７：４５３１ＳＪＣ６１００２７０
Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your Inflation Guidelines Even though your vehicle is
tires must be the proper type and Keeping the tires properly inflated equipped with TPMS, we
size, in good condition with adequate provides the best combination of recommend that you visually check
tread, and correctly inflated. handling, tread life, and riding your tires every day. If you think a
comfort. tire might be low, check it
The following pages give more immediately with a tire gauge.
detailed information on how to take Underinflated tires wear unevenly,
care of your tires and what to do adversely affect handling and fuel Use a gauge to measure the air
when they need to be replaced. economy, and are more likely to pressure in each tire at least once a
fail from being overheated. month. Even tires that are in good
condition may lose 1 to 2 psi (10 to
Overinflated tires can make your 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) per
Using tires that are excessively vehicle ride more harshly, are month. Remember to check the
worn or improperly inflated can more prone to damage from road spare tire at the same time.
Maintenance
cause a crash in which you can hazards, and wear unevenly.
be seriously hurt or killed. Check the air pressures when the
The tire pressure monitoring system tires are cold. This means the
Follow all instructions in this (TPMS) warns you when a tire vehicle has been parked for at least 3
owner’s manual regarding tire pressure is low. See page 204 for hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6
inflation and maintenance. more information. km). Add or release air, if needed, to
match the recommended cold tire
pressures on page 266 .
CONTINUED
265

０６／０４／２８１４：４７：５８３１ＳＪＣ６１００２７１
Tires
If you check air pressures when the Never use a puncture-repairing agent Tire Inspection
tires are hot [driven for several miles in a flat tire. If used, you will have to Every time you check inflation, you
(kilometers)], you will see readings 4 replace the tire pressure sensor. should also examine the tires for
to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to 0.4 Have the flat tire repaired by your damage, foreign objects, and wear.
kgf/cm ) higher than the cold dealer as soon as possible.
readings. This is normal. Do not let You should look for:
air out to match the recommended Recommended Tire Pressures Bumps or bulges in the tread or
cold air pressure. The tire will be The following chart shows the side of the tire. Replace the tire if
underinflated. recommended cold tire pressures for you find either of these conditions.
most normal and high-speed driving
You should get your own tire conditions. Cuts, splits, or cracks in the side
pressure gauge and use it whenever of the tire. Replace the tire if you
you check your tire pressures. This Tire Size Cold Tire Pressure can see fabric or cord.
will make it easier for you to tell if a Front/Rear:
pressure loss is due to a tire problem P245/65R17 105S 32 psi (220 kPa , Excessive tread wear.
and not due to a variation between 2.2 kgf/cm )
gauges. Compact Spare 60 psi (420 kPa ,
T165/90R17 105M 4.2 kgf/cm )
While tubeless tires have some
ability to self-seal if they are For convenience, the recommended
punctured, you should look closely tire sizes and cold tire pressures are
for punctures if a tire starts losing on a label on the driver’s doorjamb.
pressure.
For additional information about
your tires, see page 306 .
266

０６／０４／２８１４：４８：１２３１ＳＪＣ６１００２７２
Tires
INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation

In addition to proper inflation,
correct wheel alignment helps to Front Front
decrease tire wear. If you find a tire
is worn unevenly, have your dealer
check the wheel alignment.
Have your dealer check the tires if

you feel a consistent vibration while
driving. A tire should always be
rebalanced if it is removed from the
TREAD WEAR INDICATORS wheel. When you have new tires (For Non-directional (For Directional
installed, make sure they are Tires and Wheels) Tires and Wheels)
Your tires have wear indicators balanced. This increases riding
Maintenance
molded into the tread. When the comfort and tire life. For best results, To help increase tire life and
tread wears down, you will see a have the installer perform a dynamic distribute wear more evenly, rotate
band 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide band balance. the tires according to the
across the tread. This shows there is maintenance messages displayed on
less than 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread the information display. Move the
left on the tire. tires to the positions shown in the
On vehicles with aluminum wheels, diagram each time they are rotated.
A tire this worn gives very little improper wheel weights can damage If you purchase directional tires,
traction on wet roads. You should your vehicle’s wheels. Use only Honda rotate only front-to-back.
replace the tire if you can see three wheel weights f or balancing.
or more tread wear indicators.
267

０６／０４／２８１４：４８：２０３１ＳＪＣ６１００２７３
Tires
Replacing Tires and Wheels It is best to replace all four tires at

Replace your tires with radial tires of the same time. If that is not possible
the same size, load range, speed or necessary, replace the two front Installing improper tires on your
rating, and maximum cold tire tires or two rear tires as a pair. vehicle can affect handling and
pressure rating (as shown on the Replacing just one tire can seriously stability. This can cause a crash
tire’s sidewall). affect your vehicle’s handling. in which you can be seriously
hurt or killed.
Mixing radial and bias-ply tires on If you ever replace a wheel, make
your vehicle can reduce braking sure that the wheel’s specifications Always use the size and type of
ability, traction, and steering match those of the original wheels. tires recommended in this
accuracy. Using tires of a different owner’s manual.
size or construction can cause the Also be sure you use only TPMS
ABS and vehicle stability assist specific wheels. If you do not, the
system (VSA) to work inconsistently. tire pressure monitoring system will
not work on that tire.
The ABS works by comparing the
speed of the wheels. When replacing Replacement wheels are available at
tires, use the same size originally your dealer.
supplied with the vehicle. Tire size
and construction can affect wheel
speed and may cause the system to
activate.
268

０６／０４／２８１４：４８：３２３１ＳＪＣ６１００２７４
Tires
Wheel and Tire Specifications Snow Tires Premium Cobra Cable Chain
Wheels: If you mount snow tires on your ＃1046P with accessory
17 x 7 1/2 J vehicle, make sure they are radial adjusters＊
tires of the same size and load range
Tires: as the original tires. Mount snow tires This tire chain is available at many
P245/65R17 105S on all four wheels. The traction auto supply stores. To find a local
provided by snow tires on dry roads store that carries the chain, call
See page 304 for DOT tire quality may be lower than your original tires. Quality Chain Corp at 1-800-843-8824.
grading information, and page Check with the tire dealer for To order the tire chain online, go to
306 for tire size information. maximum speed recommendations. www.chainquest.com, and enter your
vehicle information. When you install
Winter Driving Tire Chains the chains, follow the manufacturer’s
Tires marked ‘‘M ＋ S’’ or ‘‘All Mount tire chains on your tires when instructions, and mount them as
Season’’ on the sidewall have an all- required by driving conditions or tightly as you can. Drive slowly with
Maintenance
weather tread design suitable for local laws. Install them only on the the chains installed.
most winter driving conditions. front tires. Do not use chains on the
＊
rear tires. Rubber chain adjusters, or
For the best performance in snowy tensioners, must be used to
or icy conditions, you should install Because your vehicle has limited tire prevent the chains from
snow tires or tire chains. They may clearance, we strongly recommend contacting the body or the chassis.
be required by local laws under using this Quality Chain Corp. tire
certain conditions. chain:
CONTINUED
269

０６／０４／２８１４：４８：３８３１ＳＪＣ６１００２７５
Tires, Checking the Battery
Checking the Battery
Using the wrong chains, or not Traction devices that are the wrong TEST INDICATOR WINDOW
properly installing chains, can size or improperly installed can
damage the brake lines and damage your vehicle’s brake lines,
cause a crash in which you can suspension, body, and wheels. Stop
be seriously injured or killed. driving if they are hitting any part of
the vehicle.
Follow all instructions in this
owner’s manual regarding the
selection and use of tire chains.
If you ever hear the chains

contacting the body or chassis, stop Check the condition of the battery
and investigate. If the chains have monthly by looking at the test
loosened, retighten them. Make sure indicator window. The label on the
they do not contact the brake lines battery explains the test indicator’s
or suspension. colors.
Remove the chains as soon as you

begin driving on cleared roads.
270

０６／０４／２８１４：４８：４６３１ＳＪＣ６１００２７６
Checking the Battery
Check the terminals for corrosion (a If you need to connect the battery to If your vehicle’s battery is
white or yellowish powder). To a charger, disconnect both cables to disconnected or goes dead, the audio
remove it, cover the terminals with a prevent damaging your vehicle’s system will disable itself. The next
solution of baking soda and water. It electrical system. Always disconnect time you turn on the radio you will
will bubble up and turn brown. When the negative (−) cable first, and see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency display.
this stops, wash it off with plain reconnect it last. Use the preset bars to enter the code
water. Dry off the battery with a (see page 162 ).
cloth or paper towel. Coat the
terminals with grease to help prevent On vehicles with navigation system
future corrosion. The battery gives off explosive The navigation system will also
hydrogen gas during normal disable itself. The next time you turn
If additional battery maintenance is operation. on the ignition switch, the system
needed, see your dealer or a will require you to enter a PIN
qualified technician. A spark or flame can cause the before it can be used. Refer to the
Maintenance
battery to explode with enough navigation system manual.
WARNING: Battery posts, force to kill or seriously hurt you.
terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wear protective clothing and a
Wash your hands after handling. face shield, or have a skilled
technician do the battery
maintenance.
271

０６／０４／２８１４：４８：５６３１ＳＪＣ６１００２７７
Vehicle Storage
If you need to park your vehicle for Block the rear wheels. Cover the vehicle with a
an extended period (more than 1 ‘‘breathable’’ cover, one made
month), there are several things you If the vehicle is to be stored for a from a porous material such as
should do to prepare it for storage. longer period, it should be cotton. Non-porous materials, such
Proper preparation helps prevent supported on jackstands so the as plastic sheeting, trap moisture,
deterioration and makes it easier to tires are off the ground. which can damage the paint.
get your vehicle back on the road. If
possible, store your vehicle indoors. Leave one window open slightly (if If possible, periodically run the
the vehicle is being stored engine until it reaches full
Fill the fuel tank. indoors). operating temperature (the
cooling fans cycle on and off
Change the engine oil and filter. Disconnect the battery. twice). Preferably, do this once a
month.
Wash and dry the exterior Support the front wiper blade
completely. arms with a folded towel or rag so
they do not touch the windshield.
Clean the interior. Make sure the
carpeting, floor mats, etc., are To minimize sticking, apply a
completely dry. silicone spray lubricant to all door,
In-Bed Trunk lid, and tailgate seals.
Leave the parking brake off. Put Also, apply a vehicle body wax to
the transmission in Park. the painted surfaces that mate
with the door, In-Bed Trunk lid
and tailgate seals.
272

０６／０４／２８１４：４８：５９３１ＳＪＣ６１００２７８
Taking Care of the Unexpected
This section covers the more Compact Spare Tire....................... 274

common problems that motorists Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 275
experience with their vehicles. It If the Engine Won’t Start .............. 283
gives you information about how to Jump Starting ................................. 284
safely evaluate the problem and what If the Engine Overheats ............... 286
to do to correct it. If the problem has Low Oil Pressure Indicator .......... 288
stranded you on the side of the road, Charging System Indicator........... 288
you may be able to get going again. Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........ 289
If not, you will also find instructions Brake System Indicator ................ 290
on getting your vehicle towed. Fuses ............................................... 291
Fuse Locations ............................... 294
Emergency Towing ....................... 296
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck ........... 297
273

０６／０４／２８１４：４９：０８３１ＳＪＣ６１００２７９
Compact Spare Tire
Use the compact spare tire as a Do not mount snow chains on a INDICATOR LOCATION MARK
temporary replacement only. Get compact spare.
your regular tire repaired or replaced,
and put it back on your vehicle as Do not use the compact spare tire
soon as you can. if you are towing a trailer.
Check the inflation pressure of the Do not use your compact spare
compact spare tire every time you tire on another vehicle unless it is
check the other tires. It should be the same make and model.
inflated to:
60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm ) Driving with the compact spare
tire may activate the TPMS (see TREAD WEAR INDICATOR BAR
Follow these precautions: page 205 ). The TPMS does not
monitor compact spare tire Replace the tire when you can see
Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). pressure. the tread wear indicator bars. The
replacement should be the same size
This tire gives a harsher ride and and design tire, mounted on the
less traction on some road same wheel. The spare tire is not
surfaces. Use greater caution designed to be mounted on a regular
while driving. wheel, and the spare wheel is not
designed for mounting a regular tire.
274

０６／０４／２８１４：４９：１５３１ＳＪＣ６１００２８０
Changing a Flat Tire
If you have a flat tire while driving,

stop in a safe place to change it.
Drive slowly along the shoulder until
you get to an exit or an area to stop
that is far away from the traffic lanes.
The vehicle can easily roll off

the jack, seriously injuring
anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for

changing a tire exactly, and TOOL BOX
never get under the vehicle
when it is supported only by the SPARE TIRE

jack.
1. Park the vehicle on firm, level, and 2. Turn on the hazard warning lights,
non-slippery ground. Put the and turn the ignition switch to the
If you tow a trailer frequently, we transmission in Park. Apply the LOCK (0) position. Have all
recommend that you use a regular parking brake. passengers get out of the vehicle
tire as a spare. You can store the If you are towing a trailer, unhitch while you change the tire.
regular size spare tire on the tire tray, it.
but store the tool kit at the side of
the In-Bed Trunk (see page 281 ),
and secure it. CONTINUED
275

０６／０４／２８１４：４９：２３３１ＳＪＣ６１００２８１
WING BOLT
TIRE TRAY HOLDING BOLTS TIRE

TRAY TOOL BOX STRAP
3. Open the In-Bed Trunk. 5. Pull out the tire tray with the 6. Unfasten the strap to remove the
handle, and hook the rear of the tool box, and unscrew the wing
4. Remove the two tire tray holding tire tray to the guides on the back bolt.
bolts. edge of the In-Bed Trunk.
7. Take out the compact spare tire.
If you are using a cargo net or a
cargo cover in the In-Bed Trunk,
remove it before pulling out the tire
tray.
276

０６／０４／２８１４：４９：３０３１ＳＪＣ６１００２８２
JACKING POINT DIAL
8. Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turn 9. Place the jack under the jacking 10.Turn the dial at the bottom of the
with the wheel nut wrench. point nearest the tire you need to jack clockwise until the top of the
change. jack contacts the jacking point.

Make sure the jacking point tab is
resting in the jack notch.
CONTINUED
277

０６／０４／２８１４：４９：３７３１ＳＪＣ６１００２８３
CONNECTOR BUTTON WHEEL NUT WRENCH

DIAL
HOOK
EXTENSION
STAY CONNECTOR BUTTON
11.Attach the stay to the extension, 12.Insert the hook at the end of the 13.Turn the jack dial (wheel nut
then attach the wheel nut wrench stay into the opening on the dial at wrench) clockwise as shown to
to the end of the extension. the bottom of the jack. raise the vehicle until the flat tire
is off the ground.
Make sure the stay, the extension,
and the wheel nut wrench are
securely attached.
278

０６／０４／２８１４：４９：４４３１ＳＪＣ６１００２８４
16.Put on the spare tire. Put the

wheel nuts back on finger-tight,
then tighten them in a crisscross
pattern with the wheel nut wrench
until the wheel is firmly against
the hub. Do not try to tighten the
wheel nuts fully.
17.Lower the vehicle to the ground,

WHEEL CAP and remove the jack.
BRAKE HUB
RT/LX model is shown.
14.Remove the wheel nuts and the 15.Before mounting the spare tire,
wheel cap (on RT and Canadian wipe any dirt off the mounting
LX models) then remove the flat surface of the wheel and hub with

tire. Handle the wheel nuts a clean cloth. Wipe the hub
carefully; they may be hot from carefully; it may be hot from
driving. Place the flat tire on the driving.
ground with the outside surface
facing up.
On RT and Canadian LX models

The wheel cap cannot be removed
without first removing the wheel
nuts. CONTINUED
279

０６／０４／２８１４：４９：５４３１ＳＪＣ６１００２８５
WING BOLT 23.Release the tire tray and slide it

back in place.
24.Tighten the tire tray holding bolts

securely.
For normal For spare

SPACER CONE tire tire
18.Tighten the wheel nuts securely in 20.Place the flat tire face up on the
the same crisscross pattern. Have tire tray.
the wheel nut torque checked at
the nearest automotive service 21.Remove the spacer cone from the
facility. wing bolt, turn it over, and put it
Tighten the wheel nuts to: back on the bolt.
94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)
22.Secure the flat tire by screwing
19.On RTX, RTS, RTL, and Canadian the wing bolt back into its hole.
EXL models
Remove the center cap from the
flat tire.
280

０６／０４／２８１４：５０：００３１ＳＪＣ６１００２８６
TOOL BOX
Loose items can be thrown out

of the vehicle in a crash and
could seriously injure the
occupants.
Store the wheel, jack, and tools

securely before driving.
27.Store the wheel cap or center cap

in the In-Bed Trunk. Make sure it
25.Store the jack and the tools in the does not get scratched or
tool box. damaged.

26.When storing the flat tire, place 28.Refer to Changing a Tire with
the tool box at the right side of the TPMS (see page 205 ).
In-Bed Trunk as shown.
281

０６／０４／２８１４：５０：１０３１ＳＪＣ６１００２８７
Securing a Spare Tire on the If you remove the spare tire from the
Pickup Bed pickup bed, reinstall the clip back
into its hole.
SPACER CONE
WING BOLT
As a temporary mounting location, 3. Place the spare tire on the pickup

you can secure a spare tire on the bed as shown.
pickup bed, if needed.
4. Place the spacer cone in the wheel
1. Remove the clip by pushing the hub, and secure the spare tire to
center of its top. the pickup bed with the wing bolt.
2. Remove the spare tire from the 5. Store or secure the tool box.
tire tray (see page 276 ).
282

０６／０４／２８１４：５０：２１３１ＳＪＣ６１００２８８
If the Engine Won’t Start
Diagnosing why the engine won’t Check the transmission interlock. If the headlights dim noticeably or
start falls into two areas, depending The transmission must be in Park go out when you try to start the
on what you hear when you turn the or neutral or the starter will not engine, either the battery is
ignition switch to the START (III) operate. discharged or the connections are
position: corroded. Check the condition of
Turn the ignition switch to the ON the battery and terminal connec-
You hear nothing, or almost (II) position. Turn on the tions (see page 270 ). You can
nothing. The engine’s starter headlights, and check their then try jump starting the vehicle
motor does not operate at all, or brightness. If the headlights are from a booster battery (see page
operates very slowly. very dim or do not come on at all, 284 ).
the battery is discharged. See
You can hear the starter motor Jump Starting on page 284 . The Starter Operates Normally
operating normally, or the starter In this case, the starter motor’s
motor sounds like it is spinning Turn the ignition switch to the speed sounds normal, or even faster
faster than normal, but the engine START (III) position. If the than normal, when you turn the
does not start up and run. headlights do not dim, check the ignition switch to the START (III)

condition of the fuses. If the fuses position, but the engine does not run.
Nothing Happens or the Starter are OK, there is probably
Motor Operates Very Slowly something wrong with the Are you using a properly coded
When you turn the ignition switch to electrical circuit for the ignition key? An improperly coded key will
the START (III) position, you do not switch or starter motor. You will cause the immobilizer system
hear the normal noise of the engine need a qualified technician to indicator in the instrument panel
trying to start. You may hear a determine the problem. See to blink rapidly (see page 81 ).
clicking sound, a series of clicks, or Emergency Towing on page 296 .
nothing at all.
Check these things: CONTINUED
283

０６／０４／２８１４：５０：３０３１ＳＪＣ６１００２８９
If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump Starting
Are you using the proper starting Jump Starting To Jump Start Your Vehicle:
procedure? Refer to Starting the Although this seems like a simple
Engine on page 196 . procedure, you should take several 1. Open the hood, and check the
precautions. physical condition of the battery.
Do you have fuel? Check the fuel In very cold weather, check the
gauge; the low fuel indicator may condition of the electrolyte. If it
not be working. seems slushy or frozen, do not try
A battery can explode if you do jump starting until it thaws.
There may be an electrical not follow the correct procedure,
problem, such as no power to the seriously injuring anyone
fuel pump. Check all the fuses nearby.
(see page 291 ). If a battery sits in extreme cold, the
Keep all sparks, open flames, electrolyte inside can f reeze.
If you find nothing wrong, you will and smoking materials away Attempting to jump start with a f rozen
need a qualified technician to find from the battery. battery can cause it to rupture.
the problem. See Emergency
Towing on page 296 . 2. Turn off all electrical accessories:
You cannot start your vehicle by heater, A/C, climate control, audio
pushing or pulling it. system, lights, etc. Put the
transmission in Park, and set the
parking brake.
284

０６／０４／２８１４：５０：３９３１ＳＪＣ６１００２９０
Jump Starting
5. If the booster battery is in another

vehicle, have an assistant start
that vehicle and run it at a fast idle.
6. Start the vehicle. If the starter

motor still operates slowly, check
that the jumper cables have good
metal-to-metal contact.
7. Once your vehicle is running,

BOOSTER disconnect the negative cable from
BATTERY your vehicle, then from the
booster battery. Disconnect the
The numbers in the illustration show 4. Connect the second jumper cable positive cable from your vehicle,
you the order to connect the jumper to the negative (−) terminal on then from the booster battery.
cables. the booster battery. Connect the

other end to the grounding strap Keep the ends of the jumper cables
3. Connect one jumper cable to the as shown. Do not connect this away from each other and any metal
positive (＋) terminal on your jumper cable to any other part of on the vehicle until everything is
vehicle’s battery. Connect the the engine. disconnected. Otherwise, you may
other end to the positive (＋) cause an electrical short.
terminal on the booster battery.
285

０６／０４／２８１４：５０：４５３１ＳＪＣ６１００２９１
If the Engine Overheats
The pointer of your vehicle’s 1. Safely pull to the side of the road.
temperature gauge should stay in Put the transmission in Park, and
the midrange under most conditions. Steam and spray from an set the parking brake. Turn off all
If it climbs to the red mark, you overheated engine can accessories, and turn on the
should determine the reason (hot seriously scald you. hazard warning indicators.
day, driving up a steep hill, etc.).
Do not open the hood if steam 2. If you see steam and/or spray
If the vehicle overheats, you should is coming out. coming from under the hood, turn
take immediate action. The only off the engine. Wait until you see
indication may be the temperature no more signs of steam or spray,
gauge climbing to or above the red then open the hood.
mark. Or you may see steam or
spray coming from under the hood. 3. If you do not see steam or spray,
leave the engine running, and
watch the temperature gauge. If
the high heat is due to overloading,
Driving with the temperature gauge the engine should start to cool
pointer at the red mark can cause down almost immediately. If it
serious damage to the engine. does, wait until the temperature
gauge comes down to the midpoint,
then continue driving.
286

０６／０４／２８１４：５０：５４３１ＳＪＣ６１００２９２
If the Engine Overheats
4. If the temperature gauge stays at 9. Start the engine, and set the
the red mark, turn off the engine. temperature to maximum heat
Removing the radiator cap (climate control to AUTO at
5. Look for any obvious coolant leaks, while the engine is hot can ‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to the
such as a split radiator hose. cause the coolant to spray out, radiator up to the base of the filler
Everything is still extremely hot, seriously scalding you. neck. If you do not have the
so use caution. If you find a leak, it proper coolant mixture available,
must be repaired before you Always let the engine and you can add plain water.
continue driving (see Emergency radiator cool down before Remember to have the cooling
Towing on page 296 ). removing the radiator cap. system drained and refilled with
the proper mixture as soon as you
6. If you do not find an obvious leak, can.
check the coolant level in the 8. Using gloves or a large heavy
radiator reserve tank. Add coolant cloth, turn the radiator cap 10.Put the radiator cap back on
if the level is below the MIN mark. counterclockwise, without pushing tightly. Run the engine, and watch
down, to the first stop. After the the temperature gauge. If it goes

7. If there was no coolant in the pressure releases, push down on back to the red mark, the engine
reserve tank, you may need to add the cap, and turn it until it comes needs repair (see Emergency
coolant to the radiator. Let the off. Towing on page 296 ).
engine cool down until the pointer
reaches the middle of the tempera- 11.If the temperature stays normal,
ture gauge, or lower, before check- check the coolant level in the
ing the radiator. radiator reserve tank. If it has
gone down, add coolant to the
MAX mark. Put the cap back on
tightly.
287

０６／０４／２８１４：５１：０３３１ＳＪＣ６１００２９３
Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System Indicator
Low Oil Pressure Indicator 1. Safely pull off the road, and shut Charging System Indicator
This indicator should never off the engine. Turn on the hazard If the charging system
come on when the engine is warning indicators. indicator comes on brightly
running. If it starts flashing or stays when the engine is running, the
on, the oil pressure has dropped very 2. Let the vehicle sit for a minute. battery is not being charged.
low or lost pressure. Serious engine Open the hood, and check the oil
damage is possible, and you should level (see page 182 ). An engine Immediately turn off all electrical
take immediate action. very low on oil can lose pressure accessories. Try not to use other
during cornering and other driving electrically operated controls such as
maneuvers. the power windows. Keep the engine
running; starting the engine will
Running the engine with low oil 3. If necessary, add oil to bring the discharge the battery rapidly.
pressure can cause serious mechanical level back to the full mark on the
damage almost immediately. Turn of f dipstick (see page 246 ). Go to a service station or garage
the engine as soon as you can saf ely get where you can get technical
the vehicle stopped. 4. Start the engine, and watch the oil assistance.
pressure indicator. If it does not go
out within 10 seconds, turn off the
engine. There is a mechanical
problem that needs to be repaired
before you can continue driving
(see Emergency Towing on page
296 ).
288

０６／０４／２８１４：５１：１１３１ＳＪＣ６１００２９４
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
If this indicator comes on If the indicator comes on repeatedly, If the battery in your vehicle has
while driving, it means one even though it may turn off as you been disconnected or gone dead,
of the engine’s emissions control continue driving, have the vehicle these codes are erased. It can take
systems may have a problem. Even checked by your dealer as soon as several days of driving under various
though you may feel no difference in possible. conditions to set the codes again.
your vehicle’s performance, it can
reduce your fuel economy and cause To check if they are set, turn the
increased emissions. Continued ignition switch to the ON (II)
operation may cause serious damage. If you keep driving with the position, without starting the engine.
malf unction indicator lamp on, you can The malfunction indicator lamp will
If you have recently refueled your damage your vehicle’s emissions come on for 20 seconds. If it then
vehicle, the indicator could come on controls and engine. Those repairs may goes off, the readiness codes are set.
due to a loose or missing fuel fill cap. not be covered by your vehicle’s If it blinks five times, the readiness
You will also see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL warranties. codes are not set. If possible, do not
CAP’’ message on the information take your vehicle for a state
display. Tighten the cap until it clicks The indicator may also come on with emissions test until the readiness

at least once. Tightening the cap will the ‘‘D’’ indicator. codes are set. Refer to State
not turn the indicator turn off Emissions Testing for more
immediately; it can take several days Readiness Codes information (see page 310 ).
of normal driving. Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readiness
codes’’ that are part of the on-board
diagnostics for the emissions
systems. In some states, part of the
emissions testing is to make sure
these codes are set. If they are not
set, the test cannot be completed.
289

０６／０４／２８１４：５１：１９３１ＳＪＣ６１００２９５
Brake System Indicator
U.S. Canada The brake system However, if the brake pedal does not If the ABS indicator and the VSA
indicator normally feel normal, you should take system indicator come on with the
comes on when immediate action. A problem in one brake system indicator, have your
you turn the ignition switch to the part of the system’s dual circuit vehicle inspected by your dealer
ON (II) position, and as a reminder design will still give you braking at immediately.
to check the parking brake. It will two wheels. You will feel the brake
stay on if you do not fully release the pedal go down much farther before
parking brake. the vehicle begins to slow down, and
you will have to press harder on the
If the brake system indicator comes pedal.
on while driving, the brake fluid level
is probably low. Press lightly on the Slow down by shifting to a lower
brake pedal to see if it feels normal. gear, and pull to the side of the road
If it does, check the brake fluid level when it is safe. Because of the long
the next time you stop at a service distance needed to stop, it is
station (see page 253 ). hazardous to drive the vehicle. You
should have it towed, and repaired as
If the fluid level is low, take your soon as possible. (See Emergency
vehicle to a dealer, and have the Towing on page 296 .)
brake system inspected for leaks or
worn brake pads. If you must drive the vehicle a short
distance in this condition, drive
slowly and carefully.
290

０６／０４／２８１４：５１：２７３１ＳＪＣ６１００２９６
Fuses
INTERIOR UNDER-HOOD (PRIMARY) UNDER-HOOD (SECONDARY)
NOTCH
The vehicle’s fuses are contained in The primary under-hood fuse box is Checking and Replacing Fuses
three fuse boxes. on the passenger’s side. The If something electrical in your
secondary fuse box is next to the vehicle stops working, check for a

The interior fuse box is on the brake fluid reservoir. To open them, blown fuse first. Determine from the
driver’s lower left side. To remove push the tabs as shown. chart on pages 294 and 295 , or the
the fuse box lid, put your finger in diagram on the fuse box lid, which
the notch on the lid, and pull it fuse or fuses control that device.
outward slightly, then pull it toward Check those fuses first, but check all
you and take it out of its hinges. the fuses before deciding that a
blown fuse is the cause. Replace any
blown fuses, and check if the device
works.
CONTINUED
291

０６／０４／２８１４：５１：３４３１ＳＪＣ６１００２９７
Fuses
FUSE BLOWN
BLOWN
FUSE PULLER
1. Turn the ignition switch to the 3. Check each of the large fuses in 4. Check the smaller fuses in the
LOCK (0) position. Make sure the the primary under-hood fuse box under-hood fuse boxes and all the
headlights and all other by looking through the side fuses in the interior fuse box by
accessories are off. window at the wire inside. pulling out each one with the fuse
Removing these fuses requires a puller provided in the primary
2 Remove the cover from the fuse Phillips-head screwdriver. under-hood fuse box.
box.
292

０６／０４／２８１４：５１：４１３１ＳＪＣ６１００２９８
Fuses
If you cannot drive the vehicle 6. If the replacement fuse of the

BLOWN without fixing the problem, and you same rating blows in a short time,
do not have a spare fuse, take a fuse there is probably a serious
of the same rating or a lower rating electrical problem in your vehicle.
from one of the other circuits. Make Leave the blown fuse in that
sure you can do without that circuit circuit and have your vehicle
temporarily (such as the accessory checked by a qualified technician.
power socket or radio).
If the driver’s power window fuse is
If you replace the blown fuse with a removed, the AUTO function of the
spare fuse that has a lower rating, it driver’s window will be disabled. To
might blow out again. This does not reset the AUTO function, see page
indicate anything wrong. Replace the 106 .
5. Look for a blown wire inside the fuse with one of the correct rating as
fuse. If it is blown, replace the fuse soon as you can. If the radio fuse is removed, the
with one of the spare fuses of the audio system will disable itself. The

same rating or lower. next time you turn on the radio you
will see ‘‘CODE’’ in the frequency
Replacing a f use with one that has a display. Use the preset bars to enter
higher rating greatly increases the the code (see page 162 ).
chances of damaging the electrical
system. If you do not have a
replacement f use with the proper
rating f or the circuit, install one with
a lower rating.
293

０６／０４／２８１４：５１：５３３１ＳＪＣ６１００２９９
Fuse Locations
PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 10 A Left Headlight Low Beam 13 20 A Horn, Stop
2 − Not Used 14 20 A Defroster
3 10 A Left Headlight High Beam 15 40 A Back Up, ACC
4 15 A Small Lights 16 15 A Hazard
5 10 A Right Headlight High Beam 17 40 A Option 1
6 10 A Right Headlight Low Beam 18 − Not Used
7 7.5 A Back Up 19 30 A Cooling Fan
8 15 A FI ECU (PCM) 20 30 A Condenser Fan
9 15 A DBW 21 40 A Heater Motor
10 − Not Used 22 40 A Seat
11 15 A Heated Seat＊ 120 A Battery
12 7.5 A MG Clutch 23 50 A ＋B IGI Main
SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX 50 A Power Window
24−28 − Spare Fuses
＊ : If equipped
No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected

1 (7.5 A) Back Light＊ 7 (20 A) Small Lights＊
2 20 A VSA FSR 8 (7.5 A) Stop/Turn Lights＊
3 40 A VSA MTR 9 (20 A) Charge＊
4 20 A VTM-4 10 7.5 A TPMS
5 15 A Front Accessory Sockets 11 (20 A) Moonroof ＊
6 (20 A) Electric Brake＊＊ : If equipped
294

０６／０４／２８１４：５２：００３１ＳＪＣ６１００３００
Fuse Locations
INTERIOR FUSE BOX No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected
1 7.5 A Bed Lights 18 15 A IG ACG
2 15 A IG Coil 19 15 A IG Fuel Pump
3 (10 A) Daytime Running Light＊ 20 7.5 A IG Washer
4 15 A LAF 21 7.5 A IG Meter
5 20 A Radio 22 10 A IG SRS
6 10 A Interior Lights 23 7.5 A IGP
7 7.5 A Back Up 24 20 A Left Rear Window
8 20 A Door Lock 25 20 A Right Rear Window
9 10 A Rear Accessory Socket 26 20 A Passenger’s Window
10 7.5 A OPDS 27 20 A Back Window
11 30 A IG, Wiper 28 20 A Driver’s Window
12 − Not Used 29 − Not Used
13 (10 A) Driver’s Power Seat Lumbar＊＊ 30 7.5 A IG HAC
14 (20 A) Driver’s Power Seat Sliding＊＊ 31 7.5 A IG VSA/ABS
15 − Not Used 32 7.5 A ACC

16 (20 A) Driver’s Power Seat Reclining＊＊ 33 (7.5 A) Not Used
17 − Not Used
＊ : Canadian models
＊＊ : If equipped
295

０６／０４／２８１４：５２：０９３１ＳＪＣ６１００３０１
Emergency Towing
If your vehicle needs to be towed, If, due to damage, your vehicle must With all four wheels on the ground,
call a professional towing service or be towed with all four wheels on the it is best to tow the vehicle no farther
organization. Never tow your vehicle ground, do the following: than 50 miles (80 km), and keep the
with just a rope or chain. It is very speed below 35 mph (55 km/h).
dangerous. Release the parking brake.
The only way you can safely tow Start the engine.
your vehicle is with flat-bed Shift to D for several seconds,
equipment. The operator will load then to N. The steering system can be damaged if
your vehicle on the back of a truck. Turn off the engine. the steering wheel is locked. Leave the
Any other method of towing will ignition switch in the ACCESSORY (I)
damage the drive system. When you position, and make sure the steering
contact the towing agency, inform wheel turns f reely bef ore you begin
them a flat-bed is required. Improper towing preparation will towing.
damage the transmission. Follow the
above procedure exactly. If you cannot
shif t the transmission or start the
Towing your vehicle with two tires on engine, your vehicle must be Trying to lif t or tow your vehicle by the
the ground will damage parts of the transported with the all f our wheels of f bumpers will cause serious damage.
4WD system. It should be transported the ground. The bumpers are not designed to
on a f lat-bed truck or trailer. support the vehicle’s weight.
296

０６／０４／２８１４：５２：１６３１ＳＪＣ６１００３０２
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,

mud, or snow, call a towing service
to pull it out (see the previous page). ‘‘Rocking’’ your vehicle between
f orward and reverse gear or revving up
the engine and allowing the wheels to
spin f reely at high speeds can damage
the automatic transmission. Use a tow
service to prevent transmission damage.
TIE DOWN
HOOK
REAR
TIE DOWN
HOOK
FRONT

For very short distances, such as
freeing the vehicle, you can use the
tie down hooks on the lower left of
the front and rear bumpers.
CONTINUED
297

０６／０４／２８１４：５２：２０３１ＳＪＣ６１００３０３
If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck
To avoid damage to your vehicle, use

the tie down hooks f or straight, f lat
ground towing only. Do not tow at an
angle. These hooks should not be used
f or open-road towing.
298

０６／０４／２８１４：５２：２４３１ＳＪＣ６１００３０４
Technical Information
The diagrams in this section give Identification Numbers ................. 300 Emissions Controls........................ 307
you the dimensions and capacities of Specifications ................................. 302 The Clean Air Act ...................... 307
your vehicle and the locations of the DOT Tire Quality Grading Crankcase Emissions Control
identification numbers. It also (U.S. Vehicles) ....................... 304 System..................................... 307
includes information you should Uniform Tire Quality Evaporative Emissions Control
know about your vehicle’s tires and Grading ................................... 304 System..................................... 307
emissions control systems. Treadwear .................................. 304 Onboard Refueling Vapor
Traction....................................... 304 Recovery ................................. 307
Temperature .............................. 305 Exhaust Emissions Controls .... 308
Tire Labeling .................................. 306 PGM-FI System ..................... 308
Ignition Timing Control
System................................. 308
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
(EGR) System .................... 308
Three Way Catalytic
Converter ............................ 308
Replacement Parts..................... 308
Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 309
State Emissions Testing ............... 310
299

０６／０４／２８１４：５２：２９３１ＳＪＣ６１００３０５
Identification Numbers
Your vehicle has several identifying

numbers in various places. VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The vehicle identification number

(VIN) is the 17-digit number your
dealer uses to register your vehicle
for warranty purposes. It is also
necessary for licensing and insuring
your vehicle. The easiest place to
find the VIN is on a plate fastened to
the top of the dashboard. You can
see it by looking through the
windshield on the driver’s side. It is
also on the certification label
attached to the driver’s doorjamb,
and is stamped on the engine
compartment bulkhead. The VIN is
also provided in bar code on the
certification label.
CERTIFICATION LABEL
300

０６／０４／２８１４：５２：３３３１ＳＪＣ６１００３０６
Identification Numbers
The engine number is stamped into

the engine block. It is on the front. ENGINE NUMBER
The transmission number is on a

label on top of the transmission.
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION NUMBER Technical Information
301

０６／０４／２８１４：５２：４９３１ＳＪＣ６１００３０７
Specifications
Dimensions Capacities
Length 206.7 in (5,250 mm) Fuel tank Approx.
Width 78.0 in (1,980 mm) 22.01 US gal (83.3 )
＊1
Height 70.3 in (1,785 mm) Engine Change 1.64 US gal (6.2 )
Wheelbase 122.0 in (3,100 mm) coolant Total 2.14 US gal (8.1 )
Track Front 67.1 in (1,705 mm) Engine oil Change＊2
Rear 66.9 in (1,700 mm) Including 4.5 US qt (4.3 )
filter
Weights Without 4.2 US qt (4.0 )
Gross vehicle weight rating See the tire information label filter
attached to the driver’s doorjamb. Total 5.3 US qt (5.0 )
Gross combined weight＊1 10,088 lbs (4,575 kg) Automatic Change 3.3 US qt (3.1 )
rating (GCWR) transmission Total 8.5 US qt (8.0 )
Maximum load limit 1,530 lbs (690 kg)＊2 fluid
(Payload) 1,480 lbs (670 kg)＊3 Rear Change 2.79 US qt (2.64 )
differential Total 3.01 US qt (2.85 )
＊1 : The GCWR must be reduced 2 percent for every 1,000 feet (305 fluid
meters) of elevation. Transfer Change 0.45 US qt (0.43 )
＊2 : On vehicles without moonroof or navigation system assembly Total 0.48 US qt (0.45 )
＊3 : On vehicles with moonroof and navigation system fluid
Windshield
Air Conditioning washer 4.8 US qt (4.5 )
Refrigerant type HFC-134a (R-134a) reservoir
Charge quantity 21.2−22.9 oz (600−650 g)
Lubricant type ND-OIL8 ＊1 : Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in the
engine
Reserve tank capacity:
0.16 US gal (0.6 )
＊2 : Excluding the oil remaining in the engine
302

０６／０４／２８１４：５３：１３３１ＳＪＣ６１００３０８
Specifications
Lights Fuses
Headlights High/Low 12 V − 60/55 W (HB2) Interior See page 295 or the fuse label
Front turn signal/Parking/ 12 V − 28/8 W attached to the inside of the fuse
Hazard lights box lid under the dashboard.
Rear turn signal/hazard lights 12 V − 21 W Under-hood See page 294 or the fuse box lid.
Brake/Taillights 12 V − 21/5 W
Back-up lights 12 V − 18 W Engine
License plate lights 12 V − 3 CP Type Water cooled 4-stroke SOHC VTEC,
High-mount brake lights 12 V − 3 CP V6 gasoline engine
Individual map lights Front 12 V − 8W Bore x Stroke 3.50 x 3.66 in (89.0 x 93.0 mm)
Rear 12 V − 5W Displacement 211.8 cu-in (3,471 cm )
Bed lights 12 V − 3 CP Compression ratio 10.0 : 1
Console compartment light 12 V − 1.4 W Spark plugs NGK: IZFR5K-11
Glove box light 12 V − 3.4 W DENSO: SKJ16DR-M11
Vanity mirror light 12 V − 2W
Door courtesy lights 12 V − 3.8 W Alignment
Toe-in Front 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Battery Rear 0.00 in (0.0 mm)
Capacity 12 V − 72 AH/20 HR Camber Front −0°50’
12 V − 60 AH/5 HR Rear −0°50’
Caster Front 1°53’
Tires
Size Front/Rear P245/65R17 105S
Spare T165/90R17 105M
Pressure Front/Rear 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
Spare 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
303

０６／０４／２８１４：５３：２１３１ＳＪＣ６１００３０９
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all Treadwear Traction − AA, A, B, C

U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. The treadwear grade is a compara- The traction grades, from highest to
All tires are also graded for tive rating based on the wear rate of lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those
treadwear, traction, and temperature the tire when tested under controlled grades represent the tire’s ability to
performance according to conditions on a specified government stop on wet pavement as measured
Department of Transportation test course. For example, a tire under controlled conditions on
(DOT) standards. The following graded 150 would wear one and one- specified government test surfaces
explains these gradings. half (1 1/2) times as well on the of asphalt and concrete. A tire
government course as a tire graded marked C may have poor traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading 100. The relative performance of performance.
Quality grades can be found where tires depends upon the actual condi-
applicable on the tire sidewall tions of their use, however, and may Warning: The traction grade
between the tread shoulder and the depart significantly from the norm assigned to this tire is based on
maximum section width. For due to variations in driving habits, straight-ahead braking traction tests,
example: service practices, and differences in and does not include acceleration,
Treadwear 200 road characteristics and climate. cornering, hydroplaning, or peak
Traction AA traction characteristics.
Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform

to Federal Safety Requirements in
addition to these grades.
304

０６／０４／２８１４：５３：２５３１ＳＪＣ６１００３１０
DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
Temperature − A, B, C Warning: The temperature grade for

The temperature grades are A (the this tire is established for a tire that
highest), B, and C, representing the is properly inflated and not
tire’s resistance to the generation of overloaded. Excessive speed,
heat, and its ability to dissipate heat underinflation, or excessive loading,
when tested under controlled either separately or in combination,
conditions on a specified indoor can cause heat buildup and possible
laboratory test wheel. Sustained high tire failure.
temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce
tire life, and excessive temperature
can lead to sudden tire failure. The
Grade C corresponds to a level of
performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal
Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No.
109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the
minimum required by law.
305

０６／０４／２８１４：５３：４１３１ＳＪＣ６１００３１１
Tire Labeling
The tires that came on your vehicle 17 − Rim diameter in inches. FW6X − Tire type code.
have a number of markings. Those
you should be aware of are described 105 − Load index (a numerical code 2202 − Date of manufacture.
below. associated with the maximum
load the tire can carry). Maximum Tire Pressure
Tire Size Max Press − The maximum air
Whenever tires are replaced, they S − Speed symbol (an pressure the tire can
should be replaced with tires of the alphabetical code indicating hold.
same size. Below is an example of the maximum speed rating).
tire size with an explanation of what Maximum Tire Load
each component means. Tire Identification Number Max Load − The maximum load the
The tire identification number (TIN) tire can carry at
P245/65R17 105S is a group of numbers and letters maximum air pressure.
that look like the following example
P − Vehicle type (P indicates TIN. TIN is located on the sidewall
passenger vehicle). of the tire.
245 − Tire width in millimeters. DOT B97R FW6X 2202
65 − Aspect ratio (the tire’s section DOT − This indicates that the tire
height as a percentage of its meets all requirements of
width). the U.S. Department of
Transportation.
R − Tire construction code (R
indicates radial). B97R − Manufacturer’s
identification mark.
306

０６／０４／２８１４：５３：４９３１ＳＪＣ６１００３１２
Emissions Controls
The burning of gasoline in your The Clean Air Act intake manifold. They are then
vehicle’s engine produces several by- The United States Clean Air Act＊ drawn into the engine and burned.
products. Some of these are carbon sets standards for automobile
monoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen emissions. It also requires that Evaporative Emissions Control
(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC). automobile manufacturers explain to System
Gasoline evaporating from the tank owners how their emissions controls As gasoline evaporates in the fuel
also produces hydrocarbons. Con- work and what to do to maintain tank, an evaporative emissions
trolling the production of NOx, CO, them. This section summarizes how control canister filled with charcoal
and HC is important to the environ- the emissions controls work. adsorbs the vapor. It is stored in this
ment. Under certain conditions of canister while the engine is off. After
＊
sunlight and climate, NOx and HC In Canada, Honda vehicles comply the engine is started and warmed up,
react to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’ with the Canadian emission the vapor is drawn into the engine
Carbon monoxide does not contri- requirements, as specified in an and burned during driving.
bute to smog creation, but it is a agreement with Environment
poisonous gas. Canada, at the time they are Onboard Refueling Vapor
manufactured. Recovery
The onboard refueling vapor
Crankcase Emissions Control recovery (ORVR) system captures
System the fuel vapors during refueling. The
Your vehicle has a positive vapors are adsorbed in a canister
crankcase ventilation system. This filled with activated carbon. While
keeps gasses that build up in the driving, the fuel vapors are drawn
engine’s crankcase from going into into the engine and burned off.
the atmosphere. The positive
crankcase ventilation valve routes
them from the crankcase back to the
307

０６／０４／２８１４：５３：５９３１ＳＪＣ６１００３１３
Emissions Controls
Exhaust Emissions Controls Ignition Timing Control System Replacement Parts

The exhaust emissions controls This system constantly adjusts the The emissions control systems are
include four systems: PGM-FI, ignition timing, reducing the amount designed and certified to work to-
ignition timing control, exhaust gas of HC, CO, and NOx produced. gether in reducing emissions to
recirculation, and three way catalytic levels that comply with the Clean Air
converter. These four systems work Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR) Act. To make sure the emissions
together to control the engine’s System remain low, you should use only new
combustion and minimize the The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR) Honda replacement parts or their
amount of HC, CO, and NOx that system takes some of the exhaust equivalent for repairs. Using lower
come out the tailpipe. The exhaust gas and routes it back into the intake quality parts may increase the
emissions control systems are manifold. Adding exhaust gas to the emissions from your vehicle.
separate from the crankcase and air/fuel mixture reduces the amount
evaporative emissions control of NOx produced when the fuel is The emissions control systems are
systems. burned. covered by warranties separate from
the rest of your vehicle. Read your
PGM-FI System Three Way Catalytic Converter warranty manual for more informa-
The PGM-FI system uses sequential The three way catalytic converter is tion.
multiport fuel injection. in the exhaust system. Through
It has three subsystems: air intake, chemical reactions, it converts HC,
engine control, and fuel control. The CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaust
powertrain control module (PCM) to carbon dioxide (CO2), nitrogen
uses various sensors to determine (N2), and water vapor.
how much air is going into the
engine. It then controls how much
fuel to inject under all operating
conditions.
308

０６／０４／２８１４：５４：０６３１ＳＪＣ６１００３１４
Three Way Catalytic Converter
The three way catalytic converter

contains precious metals that serve
as catalysts, promoting chemical
reactions to convert the exhaust
gasses without affecting the metals.
The catalytic converter is referred to
as a three-way catalyst, since it acts
on HC, CO, and NOx. A replacement
unit must be an original Honda part
or its equivalent.
WARM UP THREE WAY CATALYTIC
The three way catalytic converter THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER CONVERTERS
must operate at a high temperature
for the chemical reactions to take A defective three way catalytic Keep the engine well maintained.
place. It can set on fire any converter contributes to air pollution,
combustible materials that come and can impair your engine’s per- Have your vehicle diagnosed and
near it. Park your vehicle away from formance. Follow these guidelines to repaired if it is misfiring, back-
high grass, dry leaves, or other protect your vehicle’s three way firing, stalling, or otherwise not
flammables. catalytic converter. running properly.
Always use unleaded gasoline.

Even a small amount of leaded
gasoline can contaminate the
catalyst metals, making the three
way catalytic converter ineffective.
309

０６／０４／２８１４：５４：１５３１ＳＪＣ６１００３１５
State Emissions Testing
Testing of Readiness Codes Make sure the vehicle has been accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed
If you take your vehicle for a state parked with the engine off for 6 may vary slightly; this is okay.) If
emissions test shortly after the hours or more. you cannot do this for a
battery has been disconnected or continuous 90 seconds because of
gone dead, it may not pass the test. Make sure the ambient traffic conditions, drive for at least
This is because of certain ‘‘readiness temperature is between 40° and 30 seconds, then repeat it two
codes’’ that must be set in the on- 95°F. more times (for a total of 90
board diagnostics for the emissions seconds).
systems. These codes are erased Without touching the accelerator
when the battery is disconnected, pedal, start the engine, and let it Then drive in city/suburban
and set again only after several days idle for 20 seconds. traffic for at least 10 minutes.
of driving under a variety of When traffic conditions allow, let
conditions. Keep the vehicle in Park. Increase the vehicle coast for several
the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and seconds without using the
If the testing facility determines that hold it there until the temperature accelerator pedal or the brake
the readiness codes are not set, you gauge rises to at least 1/4 of the pedal.
will be requested to return at a later scale (about 3 minutes).
date to complete the test. If you must Stop the vehicle, turn off the
get the vehicle retested within the Select a nearby lightly traveled ignition switch, and leave it off for
next two or three days, you can major highway where you can 30 minutes.
condition the vehicle for retesting by maintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph
doing the following. (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 If the testing facility determines the
minutes. Drive on the highway in readiness codes are still not set, see
Make sure the gas tank is nearly, D. Do not use the cruise control. your dealer.
but not completely, full (around When traffic allows, drive for 90
3/4). seconds without moving the
310

０６／０４／２８１４：５４：１９３１ＳＪＣ６１００３１６
Warranty and Customer Relations
Customer Service
Information ................................. 312
Warranty Coverages ..................... 313
Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Vehicles) ........................... 314

Authorized Manuals ...................... 315
311

０６／０４／２８１４：５４：２７３１ＳＪＣ６１００３１７
Customer Service Information
Honda dealership personnel are Canadian Owners: When you call or write, please give
trained professionals. They should CUSTOMER RELATIONS us this information:
be able to answer all your questions. RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÉLE
If you encounter a problem that your Honda Canada Inc. Vehicle identification number (see
dealership does not solve to your 715 Milner Avenue page 300 )
satisfaction, please discuss it with Toronto, ON
the dealership’s management. The M1B 2K8 Name and address of the dealer
service manager or general manager who services your vehicle
can help. Almost all problems are Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9
solved in this way. Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909 Date of purchase
Toronto (416) 287-4776
If you are dissatisfied with the Mileage on your vehicle
decision made by the dealership’s In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin
management, contact your Honda Islands: Your name, address, and
Customer Service Office. telephone number
Bella International
U.S. Owners: P.O. Box 190816 A detailed description of the
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. San Juan, PR 00919-0816 problem
Automobile Customer Service
Mail Stop 500-2N-7A Tel: (787) 620-7098 Name of the dealer who sold the
1919 Torrance Boulevard vehicle to you
Torrance, California 90501-2746
Tel: (800) 999-1009
312

０６／０４／２８１４：５４：３７３１ＳＪＣ６１００３１８
Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Seat Belt Limited Warranty − a seat Replacement Battery Limited
Your new vehicle is covered by these belt that fails to function properly is Warranty − provides prorated
warranties: covered by a limited warranty. coverage for a replacement battery
Please read your warranty booklet purchased from your dealer.
New Vehicle Limited Warranty − for details.

covers your new vehicle, except for Replacement Muffler Lifetime
the battery, emissions control Rust Perforation Limited Warranty Limited Warranty − provides
systems, and accessories, against − all exterior body panels are coverage for as long as the pur-
defects in materials and covered for rust-through from the chaser of the muffler owns the
workmanship. inside for the specified time period vehicle.
with no mileage limit.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Restrictions and exclusions apply to
Warranty and Emissions Accessory Limited Warranty − all these warranties. Please read the
Performance Warranty − these two Honda accessories are covered 2007 Honda warranty information
warranties cover your vehicle’s under this warranty. Time and booklet that came with your vehicle
emissions control systems. Time, mileage limits depend on the type of for precise information on warranty
mileage, and coverage are accessory and other factors. Please coverages. Your vehicle’s original
conditional. Please read your read your warranty booklet for tires are covered by their
warranty booklet for exact details. manufacturer. Tire warranty
information. information is in a separate booklet.
Replacement Parts Limited
Original Equipment Battery Limited Warranty − covers all Honda Canadian Owners
Warranty − this warranty gives up replacement parts against defects in Please refer to the 2007 warranty
to 100 % credit toward a replacement materials and workmanship. manual that came with your vehicle.
battery.
313

０６／０４／２８１４：５４：４１３１ＳＪＣ６１００３１９
Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)
If you believe that your vehicle has a If NHTSA receives similar com- To contact NHTSA, you may call the
defect which could cause a crash or plaints, it may open an investigation, Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at
could cause injury or death, you and if it finds that a safety defect 1-888-327-4236 (TTY:1-800-424-9153);
should immediately inform the exists in a group of vehicles, it may go to http://www.safercar.gov; or
National Highway Traffic Safety order a recall and remedy campaign. write to: Administrator, NHTSA,
Administration (NHTSA), in addition However, NHTSA cannot become 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington,
to notifying American Honda Motor involved in individual problems DC 20590. You can also obtain other
Co., Inc. between you, your dealer, or information about motor vehicle
American Honda Motor Co., Inc. safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
314

０６／０４／２８１４：５４：５１３１ＳＪＣ６１００３２０
Authorized Manuals
Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadian
The publications shown below can be purchased from Helm owners should contact their authorized Honda dealer.
Incorporated. You can order in any of three ways:
Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this page ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356
Call Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356 (credit card orders only) (NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)
Go online at www. helminc. com Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. − 6:00 P.M. EST
If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc. MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00
at 1-800-782-4356. OR
Publication Form Description Price By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You can
Form Number Each＊ pay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail to
61SJC01 2006-07 Honda Ridgeline $70.00 Helm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.
Service Manual Base Book
Authorized Manuals
61SJC01EL 2006-07 Honda Ridgeline $50.00 VEHICLE MODEL Price Total
PUBLICATION NUMBER Qty
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual ２ Name Year Each＊ Price
61SJC30 2006-07 Honda Ridgeline $44.00
０
０
Body Repair Manual ７
31SJC611 2007 Honda Ridgeline $34.00
Owner’s Manual Ｈ
Ｏ
31SJC800 2007 Honda Ridgeline Navigation Manual $29.00 Ｎ
31SJCQ10 2007 Honda Ridgeline $12.00
Quick Start Guide ＊
Prices are subject to change without TOTAL MATERIAL
31SJCM10 2007 Ridgeline Honda Service History $12.00 notice and without incurring obligation.
Mich. Purchases
HON-R Order Form for Previous Years- FREE Add 6% Sales Tax
Indicate Year and Model Desired Orders are mailed within 10 days. Please HANDLING CHARGE $6.95
＊
Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation. allow adequate time for delivery.
GRAND TOTAL
315

０６／０４／２８１４：５５：００３１ＳＪＣ６１００３２１
Authorized Manuals
NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name, Service Manual:
and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment should
be sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shown This manual covers maintenance and recommended
below for a quotation. procedures for repair to engine and chassis components.
Ｓ It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simple
Ｈ enough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-
Ｉ stand.
Customer Name Attention
Ｐ
Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:
Ｔ Street Address − No P.O. Box Number Apartment Number
This manual complements the service manual by
Ｏ providing in-depth troubleshooting information for each
City State & Zip Code electrical circuit in your vehicle.
Daytime Telephone Number ( )
Body Repair Manual:
This manual describes the procedures involved in the
Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc − U.S. funds only. replacement of damaged body parts.
Ｐ Do not send cash
Ａ Master VISA Check here if your billing address is different

Ｙ Card from the shipping address shown above.
Ｍ Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.
Ｅ −
Ｎ
Ｔ
CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE
These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14
days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.
P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356
316

０６／０４／２８１４：５５：０５３１ＳＪＣ６１００３２２
Index
A Automatic Speed Control.............. 165 Belts, Seat ..................................... 8, 19

Automatic Transmission............... 197 Beverage Holders .......................... 114
Accessories and Modifications .... 184 Capacity, Fluid ........................... 302 Booster Seats ................................... 50
ACCESSORY (Ignition Key Checking Fluid Level ................ 251 Brakes
Position) ........................................ 82 Shifting ........................................ 197 Anti-lock System (ABS) ............ 208
Accessory Power Sockets............. 116 Shift Lever Position Break-in, New Linings .............. 178
Additives, Engine Oil..................... 247 Indicators ................................ 197 Fluid ............................................ 253
Adjusting the Steering wheel ......... 79 Shift Lever Positions ................. 198 Bulb Replacement ............. 257, 258
Advanced Airbags............................ 25 Shift Lock Release ..................... 202 Parking ........................................ 109
Airbag (SRS) ...................................... 9 Auxiliary Input Jack ....................... 161 System Indicator .................. 63, 290
Air Conditioning System ............... 122 Wear Indicators ......................... 207
Usage .......................................... 123 B Braking System.............................. 207
Air Outlets (Vents) ................ 124, 129 Break-in, New Vehicle .................. 178
Air Pressure, Tires ........................ 266 Back Window Brightness Control, Instruments ... 78
Antifreeze ....................................... 249 Indicator ........................................ 69 Brights, Headlights ......................... 76
Anti-lock Brakes (ABS) Operation .................................... 105
Indicator ................................ 63, 208 Battery
Operation .................................... 208 Charging System
Anti-theft, Audio System............... 162 Indicator............................ 62, 288
Anti-theft Steering Column Lock .. 82 Jump Starting ............................. 284
Armrests ......................................... 101 Maintenance ............................... 270
Audio System ................. 133, 142, 159 Specifications ............................. 303
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ...... 84 Bed Lights
INDEX
Automatic Heated Wiper Indicator ........................................ 69
Zone ....................................... 76, 127 Operation .................................... 120
Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners .... 19 Before Driving ............................... 177 CONTINUED

０６／０４／２８１４：５５：１０３１ＳＪＣ６１００３２３
Index
Bulb Replacement CD Player........................................ 151 Coat Hooks ..................................... 115

Back-up Lights ........................... 257 Certification Label ......................... 300 Code, Audio System ...................... 162
Brake Lights............................... 257 Chains, tire ..................................... 269 CO in the Exhaust ......................... 307
Bed Lights .................................. 260 Change Oil Compact Spare Tire....................... 274
Front Turn Signal /Parking/ How to ......................................... 247 Compass.......................................... 168
Hazard Lights ........................ 256 When to....................................... 235 Console Compartment .................. 113
Headlights .................................. 255 Changing a Flat Tire ..................... 275 Consumer Information.................. 312
High-mount Brake Light .......... 258 Charging System Indicator .... 62, 288 Controls, Instruments and .............. 57
License Plate Lights .................. 259 Checklist, Before Driving ............. 195 Coolant
Rear Bulbs (Brake/Taillights, Childproof Door Locks ................... 84 Adding ......................................... 249
Turn Signal/Hazard Lights, Child Safety ...................................... 32 Checking ..................................... 182
Back-up Lights) ................. 257 Booster Seats ............................... 50 Proper Solution .......................... 249
Specifications ............................. 303 Child Seats .................................... 39 Temperature Gauge .................... 72
Bulbs, Halogen ............................... 255 Important Safety Reminders ...... 32 Courtesy Light ............................... 118
Infants ........................................... 37 Crankcase Emissions Control
C Larger Children ........................... 49 System......................................... 307
LATCH.......................................... 41 Cruise Control
Capacities Chart............................. 302 Risks with Airbags....................... 33 Indicator ........................................ 65
Carbon Monoxide Hazard .............. 53 Small Children.............................. 38 Operation .................................... 165
Cargo Hooks ............................ 97, 114 Tether ..................................... 41, 46 Cup Holders.................................... 114
Carrying Cargo .............................. 186 Where Should a Child Sit? .......... 33 Customer Service Office .............. 312
CAUTION, Explanation of .............. iii Child Seats ........................................ 39
CD Care .......................................... 161 LATCH.......................................... 41 D
CD Changer ........................... 152, 153 Tether Anchorage Points ........... 46
CD Player/Changer Error Climate Control System ................ 122 DANGER, Explanation of ................ iii
Messages .................................... 162 Clock ............................................... 163 Dashboard .................................... 3, 58
II

０６／０４／２８１４：５５：１５３１ＳＪＣ６１００３２４
Index
Daytime Running Lights................. 78 Dual Temperature Control ........... 130 Oil, What Kind to Use ............... 246
Dead Battery .................................. 284 Dust and Pollen Filter ................... 262 Overheating................................ 286
Defects, Reporting Safety＊ .......... 314 Specifications ............................. 303
Defrosting the Windows ............... 127 E Speed Limiter ............................. 201
Differential Fluid, Rear ................. 252 Starting........................................ 196
Dimensions ..................................... 302 Economy, Fuel ............................... 183 Engine, if it won’t start .................. 283
Dimming the Headlights ................ 76 Emergencies................................... 273 Evaporative Emissions Control
Dipstick Battery, Jump Starting .............. 284 System......................................... 307
Automatic Transmission........... 251 Brake System Indicator ............ 290 Exhaust Fumes ................................ 53
Engine Oil ................................... 182 Changing a Flat Tire ................. 275 Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Directional Signals ........................... 76 Charging System Indicator ...... 288 System......................................... 308
Disc Brake Wear Indicators ......... 207 Checking the Fuses................... 291 Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat
Disposal of Used Oil ...................... 248 Hazard Warning Flashers .......... 79 Belts by ......................................... 16
Door and Tailgate Open Monitor .. 64 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ...... 288
Doors Malfunction Indicator Lamp .... 289 F
Locking and Unlocking... 83, 84, 86 Overheated Engine ................... 286
Lockout Prevention ..................... 83 Stuck Vehicle ............................. 297 Fan, Interior.................................... 123
Power Door Locks ....................... 83 Towing ........................................ 296 Features .......................................... 121
DOT Tire Quality Grading＊ ......... 304 Emergency Brake .......................... 109 Filling the Fuel Tank ..................... 179
Driver and Passenger Safety ............ 5 Emissions Controls........................ 307 Filters
Driving ............................................ 193 Engine Dust and Pollen .......................... 262
Economy ..................................... 183 Coolant Temperature Gauge ..... 72 Oil ................................................ 248
D3 .................................................... 199 Malfunction Indicator Flashers, Hazard Warning.............. 79
INDEX
Dual-Action Tailgate Lamp ................................. 62, 289 Flat Tire, Changing a .................... 275
Indicator .................................. 64, 94 Oil Life Display .......................... 235
Operation ...................................... 92 Oil Pressure Indicator ......... 62, 288 CONTINUED
III

０６／０４／２８１４：５５：２１３１ＳＪＣ６１００３２５
Index
Floor Mats ...................................... 261 G Hazard Warning Flashers............... 79

Fluids Headlights .................................. 75, 76
Automatic Transmission........... 251 Gas Mileage, Improving................ 183 Aiming ......................................... 255
Brake ........................................... 253 Gasoline Automatic Lighting Off ............... 77
Power Steering........................... 254 Fuel Reserve Indicator ................ 65 Control Dial .................................. 76
Rear Differential ........................ 252 Gauge ............................................ 71 Daytime Running Lights＊＊ ........ 78
Transfer Assembly .................... 253 Octane Requirement ................. 178 High Beam Indicator ................... 65
Windshield Washer ................... 250 Tank, Filling the......................... 179 High Beams, Turning on ...... 75, 76
FM Stereo Radio Gas Station Procedures................. 179 Low Beams, Turning on ............. 76
Reception .................................... 140 Gauges Reminder Chime .......................... 77
Folding the Rear Seats .................. 103 Engine Coolant Temperature .... 72 Replacing Halogen Bulbs ......... 255
Four-way Flashers ........................... 79 Fuel ................................................ 71 Turning On ................................... 76
Front Seat ......................................... 98 Speedometer ................................ 70 Head Restraints ............................. 102
Adjusting............................... 98, 100 Tachometer .................................. 70 Heated Mirrors .............................. 111
Airbags .......................................... 23 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Heaters, Seats ................................ 104
Heaters........................................ 104 Rating) ........................................ 213 Heating and Cooling ...................... 123
Fuel .................................................. 178 GCWR (Gross Combined Weight High-Low Beam Switch .................. 75
Fill Door and Cap....................... 179 Rating) ........................................ 213 HomeLink Universal
Gauge ............................................ 71 Gearshift Lever Positions ............. 198 Transceiver................................. 171
Octane Requirement ................. 178 Glove Box ....................................... 115 Hood, Opening the ........................ 181
Oxygenated ................................ 178 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Horn................................................... 74
Reserve Indicator......................... 65 Rating) ........................................ 213
Tank, Filling the......................... 179 I
Fuses, Checking the ...................... 291 H
Identification Number, Vehicle.... 300
Halogen Headlight Bulbs.............. 255
IV

０６／０４／２８１４：５５：２７３１ＳＪＣ６１００３２６
Index
Ignition Low Oil Pressure ......................... 62 Instrument Panel ......................... 3, 58

Keys............................................... 80 Low Tire Pressure ....................... 68 Instrument Panel Brightness ......... 78
Switch ............................................ 82 Maintenance Minder ................... 67 Interior Lights ................................ 118
Timing Control System ............. 308 Malfunction Indicator Lamp Introduction ......................................... i
Immobilizer System......................... 81 (MIL) ........................................ 62
Important Safety Precautions .......... 6 Side Airbag Off ............................ 62 J
In-Bed Trunk .................................... 95 Seat Belt ........................................ 61
Emergency Opener ..................... 96 SRS ................................................ 62 Jacking Up the Vehicle ................. 277
Open Indicator ............................. 69 Tailgate Open ............................... 64 Jack, Tire ........................................ 275
Indicators, Instrument Panel .......... 59 Tire Pressure Monitor ................ 68 Jump Starting ................................. 284
ABS (Anti-lock Brake) ................ 63 TPMS System .............................. 68
A/T Temperature ........................ 66 Turn Signal and Hazard K
Back Window Open ..................... 69 Warning .................................... 64
Bed Lights On .............................. 69 VSA Activation ............................. 67 Keys ................................................... 80
Brake (Parking and Brake VSA System .................................. 67
System) ..................................... 63 VTM-4 ........................................... 66 L
Charging System ......................... 62 Washer Level ............................... 65
Cruise Control .............................. 65 Individual Map Lights ................... 119 Label, Certification ........................ 300
Door Open .................................... 64 Infant Restraint ................................ 37 Lane Change, Signaling .................. 76
DRL (Daytime Running Infant Seats ....................................... 37 Lap/Shoulder Belts ................... 14, 19
Lights)＊＊................................... 65 Inflation, Proper Tire .................... 266 Light Control Dial ............................ 76
High Beam .................................... 65 Information Display ......................... 70
In-Bed Trunk Open ..................... 69 Engine Oil Life Indicator .......... 235
INDEX
Key (Immobilizer System) ......... 63 Maintenance Items............ 238, 242
Lights On ...................................... 66 Inside Mirror .................................. 110
Low Fuel ....................................... 65 Inspection, Tire .............................. 266 CONTINUED

０６／０４／２８１４：５５：３３３１ＳＪＣ６１００３２７
Index
Lights Record .................................. 243-244 Change, When to ....................... 235

Bulb Replacement ..................... 255 Minder ................................. 235-242 Checking Engine ....................... 182
Indicator ........................................ 66 Minder Indicator .......................... 67 Filter ............................................ 247
Interior ........................................ 118 Safety........................................... 234 Pressure Indicator ............... 62, 288
Parking .......................................... 76 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .. 62, 289 Selecting Proper Viscosity
Turn Signal ................................... 76 Manual Seat Adjustments............... 98 Chart ....................................... 246
Load Limits............................. 187, 212 Meters, Gauges ................................ 70 ON (Ignition Key Position) ............ 82
LOCK (Ignition Key Position) ....... 82 Mirrors, Adjusting ......................... 111 Outside Mirrors ............................. 111
Locks Modifying Your Vehicle................ 185 Overheating, Engine ..................... 286
Anti-theft Steering Column ........ 82 Moonroof ........................................ 108 Owner’s Maintenance Checks ..... 241
Fuel Fill Door ............................. 179 Oxygenated Fuels.......................... 178
Glove Box ................................... 115 N
In-Bed Trunk ................................ 95 P
Lockout Prevention ..................... 83 Neutral Gear Position.................... 199
Power Door .................................. 83 New Vehicle Break-in ................... 178 Panel Brightness Control ............... 78
Low Coolant Level ......................... 182 NOTICE, Explanation of .................... i Park Gear Position......................... 198
Low Fuel Indicator .......................... 65 Numbers, Identification ................ 300 Parking ............................................ 206
Low Oil Pressure Indicator .... 62, 288 Parking Brake ................................ 109
Lubricant Specifications Chart .... 302 O Parking Lights.................................. 76
Luggage, Storing (Cargo) ............ 186 Parking Over Things that Burn ... 309
Octane Requirement, Gasoline .... 178 PGM-FI System.............................. 308
M Odometer .......................................... 70 Pickup Bed
Off-Highway Driving ..................... 227 Carrying Cargo .......................... 189
Maintenance ................................... 233 Off-Road Precautions .................... 228 Lights .......................................... 120
Owner’s Maintenance Oil Power Seat Adjustments ............... 100
Checks .................................... 241 Change, How to ......................... 247 Power Socket Locations................ 116
VI

０６／０４／２８１４：５５：３９３１ＳＪＣ６１００３２８
Index
Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts .......... 16 Remote Transmitter ........................ 89 Safety Messages ............................... iii
Protecting Adults and Teens.......... 11 Replacement Information Satellite Radio, XM＊ ...................... 142
Additional Safety Precautions .... 17 Engine Oil and Filter ................. 247 Seat Belts ...................................... 8, 18
Advice for Pregnant Women...... 16 Fuses ........................................... 291 Additional Information ................ 18
Protecting Children ......................... 32 Light Bulbs ................................. 255 Automatic Seat Belt
General Guidelines ...................... 32 Minder......................................... 242 Tensioners ................................ 19
Protecting Infants ........................ 37 Timing Belt ................................. 254 Cleaning ...................................... 261
Protecting Larger Children ........ 49 Tires ............................................ 275 Lap/Shoulder Belt ....................... 19
Protecting Small Children .......... 38 Wiper Blades .............................. 262 Maintenance ................................. 20
Using Child Seats with Replacing Seat Belts After a Reminder Light and
Tethers...................................... 46 Crash ............................................. 20 Beeper ................................. 18, 61
Using LATCH .............................. 41 Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant .... 182 System Components.................... 18
Reverse Gear Position................... 198 Use During Pregnancy................ 16
R Rotation, Tire ................................. 267 Wearing a Lap/Shoulder Belt .... 14
Seats .................................................. 98
Radiator Overheating .................... 286 S Adjusting the Seat ............... 98, 100
Radio/CD Sound Folding the Rear Seats .............. 103
System ........................ 133, 142, 148 Safety Belts................................... 8, 19 Head Restraints ......................... 102
Rear Differential Fluid .................. 252 Safety Defects, Reporting＊ .......... 314 Heater ......................................... 104
Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement ... 257 Safety Features .................................. 7 Security System ............................. 164
Rear View Mirror........................... 110 Airbags ............................................ 9 Serial Number ................................ 300
Rear View Mirror with Door Locks ................................... 11 Service Intervals ............................ 242
Compass...................................... 168 Head Restraints ........................... 13 Service Manual, Purchasing＊....... 315
INDEX
Rear (Back) Window ..................... 106 Seat Belts .................................. 8, 18 Service Station Procedures .......... 179
Reclining the Seat-Backs ........ 98, 100 Seats and Seat-Backs ............ 11, 12
Remote Audio Controls................. 161 Safety Labels, Location of .............. 54 CONTINUED
VII

０６／０４／２８１４：５５：４３３１ＳＪＣ６１００３２９
Index
Shifting the Automatic How Your Front Airbags T

Transmission .............................. 197 Work.......................................... 23
Shift Lever Position Indicators .... 197 How Your Side Airbags Work.... 26 Tachometer ...................................... 70
Shift Lock Release ......................... 202 How Your Side Curtain Airbags Tailgate, Dual-Action
Side Airbags ..................................... 26 Work.......................................... 28 Indicator .................................. 64, 94
Side Curtain Airbags ....................... 28 SRS Indicator.............................. 28, 62 Operation ...................................... 92
Side Marker (Parking) START (Ignition Key Position) ..... 82 Taillights, Changing Bulbs in ....... 257
Lights, Bulb Replacement in .... 256 Starting the Engine........................ 196 Taking Care of the Unexpected .. 273
Signaling Turns ................................ 76 With a Dead Battery ................. 284 Technical Descriptions
Snow Tires ...................................... 269 State Emissions Testing ............... 310 DOT Tire Quality Grading＊ ..... 304
Sound System................. 133, 142, 148 Steam Coming from Engine ......... 286 Emissions Control Systems ...... 307
Spare Tire Steering Wheel Three Way Catalytic
Inflating............................... 265, 274 Adjustment ................................... 79 Converter ................................ 309
Specifications ..................... 269, 303 Anti-theft Column Lock .............. 82 Temperature Gauge ........................ 72
Specifications Charts..................... 302 Stereo Sound System .... 133, 142, 148 Tensioners, Seat Belts .................... 19
Speed Control ................................. 165 Storing Your Vehicle ..................... 272 Theft Protection............................. 162
Speedometer .................................... 70 Stuck Vehicle ................................. 297 Three Way Catalytic Converter ... 309
SRS, Additional Information........... 21 Sun Visor......................................... 117 Timing Belt ..................................... 254
Additional Safety Precautions .... 31 Sunglasses Holder ......................... 115 Tire Chains ..................................... 269
Airbag System Components ....... 21 Supplemental Restraint System Tire, How to Change a Flat .......... 275
Airbag Service .............................. 30 (SRS) Tire Labeling .................................. 306
How the Passenger Airbag Off Servicing ....................................... 30 Tire Pressure Monitoring
Indicator Works ....................... 29 SRS Indicator.......................... 28, 62 System (TPMS) ..................... 204
How the Side Airbag Off System Components.................... 21 Low Tire Pressure
Indicator Works ....................... 29 Synthetic Oil ................................... 247 Indicator............................ 68, 204
How the SRS Indicator Works ... 28
VIII

０６／０４／２８１４：５５：４９３１ＳＪＣ６１００３３０
Index
Required Federal Transfer Assembly Fluid .............. 253 Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)
Explanation............................. 175 Transmission System..................................... 210
Tire Pressure Monitor ........ 68, 205 Checking Fluid Level ................ 251 VSA System Indicator ......... 67, 210
TPMS Indicator ................... 68, 205 Fluid Selection............................ 252 VSA Activation Indicator .... 67, 210
Tires ................................................ 265 Identification Number............... 301 VSA Off Switch .......................... 211
Air Pressure ............................... 266 Shifting the Automatic .............. 197 Vehicle Storage .............................. 272
Checking Wear .......................... 266 Treadwear ...................................... 304 Ventilation ...................................... 125
Compact Spare ........................... 274 Trip Meter ........................................ 71 VIN .................................................. 300
DOT Tire Quality Grading＊ ..... 304 Trunk, In-Bed ................................... 95 Viscosity, Oil................................... 246
Inflation ....................................... 265 Turn Signals ..................................... 76 VTM-4 Lock ................................... 203
Inspection ................................... 266
Maintenance ............................... 267 U W
Replacing .................................... 268
Rotating....................................... 267 Unexpected, Taking Care WARNING, Explanation of ............. iii
Snow ............................................ 269 of the ........................................... 273 Warning Labels, Location of .......... 54
Specifications ..................... 269, 303 Uniform Tire Quality Grading＊ ... 304 Warranty Coverages＊ ................... 313
Tire Chains ................................. 269 Unleaded Gasoline......................... 178 Washer, Windshield
Tools, Tire Changing .................... 275 Used Oil, How to Dispose of ........ 248 Checking the Fluid Level ......... 250
Towing Level Indicator ............................. 65
A Trailer ...................................... 212 V Operation ...................................... 75
Emergency Wrecker ................. 296 Wheels ............................................ 264
Equipment .................................. 220 Vanity Mirror ................................. 117 Adjusting the Steering ................ 79
Equipment and Accessories ..... 216 Vehicle Capacity Load .......... 187, 302 Wrench ....................................... 276
INDEX
Weight Limit .............................. 212 Vehicle Dimensions....................... 302
Trailer Loading .......................... 214 Vehicle Identification Number..... 300
Trailer Towing Tips .................. 220 CONTINUED
IX

０６／０４／２８１４：５５：５４３１ＳＪＣ６１００３３１
Index
Windows
Operating the Power ................. 105
Windshield
Defroster .................................... 125
Washers ........................................ 75
Wiper Zone, Heated ............ 76, 127
Wipers, Windshield
Changing Blades ........................ 262
Operation ...................................... 75
Worn Tires ..................................... 266
Wrecker, Emergency Towing ...... 296
XM Satellite Radio＊ ....................... 142

＊
: U.S. only

０６／０４／２８１４：５５：５５３１ＳＪＣ６１００３３２

０６／０４／２８１４：５６：０９３１ＳＪＣ６１００３３３
Service Information Summary
Gasoline: Power Steering Fluid: Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Unleaded gasoline, pump octane Honda Power Steering Fluid Front/Rear:
number of 87 or higher. preferred, or another brand of 32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )
power steering fluid as a Compact Spare Tire:
Fuel Tank Capacity: temporary replacement. Do not 60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )
22.01 US gal (83.3 ) use ATF (see page 254 ).
Recommended Engine Oil: Brake Fluid:

API Premium grade 5W-20 Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid
detergent oil (see page 246 ). DOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 or
DOT 4 brake fluid as a temporary
Oil change capacity (including replacement (see page 253 ).
filter):
4.5 US qt (4.3 ) Rear Differential Fluid:
Honda VTM-4 Differential Fluid
Automatic Transmission Fluid: (see page 252 ).
Honda ATF-Z1 (Automatic
Transmission Fluid) preferred, or Transfer Assembly Fluid:
a DEXRON III ATF as a SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosity
temporary replacement (see page hypoid gear oil, API service
251 ). classified GL4 or GL5 only (see
page 253 ).

2007 Ridgeline: Owner's Manual (Unlinked)

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2007 Ridgeline: Owner's Manual (Unlinked)

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

2007 Ridgeline

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

OWNER This owner’s manual should be considered

This owner’s manual covers all models of

The information and specifications included

DEALER NAME DEALER NO. POUR CLIENTS CANADIEN

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Maintaining your vehicle according to the maintenance minder shown in the

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

California Proposition 65 Warning

Event Date Recorders

Service Diagnostic Recorders

California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A Few Words About Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Important Handling Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Vehicle at a Glance (main controls) ................................................................................................ 3

Driving (engine and transmission operation).......................................................................................... 193

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only) (how to order) ................................................................................... 315

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Contents Before Driving Technical Information

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Vehicle at a Glance

Your Vehicle at a Glance

POWER WINDOW GLOVE BOX

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Vehicle at a Glance

MOONROOF SWITCH＊2 INSTRUMENT PANEL SHIFT LEVER (P.197)

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Driver and Passenger Safety

Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Important Safety Precautions

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Your vehicle is equipped with many

Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Seat Belts Why Wear Seat Belts

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Help keep you in a good position Airbags

Driver and Passenger Safety

Of course, seat belts cannot

What you should do: Always wear

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Protecting Adults and Teens

Driver and Passenger Safety

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Protecting Adults and Teens

If you sit too close to the steering 3.Adjust the Seat-Backs

Passengers with adjustable seat-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Protecting Adults and Teens

4.Adjust the Head Restraints When a passenger is seated in the

Driver and Passenger Safety

Adjust the seat-back to an

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine